“The Secret Goals Of” “United Nations”

“THE SECRET GOALS OF” “UNITED NATIONS”

“NEW WORLD ORDER”

And their ultimate goal to rule as “GOVERNEMENT OF THE WORLD”

Researched by:

Lalit C. Shah Author of “Proposed New Democratic Charter of United Nations 2013”

For more information Visit: www.uncharterproposal.com

Lalit C. Shah C-1, Ceebros Castle, 15, Valmiki Street, T. Nagar, Chennai 600 017 India Phone; 91 44 2834 3131 Mobile: 93810 00693 Email id: lalitcshah2003 @gmail.com

INDEX Pages 1-2

Page Nos Title – “Secret Goals of United Nations” - 1

1. “A Chronology of the UN the Revolutionary Steps to Global Tyranny and the radical minds behind “The New World Order” (The Hidden Control of the Council on Foreign Relations (CFR)) 4 -30

2. The Revolutionary Roots of the UN The Power Elite behind the New World Order (The Hidden Control of the Council on Foreign Relations (CFR)) 31-41

3. “Council on Foreign Relations” – The Hidden Control of the Council on Foreign Relations (CFR) () 42-45

4. Hidden Agenda of United Nations ()

5. History’s Mysteries Secret Societies - Showing one plot summary – ()

6. NO.1 BILDERBERG GROUP – 46 - 62 Annual meeting of around 130 North-Atlantic Elites from the fields of energy, finance, government, intelligence, academia and the media. –

7. NO.2 ILLUMINATI - Secret Bavarian secret society active at the end of the 18th century and modern blanket term for the crème de la elite crème. 63 - 65

8. NO.3 SKULL AND BONES - Elite senior fraternity at Yale University- 66 - 69

9. NO.4 COUNCIL ON FOREIGN RELATIONS - 3000 elites from academia, government, media - intelligence, military, banking and top corporations. 70-71

10. Excerpts and Quotations - The Rockefellers, Morgans – 72- 74 and the Global Media Censors

11. No.5 TRILATERAL COMMISSION 75 David Rockefeller’s elite think tank of over 300 private citizens from Europe, Asia, and North America.

12. NO.6 PRIORY OF SION (PRIEURÉ DE SION) 76 - 77 Ancient secret society sworn to protect the holy bloodline of Jesus Christ and Mary Magdalene

13. NO.7 BOHEMIAN GROVE 78 - 79 Male elites meet every July for a 2 week encampment at private campground

14. NO.8 FREEMASONRY 80 -81 The Founding Founders, Freemasonry and the capital of the United States

15. NO.9 COMMITTEE OF 300 82 - 84 A group of Three Hundred ruling individual descendant from the Black Nobility

16. NO.10 KNIGHTS TEMPLAR - 85 - 88 Military order of warrior monks founded in the aftermath of the First Crusade

17. “The Elite” Engineering People to Love Their Servitude: 89 - 94 The Essence of the “New World Order”

18. UNESCO's - Eugenics is about the social organization and control of humanity. 95 - 97

19. The “New World Order” - See also The Revolutionary Roots of the UN 98 - 107 See Chronology of UN Trade Biblical truth for a global spirituality and "service learning"

20. The Rockefellers, Morgans - and the Global Media Censors - 108 – 111

21. “New World Order” 112 – 115

22. The On-Going Conspiracy To Create “A One World Dictatorship” 116 - 121

23. Brave New Schools Chapter 2 – UNESCO - The International Agenda 122 – 140

24. The UN Plan for Your Mental Health WHO 141 – 150

25. Trading U.S. Rights for UN Rules A report on President Clinton's 151 - 166

"The Implementation of Human Rights Treaties"

26. Marching toward Global Solidarity UNESCO 167 - 173

27. From Christian Values to Global Mind Control The Century-Old Roots of Common Core Standards (UNESCO) 174 - 199

28. Does your 'Mental Health' - Meet global standards?- Justifying Mind Control Recent history of the "prevention" side of "Mental Health" 200 - 206

29. New Eugenics and the Rise of the Global Scientific Dictatorship 207 - 245 The Technological Revolution and the Future of Freedom, UNESCO

30. Agenda 21... United Nations Will Own and Control EVERYTHING... 246 - 253 You, Your Children, Your Property, Food, Water... “New World Order”

31. UN Sustainable Development Goal SDG Summit 2015 – 254 - 277 Time and Global Action - The Road to Dignity by 2030

32. Obama’s Perfect Plan for The Economic Decline of America - By Peter Ferrara 278 - 285

33. United Nations - The Un-Hidden Agenda for “World Government” 286 - 306

A Chronology of the UN The Revolutionary Steps to Global Tyranny and the radical minds behind “The New World Order” The banners above The Great the eagle wings Seal: Novus Ordo states: Seclorum The Hidden Control of the Council on Foreign 'E Pluribus Un- (New Order of the Relations (CFR) um'('One out of Ages) many') - the ma- Home See NO.4 COUNCIL ON FOREIGN RELATIONS sonic vision of one Chronologies controlled world & spirituality.

"Locksley Hall" by Alfred Lord Tennyson, 1842 For I dipped into the future, far as human eye could see, Saw the Vision of the world, and all the wonder that would be... Till the war-drum throbbed no longer, and the battle-flags were furled In the Parliament of man, the Federation of the world. There the common sense of most shall hold a fretful realm in awe, And the kindly earth shall slumber, lapt in universal law.

The roots of the United Nations -- the most visible part of the new global management system -- might be compared to the many deep and spreading roots of a tenacious vine. Some of the roots are short and shallow. Others are long and deep, firmly imbedded in powerful social, political and financial institutions in Europe and North America, which -- for various reasons -- shared Lord Tennyson's vision of a "federation of the world."

The tangled roots of this vine spread beneath the surface of public life until 1945, when delegates from 50 countries met in San Francisco to sign the UN Charter. Communist spy, Alger Hiss, co-authored that founding charter and served as the first acting UN Secretary-General. This initial glimpse of the global agenda should have raised a big red flag. But our war-torn world was already blinded by the well-publicized vision of a peaceable planet "lapt in universal law." Who dared oppose such a noble purpose?

Actually, many Americans did see the sign posts along the way, but their warnings were drowned out by the mainstream media's resounding praise. Small wonder! The 25 main U.S. newspapers had been bought by the banking goliath,”J. P. Morgan” -- one of the stronger stems in the vine's tangled root system.

The young vine grew fast and its branches spread throughout the world. The signs of political and social compromise multiplied. It was no secret that each consecutive socialist Secretary General -- Trygve Lie (from Norway but recommended by Russia), Dag Hammarskjold (Sweden), U Thant (Burma), Kurt Waldheim (Austria), etc. -- sympathized with Communism and helped build an imposing web of international declarations and treaties ("soft" laws) that would overrule constitutional rights and domestic laws in America.

For decades only Communist leaders would fill the UN's highest military post, Under-Secretary-General for Political and Security Council Affairs. Fourteen of the fifteen men who held this vital post up until 1995 (and probably into the new century represented the USSR. The one exception was Dragoslav Protitich, a Communist from Yugoslavia. So when American soldiers fought Communism in Korea and Vietnam in partnership with the UN, the top UN military leaders were Communists. No wonder American soldiers fought two futile and deadly wars.

How could the public be so deceived? Part of the answer lies in subtle power of gradualism -- the incremental steps that function like the proverbial frog in the pot of slow-heating water. You become so used to gradual change that you hardly notice the next step.

Just as important is the grand vision of global peace, which burns in the heart of many idealists who have learned to hate war. These two -- vision and gradualism -- serve to both motivate and deceive the masses at the same time. Of course, many of the leaders who utilize these strategies have more totalitarian goals in mind.

That quest began long for Alfred Lord Tennyson penned his visionary poem, Locksley Hall. History points to monumental feats such as the Tower of Babel, the vast Hittite, Babylonian and Persian civilizations and, later, the Greek, Roman, Byzantine and Muslim empires.

In more modern times the world watched with awe as "civilized" nations such as Russia and Germany sacrificed personal freedom and millions of lives on their altars to Soviet and Nazi dreams of totalitarian socialism. Hindsight helps us trace the early, incremental steps toward a “world government”, and we can now look back at a foundation laid by an eclectic blend of socialist visionaries, global-minded financiers, communist revolutionaries, secret societies, New Age leaders, wealthy capitalist and tax-exempt foundations primarily in Great Britain and the USA. Long before the United Nations became an official organ under socialist leadership, that early vision had spread through all the main institutions. As Marilyn Ferguson wrote in The Aquarian Conspiracy, "Broader than reform, deeper than revolution, this benign conspiracy for a new human agenda has triggered the most rapid cultural realignment in history.... There are legions of conspirators. They are in corporations, universities and hospitals, on the faculties of public schools, in factories and doctors' offices, in state and federal agencies, on city councils and the White House staff, in state legislatures, in volunteer organizations, in virtually all arenas of policy- making in the country.... They have coalesced into small groups in every town and institution."

To fulfil this dream of a “New World Order” that would serve the grandiose economic and social interests of its early visionaries, two steps were essential: 1. Establish an efficient global management system that would join the nations of the world through processes that would appear "democratic" and would produce compliance with specific sets of goals and standards. 2. Use this management system to mould minds, undermine sovereignty, establish social solidarity and train a mobile global workforce through  The redistribution of human and financial resources (through migration, a global economy and a global welfare system).  A uniform worldwide education system that would standardize both social "learning" and work skills everywhere.  Control of the mainstream media and other propaganda channels. Professor Carrol Quigley wrote in Tragedy and Hope,

"There grew up in the 20th century a power structure between London and New York which penetrated deeply into university life, the press, and the practice of foreign policy. The American branch of this 'English Establishment' exerted much of its influence through five American newspapers (New York Times and Herald Tribune, Christian Science Monitor, Washington Post...)

 A supportive "civil society" (including business, community groups, the news and entertainment media, churches, etc) “prepared to lead the masses toward cultural and religious synthesis” in “communities and organizations around the world” using the dialectic process -- a strategy well tested and proven in the former Soviet Union. (Many participants -- including churches -- may never know how their new business practices and small group dialogues help undermine traditional values and prepare their members for the new global society.)

To the pragmatic prophets and pied pipers behind this scheme, the loss of lives, property and freedom mattered little, for the utopian end would justify their unscrupulous means. Social experiments that killed millions in Russia, Nazi Germany and China became useful stepping stones for the wealthy foundations and financiers in the UK and US who helped fund those wars and revolutions -- and for the powerful leaders (in the UK and USA) who provided weapons and technology for both allies and supposed enemies.

Many of our presidents [see President George W. Bush] have served as visible and elected representatives for behind-the-scenes masters who have already mapped the basic course (if not all the details).

Behind many visible world leaders stand "wise" insiders who have been guiding change for decades. Some of their recent names are familiar: George Shultz, David Rockefeller, Zbigniew Brzezinski, Henry Kissinger, Brent Scowcroft.... These men -- in the top echelon of the Council of Foreign Relations (CFR) and other elite "clubs"-- serve in presidents' cabinets again and again. Some lead silently behind the scenes. They may call themselves Republicans or Democrats; it doesn't really matter.

Few have done more to expose this “revolutionary agenda” than Carrol Quigley, the history professor at the Foreign Service Schools of Georgetown University whom Clinton honoured in his acceptance speech at the Demo- cratic Convention, July 16, 1992. [See Quigley's credentials] In his 1300-page tome, Tragedy and Hope: A History of the World in Our Time, he wrote: "The chief problem of American political life for a long time has been how to make the two Congressional parties more national and international. The argument, that the two parties should represent opposed ideals and policies, one, perhaps, of the Right and the other of the Left, is a foolish idea acceptable only the doctrinaire and academic thinkers. Instead the two parties should be almost identical, so that the American people can 'throw the rascals out' at any election without leading to any profound or extensive shifts in policy."

In other words, elected officials come and go, but the unelected leaders behind the scenes continue their reign. As European Parliament member Ashley Mote wrote in an article titled "Beware the Secret Heart of the EU," "Even the EU's public face - the unelected commission - is part of the charade. “Power does not lie with them. It lies with the senior staff running their departments”....

We do not know what their budgets are, how they are financed, or who approves their costs. Indeed, we do not even know what powers they have been given, nor by whom. And we cannot get rid of them....

"The EU would no longer be the servant of the member states. It would have “become their master”. Every previous treaty was a small step along that road....

The other 24 commissioners, each appointed by the other member states... are “figure-heads. They take the flak in the public arena”, and make announcements decided for them by their senior staff, “with the guidance of the secret committees”… "Officially above the commission sits a Council of Ministers.... But the council is just more of the same “elaborate illusion”.... The European Parliament sits below this vast superstructure... designed to create an “illusion of accountable democracy”. A condescending pat on the head for voters held in contempt.

"...the EU’s parliament has a built-in majority in favour of the social market. It is the repository of an unspoken agreement between the left and the multinationals. ... In effect, the left has said to the multinationals: you can have your markets stitched up for you, if we can indulge ourselves in endless social engineering. Big business has agreed. The result is a largely supportive parliament both from the left and right of the political divide." [The "Americas" are moving in the same direction!]

Summarizing a key point in Quigley's Tragedy and Hope, Dr. Stanley Monteith wrote in his well-researched book, Brotherhood of Darkness: "Professor Quigley assured his readers that the threat of communism was exaggerated, and that he had researched the men and the organizations that rule the world. In those days many people believed that our State Department had turned Eastern Europe and China over to the communist because our government was dominated by subversive agents."

Professor Quigley clarified that confusion: "This myth, like all fables, does in fact have a modicum of truth. There does exist, and has existed for a generation, an international Anglophile network which operates, to some extent in the way the radical Right believes the Communist act. In fact, this network, which we may identify as the Round Table Groups, has no aversion to cooperating with the Communists, or any other groups, and frequently does so. I know of the operation of this network because I have studied it for twenty years, and was permitted for two years, in the early 1960s, to examine its papers and secret records."

"One of Professor Quigley's most shocking revelations," wrote Dr. Monteith, "was the fact that the American Communist Party was partly financed by J. P. Morgan and Company.... J. P. Morgan and his associates financed the Republican Party, the Democratic Party, conservative groups, liberal organizations, communist groups and anti-communist organizations. [See the dialectic process] Thus we should not be surprised to learn that someone purchased Professor Quigley's publisher and destroyed the plates to the first half of his book so it couldn't be reprinted."

The Council of Foreign Relations (CFR) would become the U.S. equivalent to the Royal Institute of International Affairs (RIIA) in Great Britain. Professor Quigley explains:

"At the end of the war of 1914, it became clear that the organization of this system had to be greatly extended... the tasks was entrusted to Lionel Curtis who established, in England and each dominion, a front organization to the existing local “Round Table Group”. This front organization called the “Royal Institute of International Affairs”, had as its nucleus in each area the existing submerged Round Table Group. In New York it was known as the Council on Foreign Relations, and was a front for J. P. Morgan and Company.... In fact, the original plans for the Royal Institute of International Affairs and the Council on Foreign Relations were drawn up at Paris."

Banks and tax-exempt foundations were essential to this global vision: "The “powers of financial capitalism” has another far reaching aim, nothing less than to create a world system of financial control in private hands able “to dominate the political system of each country and the economy of the world as a whole”.... "The apex of the system was to be the Bank for International Settlements in Basle, Switzerland, a private bank owned and controlled by the world's central banks which were themselves private corporations. Each central bank... sought to dominate its government by its ability to control Treasury loans, to manipulate foreign exchanges, to influence the level of economic activity in the country, and to influence cooperative politicians by subsequent economic rewards...."

"In 1924, the chairman of the board of the Midland Bank said, "...banks can and do create money... And they who control the credit of the nation direct the policy of Government and hold in the hollow of their hands the destiny of the people."

"During the early decades of the 20th century," explained Dr. Monteith, "the three largest banks in the US were owned by the Rockefellers, the Morgan's, and the Mellon's." Contrary to popular speculations, the powerful European central banks preceded the House of Rothschild. Jewish banks "never controlled the financial institutions of the world."

There you have a glimpse into the hidden Anglo-American power structure and its European branches. To see how all the pieces fit together, we suggest you read Brotherhood of Darkness by Dr. Stan Monteith. Many of the quotes below are taken (with permission) from his book.

1842. Alfred Lord Tennyson penned the poem, Locksley Hall, expressing his belief that "Great Britain had a moral obligation to consolidate the world under British rule.

1870s. Oxford professor John Ruskin embraced Tennyson's vision with students, persuading them that "they had a moral obligation to disseminate English culture and unite the world under British rule”. By early 1900s, many held strategic positions in the English Government, but none of his disciples would further the vision more effectively than Cecil Rhodes.

1877. In his book, Confession of Faith, Cecil Rhodes wrote: "The Society [of the Elect] 'should inspire and even own portions of the press for the press rules the mind of the people. The Society should always be searching for members who might by their position in the world by their energies or character forward the object…"

1888. Edward Bellamy also embraced Tennyson's vision, and his book, Looking Backward, “helped spread the vision of a socialist world government”. Bellamy clubs began forming across the USA. Among his followers was Andrew Carnegie who believe in monopoly capitalism -- socialism (a universal welfare system) with a ruling class of powerful capitalists who would control both governments and the people.

1890 (Autumn): "Rhodes sent his close friend W. T. Stead a letter explaining his plan for “world government”: The key of my idea discussed with you is a Society, copied from the Jesuits as to organization... an idea which ultimately (leads) to the cessation of all wars and one language throughout the world.... The only thing feasible to carry this idea out is a secret one [society] gradually absorbing the wealth of the world to be devoted to such an object."

"Rhodes’ 'universal peace' would begin, according to him, 'after one hundred years,' and it will be exactly one hundred years later in the autumn of 1990 that President George Bush will spell out his “New World Order” concept for universal peace and cooperation." According to Dr. Cuddy, Rhodes’ letter would be "published in W. T Stead’s article in Review of Reviews (May 1902)."

Looking back many years later, Professor Quigley described another step toward completion of this 100-year plan. Many of these men would undoubtedly be Rhodes Scholars: "after thirty years there would be 'between two and three thousand men in the prime of life scattered all over the world, each one of whom, moreover, would have been specially-- math- ematically -- selected toward the Founder’s purposes.”.

1891 (February 5): "Rhodes’ secret society, 'The Society of the Elect,' is formally established.... Rhodes is the 'General,' with Stead, Milner, and Reginald Baliol Brett (Lord Esher) forming the executive committee. They were followed by the 'Circle of Initiates,' with an 'Association of Helpers' (later organized by Milner as the “semi-secret Round Table Groups”) beyond them."

1895: The Fabian Socialists establish the London School of Economics. Though the Fabians are dominated by an intellectual elite, and The Group [Rhodes' Round Table members] is dominated by a financial elite, they both believe in a socialist relationship between government and the masses...."

1891: To select and train world leaders worthy of his vision, “Cecil Rhodes” established the “Rhodes Trust” and the “Rhodes Scholarship Fund”. He had acquired the wealth needed to pursue his global ambitions in the gold and diamond mines of southern Africa.

The power and influence of “Rhodes Scholars” who have pursued their sponsor's vision has, through the last century helped steer "progress" toward global governance. Dr. Monteith wrote: "During the past century over 4600 young men have been sent to Oxford University where they were indoctrinated in socialism and world government.

President Bill Clinton, General Wesley Clark, Strobe Talbot, Senator Bill Bradley and thousands of other prominent men are Rhodes Scholars. They work in government offices, in international banks, on the board of corporations, in tax-exempt foundation, in the Supreme Court, in the media, in our universities in the “United Nations Association”, and in the Council on Foreign Relations."

1902. Cecil Rhodes died, and Lord Alfred Milner took control of the Rhodes Trust.

1909. Lord Milner's secretive Round Table Group was established. Professor Quigley exposed some of the evolving ties between the global banking fraternity and these evolving "semi-secret discussion and lobbying groups," which helped foment World War I as a means to raise public support for a League of Nations.

"By 1915, Round Table Groups existed in seven countries, including England... (and) the United States.... Since 1925, there have been substantial contributions from wealthy individuals, and from foundations and firms associated with the international banking fraternity, especially... organizations associated with J. P. Morgan, the Rockefeller and Whitney families...."

1913 (January). President Woodrow Wilson wrote in his book, The New Freedom: "We are in a new world.... In the new order, government and business must be associated closely.... We stand in the presence of a revolution.... (which) will come in peaceful guise...." He continued with this amazing revelation. Remember, this was happening almost a century ago! What we see today is the result of this hidden but rising iceberg.

"Some of the biggest men in the U.S., in the field of commerce and manufacturing, are afraid of somebody, are afraid of something. They know that there is a power somewhere so organized, so subtle, so watchful, so interlocked, so complete, so pervasive, that they had better not speak above their breath when they speak in condemnation of it. . . . We have been dreading all along the time when the combined power of high finance would be greater than the power of government....

"We have come to be one of the worst ruled, one of the most completely controlled and dominated, governments in the civilized world—no longer a government by free opinion, no longer a government by conviction and the vote of the majority, but a government by the opinion and duress of small groups of dominant men.... We are in a new world.... Behind the whole subject, of course, is the truth that, in the new order, government and business must be associated closely.... We stand in the presence of a revolution... (Which) will come in peaceful guise?"

1913 (December 23): President Wilson signed the Federal Reserve Act. "One of the individuals who helped to plan the Federal Reserve is Frank Vanderlip, president of Rockefeller’s National City Bank."

1915. According to the Reece Committee (the Special House Committee to Investigate Tax-Exempt Foundations), which would later investigate tax-exempt foundations that funded communist organizations and their international goals, the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace launched a propaganda program in 1915 to persuade the American people to fight in World War 1. During these investigations in the 1950s, the Congressional Committee found that:  Many of our large foundations were actively promoting communism and socialism  The foundations influenced State Department policy and were largely responsible for bringing communism to China.  The foundations were working to undermine our constitutional form of government.

In the official minutes of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, the Reece Committee also found the following specific questions which were discussed by the Carnegie trustee:

"Is there any means known to man more effective than war, assuming you wish to alter the life of an entire people?'" "How do we involve the United States in a war?" "How do we control the diplomatic machinery of the United States?" [Their conclusion: "We" must control the State Department]

1917. Dr. Monteith wrote that "J. P. Morgan and his associates controlled twenty five of our most influential newspapers”. The atrocity stories [about the war] were designed to raise public support of American entry into World War 1" -- an essential step toward public acceptance of a world government. According to the Congressional Record "...the J.P. Morgan [banking] interests.... and their subsidiary organizations got together 12 men high up in the newspaper world and employed them to select the most influential newspapers in the United States and sufficient number of them to control generally the policy of the daily press of the US.... They found it was only necessary to purchase the control of 25 of the greatest papers. ... an editor was furnished for each paper to properly supervise and edit information...."

1917 (11-28). After Lenin's triumph in Russia, Colonel Mandel House, President Woodrow Wilson's main advisor and -- as President Wilson called him, "my altar ego" -- cabled the president the following message from Paris: "There have been cabled over and published here statements made by American papers to the effect that Russia should be treated as an enemy. It is exceedingly important that such criticism should be suppressed."

According to Dr. Dennis Cuddy, Col. House was "the man primarily responsible for the League of Nations Covenant (influenced by the Fabian Socialists' drafts for the League), would also be largely responsible for the establishment of the Council on Foreign Relations. In June, 1923, he wrote in its Foreign Affairs journal: "If war had not come in 1914 in fierce and exaggerated form, the idea of an association of nations would probably have remained dormant, for great reforms seldom materialize except through great upheavals.... If law and order are good within states, there can be no reasons why they should not be good between states [nations]."

1917. In its report published in 1954, the Reece Committee (the Special House Committee to Investigate Tax-Exempt Foundations) explained and quoted the official minutes of the Board of Trustees of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace: "These trustees in a meeting about 1917 had the brashness to congratulate themselves on the wisdom of their original decision because already the impact of war had indicated it... could alter life in this country. ... They even had the brashness to ... dispatch a telegram to Mr. Wilson, cautioning him to see that the war did not end too quickly....

"The concern became, as expressed by the trustees, seeing to it that there was no reversion to life in this country as it existed prior to 1914. And they came to the conclusion that, to prevent a reversion, they must control education. And then they approached the Rockefeller Foundation and they said: 'Will you take on the acquisition of control of education as it involves subjects that are domestic in their significance?' And it was agreed. Then together they decided that the key to it was the teaching of American history and they must change that."

1918. "Russia is pointing the way to a great and sweeping world changes. It is not in Russia alone that the old order is passing. There is a lot of the old order in America, and that is going, too.... I am glad it is so." William Boyce Thompson, Federal Reserve Bank director and founding member of the Council on Foreign Relations wrote these words in the January issue of New York World.

1918 (August 7). Financier Bernard Baruch, chairman of the War Industries Board (who in 1944 advised President Roosevelt concerning "War and Post-war Plans"), said: "Every man's life is at the call of the nation and so must be every man's property. We are living today in a highly organized state of socialism. The state is all; the individual is of importance only as he con- tributes to the welfare of the state. His property is only as the state does not need it. He must hold his life and his possessions at the call of the state."

1919 (February). The League of Nations. "The terrible losses of World War 1 produced... an ever growing public demand that some method be found to prevent the renewal of the suffering and destruction which were now seen to be an inescapable part of modern war. So great was the force of this demand that within a few weeks after the opening of the peace conference of Paris in January 1919, unanimous agreement had been reached on the text of the covenant of the League of Nations." Col. House wrote the first draft of that covenant.

1919. Col. House deliberately misled world leaders into rejecting any notion of blocking the Bolshevik Revolution. The following statement is from his diary: "I had a heart to heart talk with Clemenceau [Premier of France] about Bolshevism in Russia and its westward march. I made him confess that military interventions was impossible.... Later in the afternoon, when Orlando [Premier of Italy] called, I gave him very much the same kind of talk.... I am trying, and have partially to succeeded, to frighten not only the President [Wilson] but the English, French and Italians regarding what might be termed 'the Russian peril.'

1921. The Council on Foreign Relations (CFR) was founded -- mainly through Col. House's influence. To build the needed network of globalist support groups, it would disperse tens of millions of dollars annually from the major tax-exempt foundations such as the Carnegie and Rockefeller foundations. Global Tyranny,

The CFR would be the U.S. equivalent of the British RIIA, the Royal Institute of International Affairs. As Professor Quigley wrote, "...the original plans for the Royal Institute of International Affairs and the Council on Foreign Relations were drawn up at Paris."

1922. New York City Mayor John Hylan's description of the shadow government developing on the national level fits the international transformation as well: "The real menace of our republic is this invisible government which like a giant octopus sprawls its slimy length over city, State and nation. Like the octopus of real life, it operates under cover of self-created screen. It seizes in its long and powerful tentacles our executive officers, our legislative bodies, our schools, our courts, our newspapers and every agency created for the public protection."

1925. “The International Bureau of Education” was founded with a grant from the “Rockefeller Foundation”. It later became part of “UNESCO”.

1931 (November). Arnold Toynbee delivers a speech to the institute for the Study of the International Affairs at Copenhagen, in which he explains, "We are at present working discreetly with all our might to wrest this mysterious force called sovereignty out of the clutches of the local nation states of the world. All the time we are denying with our lips what we are doing with our hands, because to impugn the sovereignty of the local nation states of the world is still a heresy for which as statesman or publicist can... be ostracized or discredited." [The Trend of International Affairs since the War, “International Affairs, Journal of the Royal Institute of International Affairs.]

1932. Rockefeller Foundation president Max Mason tells trustees that "The Social Sciences will concern themselves with the rationalization of social control...the control of human behaviour."

1932. Dr. Ernst Rudin, the Nazi director of the Kaiser Wilhelm Institute for Psychiatry (funded by "Rockefeller) was appointed president of the global Eugenics Federation.

1934 (February). A Rockefeller "progress report" (by one of the division heads) asks, "Can we develop so sound and extensive a genetics that we can hope to breed, in the future, superior men?"

1935. The Masonic symbol of the eye in the pyramid is officially added to the U.S. dollar bill. Henry A. Wallace, President Roosevelt's Secretary of Agriculture (a Socialist and Theosophist who later became Roosevelt's vice-president) explained: "Roosevelt as he looked at the coloured reproduction of the Seal was first struck with the representation of the 'All Seeing Eye,' a Masonic representation of The Great Architect of the Uni- verse.... Roosevelt like myself was a 32nd degree Mason. He suggested that the Seal be put on the dollar bill." Henry A. Wallace, Socialist Sec. of Agriculture and, later, Vice President under Roosevelt."

1935. In a report presented at the 72nd annual NEA meeting, Willard Givens (later NEA executive secretary) wrote: "A dying laissez-faire must be completely destroyed and all of us... must be subjected to a large degree of social control. .. The major function of the school is the social orientation of the individual. It must seek to give him understanding of the transition to a new social order."

1937. John Foster Dulles, former (?) chairman of the Rockefeller foundation and of the executive committee of the Federal Council of Churches (replaced by the National Council of Churches) praised totalitarianism saying: "...Communism and Fascism [are] changing almost overnight the characteristics of entire peoples. Millions of individuals have been made into different and, on the whole, finer people...personal prides (individualism) ... (is) replaced by ... self-sacrifice and discipline. There is a conscious subordination of self to the end that some great objective maybe furthered."

1939. Future Secretary of State John Foster Dulles (CFR member) delivers a speech to YMCA. He states,”[There must be] some dilution of sovereignty, to the immediate disadvantage of those nations which now possess the pre- ponderance of power...."

1941 (January 6). In his speech to a Joint Session of Congress, Presi- dent Franklin D. Roosevelt said, "Since the beginning of our American history we have been engaged in change – in a perpetual peaceful revolution – a revolution which goes on steadily, quietly adjusting itself to changing conditions.... The 'World Order' which we seek is the co-operation of free countries, working together in a friendly, civilized society....

Freedom means the supremacy of human rights everywhere. http://www.greatseal.com/mottoes/neworderFDR.html

1941. The Declaration of the United Nations was signed by 26 states. It would help lay the foundation for the envisioned global reign. Few realized the very real conspiracy behind World War II -- a stepping stone to the planned future. [See Trusting God as Freedom Fades]

1942 (February or March) "...six years before the World Council of Church- es was formally launched, its organizers within the Federal Council of Churches [renamed National Council of Churches] held a National Study conference at Wesleyan University in Ohio. Among the 30 delegates were 15 bishops, seven seminary presidents, and eight college and university presidents.

John Foster Dulles, who later became Secretary of State in the Eisenhower administration, chaired the conference. As head of the Federal Council's inter-Church “Commission to Study the Bases of a Just and Durable Peace,” Dulles submitted the conference report. It recommended:

 "a world government of delegated powers  "immediate limitations on national sovereignty  "international control of all armies and navies  "a universal system of money  "worldwide freedom of immigration  "a democratically controlled international bank  "even distribution of the world’s natural wealth."

1942 (March 16) Time magazine wrote a summary of the report. In its statement below, notice these words: “a new order... through voluntary cooperation within the framework of democracy or through explosive political revolution.” This solution, “voluntary cooperation within the framework of democracy” gives us a glimpse of the true meaning of nice-sounding words such as democracy, volunteerism, participation (involving everyone in the consensus process), partnerships, and civil society:

“Some of the conference’s economic opinions were almost as sensational as the extreme internationalism of its political program. It held that a ‘new order of economic life is both imminent and imperative' – a new order that is sure to come either ‘through voluntary cooperation within the framework of democracy or through explosive political revolution.’ Without condemning the profit motive as such, it denounced various defects in the profit system for breeding war, demagogues and dictators…. Instead, 'the church must demand economic arrangements measured by human welfare."

1942. The editor of the NEA Journal, J. Elmer Morgan, wrote an editorial titled "The United Peoples of the World." In it, he explained a world government's need for an educational branch, a world system of money and credit, a world police force, 'a world bill of rights and duties.'" (December 1942).

1943. John Foster Dulles -- together with leaders such as Alger Hiss (exposed by the FBI in 1939 as Communist spy) -- convened another Council of Churches conference. It endorsed “Six Pillars of Peace,” a plea for a world political organization – a “United Nations”. In his speech, recorded in the Council’s 1944 Biannual Report, Dulles said, "Interest in this subject had been enormously increased by the declaration of the Moscow conference, which stressed the necessity of creating at the earliest possible moment a general international organization…. People in and out of the churches were urged to 'remain united and vigorous to achieve such [an] international organization.' … This statement, signed by more than 1,000 Protestant leaders, was given to the press and mailed to the President and members of Congress.”

1944: "The formation of an international organization to supersede the League of Nations was also undertaken by technical experts of the Allied nations. In the United States, numerous state department and interdepartmental committees studied the intricate problems of organization, membership, voting procedure and sanctions.... At Dumbarton Oaks, Washington, DC, U.S., British, Russian and Chinese experts [which included co-author Alger Hiss] finally gathered to draw up a charter for the United Nations organizations. ... The experts were able to reach agreement on all but two issues....

[1] Whether a permanent member of the Security Council should be able to employ the veto in a case in which it was a party....

[2] Whether the 16 Soviet republics should enjoy individual membership. These two issues had to be resolved by Roosevelt, Churchill and Stalin at their conference at Yalta."

1944. President Roosevelt chose Alger Hiss as his acting director of the State Department's Office of Special Political Affairs in charge of all post-war planning -- ignoring all the FBI evidence of his Communist activities.

1945: The Yalta conference -- Churchill, Roosevelt and Stalin met to discuss post-war resolutions. Alger Hiss accompanied Roosevelt as his advisor. Roosevelt continued to ignore the FBI warnings about Hiss ".. In addition to immediate military and political problems, the conferees discussed the United Nations organization charter that had recently been drafted a Dumbarton Oaks. A compromise formula to govern voting in the Security Council was found acceptable...."

1945 (April 1, San Francisco): Alger Hiss, who co-authored the UN charter, served as Secretary General of the United Nations organizing conference. Later, John Foster Dulles recommends that Hiss head up the multimillion dollar Carnegie Endowment for International Peace. "Upon the basis of proposals submitted by China, the USSR, the UK and the US, the United Nations Conference on International Organization (UNCIO), which convened at San Francisco, CA, drafted the Charter of the United Nations. It was signed on June 26 and entered into force on October 24, 1945.

"The San Francisco conference was attended by representatives of the 46 states that had signed the Declaration of the United Nations. Four other states (Ukraine, Belarusian, Argentina and Denmark) were admitted during the conference.... "The Dumbarton Oaks proposals, certain Chinese proposals later adopted by the Big Four (US, UK, USSR and China) and the Yalta agreement.... provided the agenda of the conference.

"The international Secretariat provided interpreters and translators and distributed documents and speeches daily in the five official languages (English, French, Spanish, Russian and Chinese). The chairmanship of the plenary sessions rotated among the Big Four. ... "The Charter which emerged from the conference followed the general lines of the Dumbarton Oaks proposals but gave greater weight to the General Assembly."

1945 (April 16): Time magazine gave a preview of the international conference: "As Secretary-general, managing the agenda, he [Alger Hiss] will have a lot to say behind the scenes about who gets the breaks."

1945 (June 26): After decades of plans, propaganda and political and financial manipulation, the United Nations was officially launched with Alger Hiss as its first Secretary-General. Representatives from 50 nations met in San Francisco to sign the UN Charter. On June 28, President Harry Truman stated, "We are going to have to ratify this (UN) Constitution of San Francisco.... It will be just as easy for nations to get along in a republic of the world as it is for us to get along in the republic of the United States." For much of his life, Harry Truman carried the poem, Locksley Hall, by Lord Tennyson in his pocket. Remember its sobering words: "Till the war-drum throbbed no longer, and the battle-flags were furled In the Parliament of man, the Federation of the world."

1945. UNESCO, a specialized UN agency headquartered in Paris, was established "to contribute to world peace by promoting international cooperation in education, science and culture. It's first Director- General, Julian Huxley, wrote in his book, UNESCO: Its Purpose and Its Philosophy: The general philosophy of UNESCO should be scientific world humanism, global in extent and evolutionary in background... In its education program it can... familiarize all peoples with the implications of the transfer of full sovereignty from separate nations to a world organization....

Tasks for the media division of UNESCO [will be] to promote the growth of a common outlook shared by all nations and cultures... to help the emergence of a single world culure." http://www.crossroad.to/Quotes/globalism/julian- huxley.htm

1946. In his NEA editorial, "The teacher and World Government," J. Elmer Morgan, wrote, "In the struggle to establish an adequate world government, the teacher... can do much to prepare the hearts and minds of children.... At the very top of all the agencies which will assure the coming of world government must stand the school, the teacher, and the organized profession." [The NEA Journal (January 1946) http://www.crossroad.to/Excerpts/chronologies/cuddy-nwo.htm

1946. The NEA printed "National Education in an International World" (Teacher's College): The establishment of [UNESCO] marks the culmination of the movement for the creation of an international agency of education.... Nations that become members of UNESCO accordingly assume an obligation to revise the textbooks used in their schools.... Each member nation... has a duty to see to it that nothing in its curriculum... is contrary to UNESCO's aims."

1946. An NEA-sponsored "World Conference of the Teaching Profession" drafted a Constitution for a World Organization of the Teaching Profession. It would be "a mighty force in aiding UNESCO" said William Carr (associate secretary of NEA's Education Policies Commission).

1946. The United States joined UNESCO, a UN agency. According to Charlotte Iserbyt, "this legislation was accompanied by President Harry Truman's remarkable statement: 'Education must establish the moral unity of mankind.' Truman's recommendation was bolstered by General Brock Chisholm, who would become the first director-general of World Health Organization (WHO), a UN specialized agency."

1946. Dr. Chisholm presented a paper entitled The Psychiatry of Enduring Peace and Social Progress at a US conference on mental health. It was published by the (now prestigious) magazine Psychiatry, and by his Communist friend, Alger Hiss, the publisher of the socialist magazine International Conciliation. Hiss, then president of the Carnegie Endowment for Interna- tional Peace, wrote the Preface to Chisholm's paper. Ponder Dr. Chisholm's words:

"The responsibility for charting the necessary changes in human behaviour rests clearly on the sciences working in that field. Psychologists, psychiatrists, sociologists, economists, and politicians must face this responsibility....

"Can we identify the reasons why we fight wars...? Many of them are easy to list --prejudice, isolationism, the ability to emotionally and uncritically to believe unreasonable things.... "The only psychological force capable of producing these perversions is morality, the concept of right and wrong... For many generations we have bowed our necks to the yoke of the conviction of sin. We have swallowed all manner of poisonous certainties fed us by our parents, our Sunday and day school teachers.... it has long been generally accepted that parents have perfect right to impose any points of view, any lies or fears, superstitions, prejudices, hates, or faith on their defenceless children. It is, however, only recently that it has become a matter of certain knowledge that these things cause neuroses, behaviour disorders, emotional disabilities, and failure to develop to a state of emotional maturity which fits one to be a citizen of a democracy...."Surely the training of children in home and schools should be of at least as great public concern as their vaccination for their own protection....Individuals who have emotional disabilities of their own, guilt’s, fears, inferiorities, are certain to project their hates on to others... They are a very real menace... Whatever the cost, we must learn to live in friendliness and peace with... all the people in the world...."

"There is something to be said... for gently putting aside the mistaken old ways of our elders if that is possible. If it cannot be done gently, it may have to be done roughly or even violently.... "Can such a program of re-education... be charted?" www.crossroad.to/Quotes/globalism/chisholm.htm

1948. The World Health Organization (WHO) is established under the leadership of Dr. Brock Chisholm, its first director-general.

1948. The UN General Assembly adopted the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, a legally binding contract for all nations who, like the U.S. ratified it. It sounds good, as do all the intrusive UN human rights treaties.

Article 18 upholds "the right to freedom of thought, conscience and religion..." Article 19 affirms "the right to freedom of opinion and expression... and to seek receive and impart information and ideas through any media and regardless of frontiers." But Article 29 states that "these rights and freedoms may in no case be exercised contrary to the purposes and principles of the United Nations."

In other words, these "rights" or "freedoms" don't apply to those who would criticize the UN or its policies. Your rights would be conditioned on your compliance. Only if your message supports official ideology are you free to speak it. As Andrei Vishinsky wrote in The Law of the Soviet State, "There can be no place for freedom of speech, press, and so on for the foes of socialism."

1949. The UNESCO textbook titled Toward World Understanding stated, "As long as the child breathes the poisoned air of nationalism, education in world-mindedness can produce only rather precarious results. As we have pointed out, it is frequently the family that infects the child with extreme nationalism."

1953. During the Reece Committee investigations, Ford Foundation president H. Rowan Gaither made the following admission to Norman Dodd, staff director of the hearings: "....you know that we at the executive level here were, at one time or another, active in the OSS, the State Department, or the European Economic Administration. During those times... we operated under directives issued by the White House. We are continuing to be guided by just such directives.... The substance [of these directives] was to the effect that we should make every effort to so alter life in the Unites States as to make possible a comfortable merger with the Soviet Union." William H. McIlhany, II, The Tax Exempt Foundations (1980).

1966. Quigley's Tragedy and Hope: A History of the World in Our Time was published. Summarizing a key point in the book, Dr. Monteith wrote, "Professor Quigley assured his readers that the threat of communism was exaggerated, and that he had researched the men and the organizations that rule the world., In those days many people believed that our State Department had turned Easter Europe and china over to the communist because our government was dominated by subversive agents. Professor Quigley ridiculed that idea:

"This myth, like all fables, does in fact have a modicum of truth. There does exist, and has existed for a generation, an international Anglophile network which operates, to some extent in the way the radical Right believes the Communist act.

In fact, this network, which we may identify as the Round Table Groups, has no aversion to cooperating with the Communists, or any other groups, and frequently does so. I know of the operation of this network because I have studied it for twenty years, and was permitted for two years, in the early 1960s, to examine its papers and secret records."

1960s. Dr. Robert Muller, U.N. deputy secretary-general, prepared a "World Core Curriculum" with the following goal: "Assisting the child in becoming an integrated individual who can deal with personal experience while seeing himself as a part of 'the greater whole.' In other words, promote growth of the group idea, so that group good, group understanding, group interrela- tions and group goodwill replace all limited, self-centred objectives, leading to group consciousness."

1969 (March 27). "President Richard Nixon divided the country into 10 regions via the Government Reorganization Act. Then with Nixon’s Executive Order 11647, the nation was divided up into 10 administrative regions on February 14, 1972 , which also established the Federal Regional Council for the newly designed 10 regions." Nixon "did so because the United Nations passed a resolution that the United States must reorganize into 10 regions."

1973. The Trilateral Commission was established, primarily by David Rockefeller (chairman of the Rockefeller controlled Chase Manhattan Bank) who funded it. He had been inspired by a proposal by Zbigniew Brzezinski, a global-minded Professor at Columbia University who suggested a three-fold partnership between Western Europe, North America (US and Canada) and Japan.

Its US membership would include Brzezinski; former president George H. Bush; Richard Gardner (Columbia University); Alan Greenspan (Federal Reserve); Samuel Johnson (Johnson & Son Inc); Robert McNamara (former president of the World Bank); Brent Scowcroft; Donna Shalala (Chancellor, of Wisconsin and Clinton's Sec. of DHHS); Albert Shanker (Pres. of American Federation of Teachers); Strobe Talbott (Editor-at-large, Time); Lester Thurow (Faculty, MIT); Paul Volcker (Faculty, Princeton University).

1973. After a trip to China, David Rockefeller praised Mao Tse-tung who had slaughtered over 40 million people. His report, "From a China Traveller," highlights the goals presented in UN reports such as "The Commission on Global Governance" and UNESCO's "Our Creative Diversity." Both focus on lofty ideals such as peace, harmony and unity in the communitarian "global" village -- a vision that demands absolute control and universal participation in facilitated small groups (modelled by the hierarchy of "soviets" or councils in Communist lands): "One is impressed immediately by the sense of national harmony.... Whatever the price of the Chinese Revolution it has obviously succeeded in fostering high morale and community purpose. General social and economic progress is no less impressive....The enormous social advances of China have benefited greatly from the singleness of ideology and purpose.... The social experiment in China under Chairman Mao's leadership is one of the most important and successful in history."

1974. In his book, Wall Street and the Bolshevik Revolution, Anthony Sutton "documented the fact that Rockefeller and Morgan banks provided the Bolsheviks with loans, while American industry provided them with the plants and the technology thy needed. Westinghouse, Henry Ford, Averill Harriman, Armand Hammer, Exxon, and other American firms built the infrastructure that allowed the Soviet Union to survive."

1983. Speaking at Annapolis, Navy Secretary John Lehman told the graduating class that, "Within weeks, many of you will be looking across just hundreds of feet of water at some of the most modern technology ever invented in America. Unfortunately, it is on Soviet ships."

1991 (May 21). "In an address to the Bilderberg organization meeting at Evian, France, Henry Kissinger said, "Today Americans would be outraged if U.N. troops entered Los Angeles to restore order; tomorrow they will be grateful! This is especially true if they were told there was an outside threat from beyond, whether real or promulgated, that threatened our very existence. It is then that all peoples of the world will pledge with world leaders to deliver them from this evil. The one thing every man fears is the unknown. When presented with these scenarios, individual rights will be willingly relinquished for the guarantee of their wellbeing granted to them by their world government." (Transcribed from a tape recording made by one of the Swiss delegates)

2012. London Olympics closing ceremony. (Personal note by Berit) This dark but spectacular celebration was recorded on a video that we posted for a few days. But, due to its occult themes and suggestions, we deleted it. Among its images are the occult symbols of today's elitist secret societies -- which are ominously real and powerful. I can personally verify that the OTO, high-level "illuminated" Freemasons, and the Hermetic Order of the Golden Dawn are real!

“If God is for us, who can be against us? ... It is Christ who died, and fur- thermore is also risen, who is even at the right hand of God, who also makes intercession for us. "Who shall separate us from the love of Christ? Shall tribulation, or dis- tress, or persecution, or famine, or nakedness, or peril, or sword? ... Yet in all these things we are more than conquerors through Him who loved us. For I am persuaded that neither death nor life, nor angels nor principalities nor powers, nor things present nor things to come, nor height nor depth, nor any other created thing, shall be able to separate us from the love of God which is in Christ Jesus our Lord." Romans 8:31-39

Endnotes

Stanley Monteith, MD, and Brotherhood of Darkness (Oklahoma City: Hearthstone Publishing, 2000).

This list of UN Under-Secretaries for Political and Security Council Affairs is missing the last decade. A futile search on the UN website reminded me that the UN is not "of the people or for the people." Its version of a Bill or Rights is conditioned on absolute compliance with UN ideology, and -- unlike the U.S.- - it has no "Freedom of Information Act."

Additional Notes: Manly P. Hall explained the meaning behind the Great Seal (see picture at top of page) and linked its unfinished pyramid to the unfolding world history: "On the reverse of our nation's Great Seal is an unfinished pyramid to represent human society itself, imperfect and incomplete. Above floats the symbol of the esoteric orders, the radiant triangle with its all-seeing eye." http://www.greatseal.com/levels/fdr1935.html

"CARROLL QUIGLEY, professor of history at the Foreign Service School of Georgetown University, formerly taught at Princeton and at Harvard. He has done research in the archives of France, Italy, and England, and is the author of the widely praised Evolution of Civilizations....

He is a member of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, the American Anthropological Association, and the American Economic Association, as well as various historical associations. He has been lecturer on Russian history at the Industrial College of the Armed Forces since 1951 and on Africa at the Brookings Institution since 1961, and has lectured at many other places, including the U.S. Naval Weapons Laboratory, the Foreign Service Institute of the State Department, and the Naval College at Norfolk, Virginia.

In 1958 he was a consultant to the Congressional Select Committee which set up the present national space agency...."TRAGEDY AND HOPE shows the years 1895—1950 as a period of transition from the world dominated by Europe in the nineteenth century to the world of three blocks in the twentieth century.

With clarity, perspective, and cumulative impact, Professor Quigley examines the nature of that transition through two world wars and a worldwide economic depression. As an interpretative historian, he tries to show each event in the full complexity of its historical context.

The result is a unique work, notable in several ways. It gives a picture of the world in terms of the influence of different cultures and outlooks upon each other; it shows, more completely than in any similar work, the influence of science and technology on human life; and it explains, with unprecedented clarity, how the intricate financial and commercial patterns of the West prior to 1914 influenced the development of today’s world."

United Nations

The Revolutionary Roots of the UN The Power Elite behind the New World Order (The Hidden Control of the Council on Foreign Relations (CFR))

"There does exist, and has existed for a generation, an international Anglophile network which operates, to some extent in the way the radical Right believes the Communist act. In fact, this network, which we may identify as the Round Table Groups [comparable to the CFR in the USA], has no aversion to cooperating with the Communists, or any other groups, and frequently does so. I know of the operation of this network because I...was permitted for two years, in the early 1960s, to examine its papers and secret records."

"At the end of the war of 1914, it became clear that the organization of this system had to be greatly extended... the tasks was entrusted to Lionel Curtis who established, in England and each dominion, a front organization to the existing local Round Table Group. This front organization called the Royal Institute of International Affairs, had as its nucleus in each area the existing submerged Round Table Group. In New York it was known as the Council on Foreign Relations, and was a front for J. P. Morgan and Company.... In fact, the original plans for the Royal Institute of International Affairs and the Council on Foreign Relations were drawn up at Paris."

"The powers of financial capitalism has another far reaching aim, nothing less than to create a world system of financial control in private hands able to dominate the political system of each country and the economy of the world as a whole."

The "wise" Insiders who have been guiding the CFR (Council on Foreign Relations) toward global control include familiar names such as David Rockefeller, Zbigniew Brzezinski, Henry Kissinger, George Shultz, Bill Clinton, Brent Scowcroft.... These men have led and instructed our presidents' cabinets again and again. They and countless others work silently behind the scenes to accomplish their goal of a socialist/communitarian world government. They may call themselves Republican or Democrats; it doesn't really matter. They control the financial resources needed to manipulate the economy and accomplish their goals.

Their tyrannical form of "capitalism" destroys the personal incentive, moral guidelines and free enterprise that made America great. "Woe to those who call “evil good and good evil”... Who put darkness for light, and light for darkness; Woe to those who are wise in their own eyes.." Isaiah 5:20-21 History

In the 1870s, Oxford professor John Ruskin persuaded his elite British students that "they had a moral obligation to disseminate English culture and unite the world under British rule. By early 1900s, many of his students held strategic positions in the English Government. None of his students would spread the vision more effectively than Cecil Rhodes, who accumulated the needed wealth in African gold and diamond mines. Rhodes wrote, "The Society ['of the Elect'] should inspire and even own portions of the press for the press rules the mind of the people. The Society should always be searching for members who might by their position in the world by their energies or character forward the object…"

In 1890, Rhodes sent his friend W. T. Stead a letter explaining his plan for “world government”: "The key of my idea discussed with you is a Society, copied from the Jesuits as to organization [rising levels of secrecy as in Freemasonry]... an idea which ultimately (leads) to the cessation of all wars and one language throughout the world.... The only thing feasible to carry this idea out is a secret one [a secret society] gradually absorbing the wealth of the world to be devoted to such an object."

To fulfil his global vision, Rhodes established the Rhodes Trust. The inner circle of this "secret society" - "The Society of the Elect" -- included freemason Lord Alfred Milner, William T. Stead and Reginald Baliol Brett (titled Lord Esher).

When Rhodes died in 1902, he left the "Society," the Rhodes Trust and the leadership primarily in the "hands" of Lord Milner. This “Round Table Group” would eventually establish numerous international branches. In the U.S.A, it would be called the Council on Foreign Relations (CFR). Few have done more to expose this revolutionary agenda than Carroll Quigley, the history professor at the Foreign Service Schools of Georgetown University whom Clinton honoured in his acceptance speech at the Democratic Convention, July 16, 1992.

In his 1300-page tome, Tragedy and Hope: A History of the World in Our Time, Quigley wrote: "By 1915, Round Table Groups existed in seven countries, including England... (and) the United States.... Since 1925, there have been substantial contributions from wealthy individuals, and from foundations and firms associated with the international banking fraternity, especially... organizations associated with J. P. Morgan, the Rockefeller and Whitney families...."

In 1913, President Woodrow Wilson expressed his concern over this secret movement toward world government his book, The New Freedom: "We are in a new world.... In the new order, government and business must be associated closely.... We stand in the presence of a revolution.... (which) will come in peaceful guise..." "Some of the biggest men in the U.S., in the field of commerce and manufacturing, are afraid of somebody, are afraid of something. They know that there is a power somewhere so organized, so subtle, so watchful, so interlocked, so complete, so pervasive, that they had better not speak above their breath when they speak in condemnation of it.... We have been dreading all along the time when the combined power of high finance would be greater than the power of government....

"We have come to be one of the worst ruled, one of the most completely controlled and dominated, governments in the civilized world—no longer a government by free opinion, no longer a government by conviction and the vote of the majority, but a government by the opinion and duress of small groups of dominant men....We stand in the presence of a revolution... (which) will come in peaceful guise."

That same year, President Wilson signed the “Federal Reserve Act” with the guidance of Frank Vanderlip, president of Rockefeller’s National City Bank." The CFR was founded in 1921, mainly through the "mysterious" Round Table "Insider" Col. Mandel House, President Wilson's "counter-ego." It would be the U.S. equivalent of Britain's Royal Institute of International Affairs. As you read earlier, "...the tasks were entrusted to Lionel Curtis who established, in England and each dominion, a front organization to the existing local Round Table Group. This front organization called the Royal Institute of International Affairs, had as its nucleus in each area the existing submerged Round Table Group.

In New York it was known as the Council on Foreign Relations.... In fact, the original plans for the Royal Institute of International Affairs and the Council on Foreign Relations were drawn up at Paris."

To build the envisioned network of global support, it would spend tens of millions of dollars annually from the major tax-exempt foundations such as the “Carnegies and Rockefeller’s fellers foundations”.

Keep in mind, the CFR as a whole is not made up of secret conspirators. Its membership list is available to the public. "Most CFR members are not involved in a conspiracy," wrote Anthony C. Sutton "and have no knowledge of any conspiracy. However, "There is a GROUP WITHIN the Council on Foreign Relations which belongs to a secret society, sworn to secrecy, and which more or less controls the CFR. CFR meetings are used for their own purposes, i.e., to push out ideas, to weigh up people who might be useful, to use meetings as a form for discussion."

In other words, the layered organizational structure might be compared not only to Jesuits, as Cecil Rhodes indicated, but also to the Freemasons with its inner core of secret masters. Describing this financial system with power to bribe and command governments around the world, New York city Mayor John Hylan warned: "...the real menace of our republic is this invisible government which like a giant octopus sprawls its slimy length over city, State and nation. Like the octopus of real life, it operates under cover of self-created screen. It seizes in its long and powerful tentacles our executive officers, our legislative bodies, our schools, our courts, our newspapers and every agency created for the public protection."

In Tragedy and Hope: A History of the World in Our Time, Professor Quigley wrote: "The argument that the two [political] parties should represent opposed ideals and policies, one, perhaps of the Right and the other of the Left, is a foolish idea acceptable only to the doctrinaire and academic thinkers. Instead the two parties should be almost identical, so the that American people can 'throw the rascals out' at any election without leading to any profound or extensive shifts in policy."

"One of Professor Quigley's most shocking revelations," wrote Dr. Monteith, "was the fact that the American Communist Party was partly financed by J. P. Morgan and Company.... J. P. Morgan and his associates financed the Republican Party, the Democratic Party, conservative groups, liberal organizations, communist groups and anti-communist organizations. Thus we should not be surprised to learn that someone purchased Professor Quigley's publisher and destroyed the plates to the first half of his book so it couldn't be reprinted."

That sounds like communitarianism, doesn't it? Banks and tax-exempt foundations were essential to this global vision: "The powers of financial capitalism has another far reaching aim, nothing less than to create a world system of financial control in private hands able to dominate the political system of each country and the economy of the world as a whole... The apex of the system was to be the Bank for International Settlements in Basel, Switzerland, a private bank owned and controlled by the world's central banks [including the US Federal Reserve] which were themselves private corporations.

Each central bank... sought to dominate its government by its ability to control Treasury loans, to manipulate foreign exchanges, to influence the level of economic activity in the country, and to influence cooperative politicians by subsequent economic rewards...."

"In 1924, the chairman of the board of the Midland Bank said, "...banks can and do create money... And they, who control the credit of the nation, direct the policy of Government and hold in the hollow of their hands the destiny of the people."

More steps toward global control: The Fabians, the Round Table, and the Rhodes Scholars: "The secret goal of the Fabian Society was to create a godless, classless, socialistic society that was dedicated to the ultimate victory of Socialism which really meant Communism. In 1891, they became affiliated with the Second Socialist International (established in 1889), and helped establish a Democratic Socialist state in Great Britain. [See The Grasp of Socialist International] "The aims of the Fabian Society were developed by [Sidney] Webb from what Englishman John Ruskin (1819-1900) taught at Oxford University....The Fabians were working towards a new world by indoctrinating young scholars who would eventually “rise to power in various policy-making positions throughout the world by infiltrating educational institutions”, government agencies, and political parties. Their strategy was called the 'doctrine of inevitability of gradualism,' which meant that their goals would be gradually achieved....

The secret was evolution, not revolution, or what Webb called 'permeation.' Shaw (whose mistress, Florence Farr, was a witch in the Order of the Golden Dawn), revealed that their goal was to be achieved by 'stealth, intrigue, subversion, and the deception of never calling Socialism by its right name.'...

"In 1905, American Fabians established the Rand School of [Social Science] in New York City. On September 12, 1905, five of the Fabians met at Peck's Restaurant in New York's Lower Manhattan: Upton Sinclair (well-known author and socialist), Jack London (well-known fiction writer), Rev. Thomas Wentworth Higginson (a Unitarian minister), J.G. Phelps Stokes, and Clarence Darrow (legendary lawyer). They incorporated the Intercollegiate Socialist Society for the purpose of promoting 'an intelligent interest in socialism among college men and women,' and established chapters at Harvard, Princeton, Columbia, New York University, and the University of Pennsylvania. Their true purpose was to begin de-Christianizing America. One of its founding members was John Dewey, the father of progressive education, whose philosophy consisted of 'atheism, socialism and evolution.'"

CFR president Richard N. Haass [notice his behind-the-scenes influence in our government]: "Richard Haass is president of the Council on Foreign Relations, a position he has held since July 2003. The Council, based in New York with an office in Washington, DC, is an independent, national membership organization and a nonpartisan centre for scholars dedicated to producing and disseminating ideas so that individual and corporate members, as well as policymakers, journalists, students, and interested citizens in the United States and other countries, can better understand the world and the foreign policy choices facing the United States and other governments....

"Until June 2003, Richard Haass was director of policy planning for the U.S. Department of State, where he was a principal adviser to Secretary of State Colin Powell on a broad range of foreign policy concerns. Confirmed by the U.S. Senate to hold the rank of ambassador, Haass served as U.S. coordinator for policy toward the future of Afghanistan....

"Haass also has been vice president and director of foreign policy studies at the Brookings Institution... a senior associate at the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, a lecturer in Public Policy at Harvard University’s Kennedy School of Government, and a research associate at the International Institute for Strategic Studies. A Rhodes Scholar, Haass holds... both a Master and Doctor of Philosophy degrees from Oxford University."

Creating a North American Community: Chairmen’s Press Briefing for an In- dependent Task Force on the Future of North America: "...last fall the Council on Foreign Relations, together with the Mexican Council of Foreign Relations and the Canadian Council of CEOs, launched a Task Force on the future of North America to examine our trilateral relationship and to suggest opportunities for deeper collaboration....."...this is an opportunity for the three leaders of North American governments to build on a vision of the future, to try to capture what the architecture of a North American community in the 21st century in which China and India are becoming major economic and perhaps military players; in which Europe has coalesced around 25 members, a common currency, and little, if any, border controls internally.

“Revelation Panel Urges Greater North American Integration: "The privately- funded Council on Foreign Relations task force says the future of North America would be stronger, safer and more competitive if the three nations [Canada, Mexico & the U.S.] were to institutionalize their partnerships.... The task force also proposes a North American border pass for easier movement between the nations, and a 'North American preference' that would allow North American citizens to work anywhere in the region with far fewer restrictions that other immigrants. ... The task force also calls for the creation of an investment fund aimed at narrowing the development gap between Mexico and its northern neighbours. The Merging of the Americas in a New Global Order Mega Cartels Headhunting US Sovereignty:

"What is the FTAA”? Answer: You’re not supposed to know..... The FTAA moniker for this legislation itself is a deception: “Free Trade Area of the Americas”.... "Negotiations on this agreement were initiated... during the Clinton Administration”....

like its European prototype the FTAA has been carefully constructed as a framework not just as an economic union but also as a political union such as the European Union is in the final stage of becoming. Or, as the Wall Street Journal put it in a recent article: 'For the U.S., a collapse (in FTAA talks) would be a big defeat in Washington’s efforts... to weave together the hemisphere politically.'

"Shall we weave then our political structure into harmony with the likes of Mexico, Brazil and Venezuela? These are socialist governments at best. In the end the FTAA is not about trade as much as it is about political disintegration of an old order... a non-elected, supra-national political entity that in its first phase calls for our US Congress to turn over its authority (and our nation’s sovereignty) in matters of trade, labor and environmental law."

Global Banking: The Bank for International Settlements: "When David Rockefeller and Zbigniew Brzezinski founded the Trilateral Commission in 1973, the intent was to create a 'New International Economic Order' (NIEO). To this end, they brought together 300 elite corporate, political and academic leaders from North America, Japan and Europe...."...the Bank for International Settlements (BIS)...that controls the vast global banking system with the precision of a Swiss watch.... was founded in 1930.... In the aftermath of World War I and the impending collapse of the German economy and political structure, a plan was needed to rescue and restore Germany, which would also insulate other economies in Europe from being affected adversely.... In 1924 the Allies appointed a committee of international bankers, led by Charles G. Dawes (and accompanied by J.P. Morgan agent, Owen Young), to develop a plan to get reparations payments back on track....

"[According to] Carroll Quigley: 'The Power of financial capitalism had another far reaching plan, nothing less than to create a world system of financial control in private hands able to dominate the political system of each country and the economy of the world as a whole. This system was to be controlled in a feudalistic fashion by the central banks of the world acting in concert, by secret agreements arrived at in frequent meetings and conferences.

The apex of the system was to be the Bank for International Settlements in Basle, Switzerland, a private bank owned and controlled by the world's central banks, which were themselves private corporations. Each central bank... sought to dominate its government by its ability to control treasury loans, to manipulate foreign exchanges, to influence the level of economic activity in the country, and to influence co-operative politicians by subsequent rewards in the business world." Irreversible Consequences?

Beware the Secret Heart of the EU [by Ashley Mote, an independent member of the European Parliament]: "Even the EU's public face - the unelected commission - is part of the charade. Power does not lie with them. It lies with the senior staff running their departments, entrenched by some 3000 working groups and committees on which no elected MEP sits.... We do not know what their budgets are, how they are financed, or who approves their costs. Indeed, we do not even know what powers they have been given, nor by whom. And we cannot get rid of them....

"The EU would no longer be the servant of the member states. It would have become their master. Every previous treaty was a small step along that road.... The other 24 commissioners, each appointed by the other member states... are figure-heads. They take the flak in the public arena, and make announcements decided for them by their senior staff, with the guidance of the secret committees.

"...officially above the commission sits a Council of Ministers.... But the council is just more of the same elaborate illusion of accountable government. ... The European Parliament sits below this vast superstructure... designed to create an illusion of accountable democracy. A condescending pat on the head for voters held in contempt.

Surrounded by threatening forces, King Jehoshaphat prayed for God's help: “O Lord God of our fathers, are You not God in heaven, and do You not rule over all the kingdoms of the nations, and in Your hand is there not power and might, so that no one is able to withstand You? ...O our God, will You not judge them? For we have no power against this great multitude that is coming against us; nor do we know what to do, but our eyes are upon You.” Then God answered his prayer:

"Do not be afraid nor dismayed because of this great multitude, for the battle is not yours, but God’s.... You will not need to fight in this battle. Position yourselves, stand still and see the salvation of the Lord, Who is with you... Do not fear or be dismayed; tomorrow go out against them, for the Lord is with you.”

COUNCIL ON “FOREIGN RELATIONS”

Hidden Agenda of United Nations

1. Dangerously being promoted and planed and UN will be projected as “Government of the World”

2. USA, UK, European countries, North America, Middle East oil producing countries, etc are promoting already created “Blue Print” of “New World Order”

3. The highlights of Blue Print are to promote are:

 Introduce Socio Dictatorship & communism, under the pretext of promoting world democracy

 “UN Peace keeping force” under the pretext of human rights, projecting to liberate countries from terrorism, Weapons of Mass Destruction & Nuclear Free World, dubiously instituting USA forces and making its presence in each country, USA has its presence already in over 130 countries.

 Promoting UN Organ “World health Organization” WHO dubiously make its presence in every country promoting to eradicate Poverty, Health deficiency, malnutrition, abuse to children etc, the ultimate goal is not what is being preached.

 UN Organ “IMF” International Monitory Funds” by promoting “World single Banking” “single currency” with introduction of “Micro Chip” to control all the accounts and “creating single currency rule collaborating and converting, $ - Euro & £ and all other currency trading” into “World one single world currency”,

 UN Organ “UNESCO” under the pretext of promoting common education, promoting common religion of humanism, creating religious disturbance, ethnic violence, within the country and project to try and arrest them, introduce the New religious NIV Bible, by re-writing reinterpreted Bible as world religion, to eradicate ethnic groups, to penetrate the world and make its presence in all the countries if required even by using force. UNESCO is only a tool used to penetrate back door, into all the countries of the world.

 “UN Peace keeping force” is only a tool to have access to the country of choice and remain as eternal body.

 The promotion of “Human rights” is another tool UN is using to interfere in the internal matters affairs of member countries.

 The Secret Societies and Organization dangerously over several centuries and decades involved in such secret activity of crating Blue Print, planning with world more than 150 top political leaders, Politicians, Beaurocrates, financial brokers , bankers, Industrial giants, etc are as follows:

TOP SECRET SOCIETIES

 Top secret societies, think tanks, exclusive clubs, policy-planning groups and fraternities that every conspiracy theorist should be familiar with and some facts behind them.

 Special attention is given to “Bilderbergers”, Illuminati, “Skull and Bones”, “Foreign Relations”, “the Knights Templar”, “the Freemasons”, “the Trilateral Commission” etc.

History’s Mysteries Secret Societies

Showing one plot summary

History's Mysteries investigates secret societies and the influence they have had on the world throughout history.

Statue of Liberty gifted by France symbolizes the gift from secret societies the nature of statue states.

Over the past couple of decades, we have noticed that with so many channels on TV devoted to history and so many shows, they'll sometimes do or say anything to get people’s attention. Shows implying Jesus was an alien or that the Egyptians were helped by aliens are the rage--as are dopey shows like "Secret Societies". Why do I say dopey? Because it may have substance, they are short on facts, due to secrecy being maintained by these mysterious groups, big at making mild accusations with no clear proof due to its close door meetings banning entrance of world press and features self-proclaimed experts, politicians and world leaders who are just trying to promote themselves and their books and keep the world in dark of this secret activities.

Now It is essential and need of the hour before being too late to learn more about groups like the Illuminati, The Knights Templar and the Freemasons and support various organizations who are trying expose these mysterious associations who do not get interviews and facts from these world leaders who are secretly members for decades and distant themselves from answering any questions related to these mysterious associations. While the press and journals “experts” make tired, wild and seemingly hard effort to expose these organizations and prove their theory right to this sleeping world.

According to these experts, the Knights Templar are actually now the Freemasons-- who cares that there was a 400 year gap between the end of one group and the creation of the other...thousands of miles away! Who cares attitude of the people, that these folks claim the Illuminati and Freemasons started the United States, if they cannot prove this?!

The bottom line is that the "History's Mysteries" folks really blew it with this one. It's all insane history or hard evidence of facts learnt from experts only history will tell.

NO.1 BILDERBERG GROUP

Annual meeting of around 130 North-Atlantic elites from the fields of energy, finance, government, intelligence, academia and the media.

Official site: www.bilderbergmeetings.org

About Bilderberg

Founded in 1954, Bilderberg is an annual conference designed to foster dialogue between Europe and North America.

Every year, between 120-150 political leaders and experts from industry, finance, academia and the media are invited to take part in the conference. About two thirds of the participants come from Europe and the rest from North America; one third from politics and government and the rest from other fields.

The conference is a forum for informal discussions about megatrends and major issues facing the world. The meetings are held under the Chatham House Rule, which states that participants are free to use the information received, but neither the identity nor the affiliation of the speaker(s) nor of any other participant may be revealed.

Thanks to the private nature of the conference, the participants are not bound by the conventions of their office or by pre-agreed positions. As such, they can take time to listen, reflect and gather insights.

There is no detailed agenda, no resolutions are proposed, no votes are taken, and no policy statements are issued.

Brief History

The Bilderberg conference is an annual three-day meeting designed to foster dialogue between Europe and North America. The pioneering meeting grew out of the concern expressed by leading citizens on both sides of the Atlantic that Western Europe and North America were not working together as closely as they should on issues of common interest.

The first meeting took place in Hotel De Bilderberg in Oosterbeek, Netherlands, from 29 to 31 May 1954. Representatives from economic, social, political and cultural fields were invited to hold informal discussions to help create a better understanding of the complex forces and major trends affecting Western nations in the difficult post-war period.

Through the years, the meetings have become a forum for discussion on a wide range of topics - from trade to jobs, from monetary policy to investment and from ecological challenges to the task of promoting international security. In the context of a globalized world, it is hard to think of any issue in either Europe or North America that could be tackled unilaterally.

Frequently Asked Questions

What are the Bilderberg meetings and what are its goals?

Bilderberg is an annual conference designed to foster dialogue between Europe and North America. The conference was established in 1954 as a form for informal discussions, bringing together individuals who share an active interest in affairs relevant to the relationship between Europe and Northern America. The conference has one main goal: to foster discussion and dialogue. There is no desired outcome, there is no closing statement, and there are no resolutions proposed or votes taken.

Who leads the Bilderberg meetings?

The Bilderberg meetings are led by the Steering Committee and the Chairman, currently Henri de Castries.

Who are the participants of the Bilderberg conference?

The participant's list changes from year to year and is published on this website. The Bilderberg conference has always represented a diverse mix of backgrounds, views, generations and genders. Participants take part in the conference as individuals in their own right.

What criteria do I have to meet, and what do I have to do to get an invitation for a Bilderberg meeting?

There is no application process. The key question is whether participants can bring an interesting perspective to the discussions. Participants are invited because they can offer a different point of view.

How does the invitation procedure work?

Steering Committee members propose invitees to the Chairman, who consults with the other members of the Steering Committee and decides whether an invitation is issued or not. There is always comprehensive discussion to ensure maximum diversity in background, views, generations and gender.

Are journalists allowed to attend – is there an accreditation procedure and how can I apply?

The meeting is closed to reporting journalists in order to encourage the highest level of openness and dialogue. As a result, there is no accreditation of journalists. Over the years journalists have attended à titre personnel.

With such high-calibre guests, why is there so little media coverage on Bilderberg?

The conference has never sought any public attention. An annual press conference on the eve of the conference was held for several decades up until the nineties, but it was stopped due to a lack of interest. However, the list of participants, main topics and the location are always published before each conference.

In today’s information society, and with so many of your participants regularly underscoring the importance of transparency in an open society, how can you justify imposing the Chatham House Rule on proceedings?

Participants are of course free to discuss the conferences and many do so every year. However, participants are asked not to quote each other. This is to ensure that the participants feel they can speak freely in an environment of trust.

How are the Bilderberg meetings financed? Do participants pay to attend?

Annual contributions by Steering Committee members cover the annual costs of the secretariat. The budget of the secretariat is limited to the costs of the conference. Participation is by invitation only and there is no attendance fee.

This year's Bilderberg conference took place from 11-14 June 2015 in elfs-Buchen, Austria.

A press release including the list of discussion topics and participants are:

Bilderberg Meetings

A total of around 140 participants from 22 countries had confirmed their attendance. As ever, a diverse group of political leaders and experts from industry, finance, academia and the media had been invited.

The key topics for discussion this year include:

 Artificial Intelligence

 Cyber security

 Chemical Weapons Threats

 Current Economic Issues

 European Strategy

 Globalisation

 Greece

 Iran

 Middle East

 NATO

 Russia

 Terrorism

 United Kingdom

 USA

 US Elections

Famous Past Attendees:

David Rockefeller, Henry Kissinger, Bill Clinton, Gordon Brown, Angela Merkel, Alan Greenspan, Ben Bernanke, Larry Summers, George Soros, Donald Rumsfeld, Robert Murdoch, Jean-Claude Trichet (EU Bank President), Mervyn King (Bank of England), Edmond de Rothschild, Robert Oppenheimer, Robert McNamara, Henry Ford II

List of Bilderberg participants

Telfs - Buchen, Austria 11 - 14 June 2015

Final list of some of the Participants were

Chairman

Castries, Henri de Chairman and CEO, AXA Group FRA

Achleitner, Paul M. Chairman of the Supervisory Board, Deutsche Bank AG DEU

Agius, Marcus Non-Executive Chairman, PA Consulting Group GBR

Ahrenkiel, Thomas Director, Danish Intelligence Service (DDIS) DNK

Special Presidential Envoy for the Global Coalition to Counter Allen, John R. USA ISIL, US Department of State

Altman, Roger C. Executive Chairman, Evercore USA

Applebaum, Anne Director of Transitions Forum, Legatum Institute USA

Apunen, Matti Director, Finnish Business and Policy Forum EVA FIN

Baird, Zoë CEO and President, Markle Foundation USA

Balls, Edward M. Former Shadow Chancellor of the Exchequer GBR

Balsemão, Francisco Pinto Chairman, Impresa SGPS PRT

Barroso, José M. Durão Former President of the European Commission PRT

Baverez, Nicolas Partner, Gibson, Dunn & Crutcher LLP FRA

Benko, René Founder, SIGNA Holding GmbH AUT

Bernabè, Franco Chairman, FB Group SRL ITA

Beurden, Ben van CEO, Royal Dutch Shell plc NLD

Bigorgne, Laurent Director, Institut Montaigne FRA

Special Adviser on Financial and Economic Affairs to the Presi- Boone, Laurence FRA dent

Botín, Ana P. Chairman, Banco Santander ESP

Brandtzæg, Svein Richard President and CEO, Norsk Hydro ASA NOR

Bronner, Oscar Publisher, Standard Verlagsgesellschaft AUT

Burns, William President, Carnegie Endowment for International Peace USA

Calvar, Patrick Director General, DGSI FRA

Cebrián, Juan Luis Executive Chairman, Grupo PRISA ESP

Clark, W. Edmund Retired Executive, TD Bank Group CAN

Coeuré, Benoît Member of the Executive Board, European Central Bank INT

Coyne, Andrew Editor, Editorials and Comment, National Post CAN

Damberg, Mikael L. Minister for Enterprise and Innovation SWE

De Gucht, Karel Former EU Trade Commissioner, State Minister BEL

Donilon, Thomas E. Former U.S. National Security Advisor; Partner and Vice Chair, USA

O'Melveny & Myers LLP

Döpfner, Mathias CEO, Axel Springer SE DEU

Dowling, Ann President, Royal Academy of Engineering GBR

Vice President for Engineering, Advanced Technology and Pro- Dugan, Regina USA jects, Google

Eilertsen, Trine Political Editor, Aftenposten NOR

Eldrup, Merete CEO, TV 2 Danmark A/S DNK

Elkann, John Chairman and CEO, EXOR; Chairman, Fiat Chrysler Automobiles ITA

Enders, Thomas CEO, Airbus Group DEU

Erdoes, Mary CEO, JP Morgan Asset Management USA

Fairhead, Rona Chairman, BBC Trust GBR

Federspiel, Ulrik Executive Vice President, Haldor Topsøe A/S DNK

President Emeritus, NBER; Professor of Economics, Harvard Feldstein, Martin S. USA University

Fischer, Heinz Federal President AUT

Flint, Douglas J. Group Chairman, HSBC Holdings plc GBR

CHE Franz, Christoph Chairman of the Board, F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ltd

President and Chairman Executive Board, Wageningen Universi- NLD Fresco, Louise O. ty and Research Centre

Griffin, Kenneth Founder and CEO, Citadel Investment Group, LLC USA

Gruber, Lilli Executive Editor and Anchor “Otto e mezzo”, La7 TV ITA

Guriev, Sergei Professor of Economics, Sciences Po RUS

Gürkaynak, Gönenç Managing Partner, ELIG Law Firm TUR

Gusenbauer, Alfred Former Chancellor of the Republic of Austria AUT

Halberstadt, Victor Professor of Economics, Leiden University NLD

Hampel, Erich Chairman, Uni Credit Bank Austria AG AUT

Hassabis, Demis Vice President of Engineering, Google Deep Mind GBR

Hesoun, Wolfgang CEO, Siemens Austria AUT

Hildebrand, Philipp Vice Chairman, Black Rock Inc. CHE

Hoffman, Reid Co-Founder and Executive Chairman, LinkedIn USA

Ischinger, Wolfgang Chairman, Munich Security Conference INT

Jacobs, Kenneth M. Chairman and CEO, Lazard USA

Jäkel, Julia CEO, Gruner + Jahr DEU

Johnson, James A. Chairman, Johnson Capital Partners USA

Juppé, Alain Mayor of Bordeaux, Former Prime Minister FRA

Kaeser, Joe President and CEO, Siemens AG DEU

Karp, Alex CEO, Palantir Technologies USA

Kepel, Gilles University Professor, Sciences Po FRA

Kerr, John Deputy Chairman, Scottish Power GBR

Kesici, Ilhan MP, Turkish Parliament TUR

USA Kissinger, Henry A. Chairman, Kissinger Associates, Inc.

Kleinfeld, Klaus Chairman and CEO, Alcoa USA

Knot, Klaas H.W. President, De Nederlandsche Bank NLD

Koç, Mustafa V. Chairman, Koç Holding A.S. TUR

Kravis, Henry R. Co-Chairman and Co-CEO, Kohlberg Kravis Roberts & Co. USA

Kravis, Marie-Josée Senior Fellow and Vice Chair, Hudson Institute USA

Kudelski, André Chairman and CEO, Kudelski Group CHE

Lauk, Kurt President, Globe Capital Partners DEU

Lemne, Carola CEO, The Confederation of Swedish Enterprise SWE

Levey, Stuart Chief Legal Officer, HSBC Holdings plc USA

Leyen, Ursula von der Minister of Defence DEU

Leysen, Thomas Chairman of the Board of Directors, KBC Group BEL

Maher, Shiraz Senior Research Fellow, ICSR, King's College London GBR

Head of Department, Ministry of Foreign Affairs, Security Policy Markus Lassen, Christina DNK and Stabilisation

Distinguished Fellow, Carnegie Endowment for International Mathews, Jessica T. USA Peace

Distinguished Visiting Fellow, Hoover Institution, Stanford Uni- Mattis, James USA versity

Vice-President of the State Council, Department of Security, Po- Maudet, Pierre CHE lice and the Economy of Geneva

McKay, David I. President and CEO, Royal Bank of Canada CAN

Mert, Nuray Columnist, Professor of Political Science, Istanbul University TUR

Messina, Jim CEO, The Messina Group USA

Michel, Charles Prime Minister BEL

Micklethwait, John Editor-in-Chief, Bloomberg LP USA

Minton Beddoes, Zanny Editor-in-Chief, The Economist GBR

Monti, Mario Senator-for-life; President, Bocconi University ITA

Mörttinen, Leena Executive Director, The Finnish Family Firms Association FIN

Mundie, Craig J. Principal, Mundie & Associates USA

Munroe-Blum, Heather Chairperson, Canada Pension Plan Investment Board CAN

Netherlands, H.R.H. Princess Beatrix of the NLD

O'Leary, Michael CEO, Ryanair Plc IRL

Osborne, George First Secretary of State and Chancellor of the Exchequer GBR

Columnist, Haberturk Newspaper; Senior Lecturer, Kadir Has Özel, Soli TUR University

Papalexopoulos, Dimitri Group CEO, Titan Cement Co. GRC

President, Public Establishment of the Palace, Museum and Na- Pégard, Catherine FRA tional Estate of Versailles

Perle, Richard N. Resident Fellow, American Enterprise Institute USA

Petraeus, David H. Chairman, KKR Global Institute USA

Pikrammenos, Panagiotis Honorary President of The Hellenic Council of State GRC

Reisman, Heather M. Chair and CEO, Indigo Books & Music Inc. CAN

Rocca, Gianfelice Chairman, Techint Group ITA

Roiss, Gerhard CEO, OMV Austria AUT

Co-Chair, Council on Foreign Relations; Former Secretary of the Rubin, Robert E. USA Treasury

Rutte, Mark Prime Minister NLD

Sadjadpour, Karim Senior Associate, Carnegie Endowment for International Peace USA

Sawers, John Chairman and Partner, Macro Advisory Partners GBR

Sayek Böke, Selin Vice President, Republican People’s Party TUR

Schmidt, Eric E. Executive Chairman, Google Inc. USA

Scholten, Rudolf CEO, Oesterreichische Kontrollbank AG AUT

Sevelda, Karl CEO, Raiffeisen Bank International AG AUT

Stoltenberg, Jens Secretary General, NATO INT

Stubb, Alexander Ministers of Finance FIN

Suder, Katrin Deputy Minister of Defence DEU

UN Special Representative; Chairman, Goldman Sachs Interna- Sutherland, Peter D. IRL tional

Svanberg, Carl-Henric Chairman, BP plc; Chairman, AB Volvo SWE

Svarva, Olaug CEO, The Government Pension Fund Norway NOR

Thiel, Peter A. President, Thiel Capital USA

Tsoukalis, Loukas President, Hellenic Foundation for European and Foreign Policy GRC

Director-General, Organisation for the Prohibition of Chemical Üzümcü, Ahmet INT Weapons

Vitorino, António M. Partner, Cuetrecasas, Concalves Pereira, RL PRT

Wallenberg, Jacob Chairman, Investor AB SWE

Weber, Vin Partner, Mercury LLC USA

Wolf, Martin H. Chief Economics Commentator, The Financial Times GBR

Wolfensohn, James D. Chairman and CEO, Wolfensohn and Company USA

Chairman, Board of International Advisors, The Goldman Sachs Zoellick, Robert B. USA Group

2012 list of US participants, Info graphic showing how members of the Bilderberg are connected to absolutely everything.

With 65 to 70 regular members, the Bilderberg Group is the most exclusive group on this list. The group came to be identified with the Bilderberg Hotel in Holland where the group first met in 1954.

The ultra-secret group was founded by Denis Healey, Joseph Retinger, David Rockefeller and Prince Bernhard of the Netherlands (of the infamous Lock- heed scandal in which he took kickbacks selling exploding planes).

From the get-go the Bilderbergers sought to develop a strategy and create European consensus for a European Common Market. They were behind the Amsterdam Treaty, the Treaty of Maastricht, the Treaty of Rome, and finally the European Constitution. Leaked 1955 transcripts revealed that Bilder- bergers had discussed the creation of a “United European” with its own currency. “They are also working on merging Canada, United States and Mexico into a North American Union”. The Bilderberg discussed improving business relations and extending IMF loans to China before Nixon’s famous 1972 visit.

At the Bilderberg meeting of 1991, David Rockefeller told then Arkansas Governor Bill Clinton to support NAFTA –

(“The North American Free Trade Agreement” (NAFTA; Spanish: Tratado de Libre Comercio de América del Norte, TLCAN; French: Accord de libre- échange nord-américain, ALÉNA) is an agreement signed by Canada, Mexico, and the United States, creating a trilateral rules-based trade bloc in North America”).

Leaked 1955 Bilderberg Docs Outline Plan for Single European Currency

Global elite spoke of agenda to create Euro nearly 40 years before it was first codified in the 1992 Maastricht Treaty.

Paul Joseph Watson - Prison Planet.com - Friday, May 8, 2009

Leaked documents from the 1955 Bilderberg Group conference held in Germany discuss the agenda to create a “European Union and a single EU currency”, decades before they were introduced, disproving once again debunkers who claim that Bilderberg has no influence over world events.

Leaked papers from the meeting which took place from September 23-25 1955 at the Grand Hotel Sonnenbichl in Garmisch-Partenkirchen, West Germany,

As first reported in 2003, a BBC investigative team were allowed to access Bilderberg files which confirmed that the EU and the Euro were the brainchild of Bilderberg. They were probably reading from the same documents that were released by Wikileaks.

(http://www.propagandamatrix.com/bbc_radio_4_bilderberg.mp3 )

It was only last month that Belgian viscount and current Bilderberg- chairman Étienne Davignon bragged that Bilderberg helped creating the Euro by first introducing the policy agenda for a single currency in the early 1990’s.

However, the documents show that the agenda to create a European common market and a single currency go back decades earlier.

The summary report of the 1955 meeting talks of the “Pressing need to bring the German people, together with the other peoples of Europe, into a common market.”

The document also outlines the plan, “To arrive in the shortest possible time at the highest degree of integration, beginning with a common European market.”

Just two years later, in 1957, the first incarnation of the European Economic Community (EEC) was born, which comprised of a single market between Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, Luxembourg and the Netherlands. The EEC gradually enlarged over the next few decades until it became the European Community, one of the three pillars of the European Union, which was officially created in 1993.

The 1955 Bilderberg summary outlines a consensus that, “It might be better to proceed through the development of a common market by treaty rather than by the creation of new high authorities.” The EEC was duly created via the Treaty of Rome, which was signed on 25 March 1957.

The same process is still being followed to this day with the Lisbon Treaty, which hands over vast swathes of national sovereignty to the EU by means of the consent of Presidents and Prime Ministers of European countries, rather than by the arbitrary creation of new authorities, a method that would more obviously lay bare the fact that the creation of a federal EU super state is totalitarian by its very nature.

Even so, debunkers will probably still try and claim that the idea of a common European market was floating around in the early 1950’s and that Bilderberg were merely debating contemporary political ideas.

However, the same cannot be said for the single European currency, which wasn’t even introduced in the form of notes and coins until January 2002, having been first codified in the 1992 Maastricht Treaty. The documents prove that Bilderberg members were pushing for its introduction nearly 40 years earlier.

“A European speaker expressed concern about the need to achieve a common currency, and indicated that in his view this necessarily implied the creation of a central political authority,” states the summary document.

True to form, the single European currency, the Euro, was not introduced until after the creation of a central political authority – the EU itself.

The document also stresses, “The necessity to bring the German people into a common European market as quickly as possible,” adding that the future was in danger without a “United Europe”.

We also learn that, “A United States participant confirmed that the United States had not weakened in its enthusiastic support for the idea of integration, although there was considerable diffidence in America as to how this enthusiasm should be manifested. Another United States participant urged his European friends to go ahead with the unification of Europe with less emphasis on ideological considerations and, above all, to be practical and work fast.”

Despite the plethora of manifestly provable examples of where Bilderberg’s agenda has later played out in actual policies and geopolitical developments on the world stage, establishment media debunkers still scoff and sneer at independent researchers who dare claim that 150 of the world’s most influential powerbrokers meeting in secret to discuss the future of the planet might equate to something more than an informal talking shop, calling , such assertions “conspiracy theories”.

Indeed, the sheer stupidity of debunkers to suggest that an event that at- tracts the titans of government, industry, banking, business and academia, at which the most pressing global issues of the day are vigorously discussed under the cloak of a mutually agreed media blackout, has no bearing on future world events is the most laughable “conspiracy theory” ever uttered.

Bilderberg’s 2009 agenda has already been leaked before their May 14-17 meeting in Vouliagmeni, Greece. According to investigative journalist Daniel Estulin, one of Bilderberg’s aims is to smear anti-Lisbon Treaty activists and politicians by planting derogatory stories in the media, enabling them to silence opposition to an EU federal super state that Bilderberg has been carefully cultivating since their very first meetings in the 1950’s – a fact, not a conspiracy theory, proven by Bilderberg’s own internal documents.

This article was posted: Friday, May 8, 2009 at 10:24 am

The group’s major source of funds is the Rockefeller and Ford Foundations. The members are cherry picked most prominent members of other influential organization and national think tanks such as the Brookings, Carnegie Endowment, and Council of Foreign Relations. Much of the leadership of the Bilderberg is also groomed within these foundations. All these organization have similar ideologies. Henri de Castries of the French House of Castries currently heads the Bilderberg.

Listen to the following “Audio Visual” available on Youtube.

You will be shocked. It is stunning revelation.

1. “Bilderberg” - https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KYWx_cFzqro

2. IIluminati” – Plan 2016 to promote “New World Order”- promoting “NIV Bible” : https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0KkkdjS0qJc

3. Truth Behind UNITED NATION - Full Documentary ( Part -1)-

“Skull & Bones” and - fraud on implementing – “New World Order” and - Birth of “Council for Foreign Relations” to create “New World Order” – One World Government

Part -1: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cLaQo_FpbxA

Part – 2: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AA8M6G4_9BI

The “High Priests of Globalization” at the first Bilderberg Group Meeting in Oosterbeek, Netherlands

The annual meetings are held in a different country each year and are attended by around 130 elites with about 65 regulars. Forty present of Bilderbergers are Americans. Each international region is roughly represented by one member from the finance sector, one from the government sector, and one from academia. The Group is separated into 6 panels with around 20 people in each panel. There are 3 main speakers per panel and everyone is obligated to comment.

As a whole the membership manages the planet’s resources and their membership is especially concentrated in the energy and banking sectors. “Their goals are a one world constitution, a one world government, a one army and they work tirelessly towards that goal. The typical globalist agenda”.

Potential candidate are observed for a few meetings before being asked to join. Bilderberg researchers often point out that according to the Logan Act, it is illegal for any American government official to be present at the Bilderberg meetings.

Researcher and author of True Story of Bilderberg Daniel Estulin have investigated the Bilderberg Group for 15 years. He stresses that the Bilderberg is not a Judeo-Masonic conspiracy. His book is the book on the Bilderberg. Strangely, Estulin claims that Bilderberg Steering Committee member and founder of Canada’s largest book chain Heather Reisman have banned True Story of Bilderberg from her stores. However, that doesn’t appear to be the case.

Jim Tucker has dedicated his entire life to chasing the Bilderbergers around the world after learning of the Group’s existing in the 70s. Tucker has an informer inside the group who has consistently leaked him list of participants and talking points for years.

Sources and further information:

The True Story of the Bilderberg Group (Amazon) Daniel Estulin, 2009

“The True Story of the Bilderberg Group” and What They May Be Planning Now – Excellent review of Estulin’s book

Video of Hillary Clinton lying about ever attending Bilderberg while a FOIA request confirmed that she attended the conference in 1997.

NO.2 ILLUMINATI

Secret Bavarian secret society active at the end of the 18th century and modern blanket term for the crème de la elite crème.

The Bavarian Illuminati was founded by Adam Weishaupt on May 1, 1776. The Illuminati is a secret society within secret societies. In 1784, the order was banned by the Bavarian government. Today, the term Illuminati is usually used as a blanket term for the inner circle of the elite.

The Illuminati was separated into three classes; 1. The Nursery Class; 2. The Masonic Class; 3. The Mystery Class. Each class was separated into degrees. Lower classes were unaware of the existence of higher classes. Non Illuminati were called the Profane.

I. Nursery Class: 1. Illuminati Novice (1-2 year trial period) 2. Illuminati Minerval 3. Illuminati Minor

II. II. Masonic Class: Symbolic Masonry 1. Entered Apprentice 2. Fellow Craft 3. Master Mason

III. Scottish Masonry 1. Illuminati Major (Scot Novice) 2. Illuminati Dirigens (Scot Knight)

IV. iv. Mystery Class:

Lesser Mysteries 1. Illuminati Priest 2. Illuminati Prince (Regent)

V. Greater Mysteries 1. Illuminati Magus 2. Illuminati Rex

I am currently exposing the secrets of the Bavarian Illuminati in comic format and Terry Melanson has written a detailed non-fiction book about Adam Weishaupt’s Order of the Illuminati.

Exactly what the illuminati is varies a great deal from one conspiracy theorist to the next. Different versions of it continues to appear in computer games, music, television and movies. Illuminati Researcher Mark Dice’s book Illuminati: Facts & Fiction does a great job at weeding through the various modern Illuminati incarnations and separating the wheat from the chaff. It has saved me hours of work in establishing the root of various Illuminati theories and rumors. (although he considers the Bavarian Illuminati to be Luciferian, which is something I should ask him about) Nevertheless, Dice book is essential.

Some researchers believe the Illuminati originated before and that Adam Weishaupt simply reincarnated a much older society. The 13 Bloodlines of the Illuminati is a popular theory about ancient families secretly ruling the United States.

Others believe that the modern elite and the current proponents of “the New World Order” grew out of Weishaupt’s movement. However, we have access to most of the original writings of the Illuminati and we know that the abol- ishment of private property was one of the goals of the Order. This is hardly in line with the modern capitalist plutocrats who make up today’s Illuminati. Today’s Illuminati is anything but enlightened.

What is the Illuminati?

GET THE COMPLETE COMIC BOOK DELIVERED TO YOUR DOOR OR DOWNLOAD IT INSTANTLY! ADAM WEISHAUPT AND THE SECRETS OF THE BAVARIAN ILLUMINATI IS AVAILABLE IN OUR SHOP AND ON AMAZON.

Secrets of the Bavarian Illuminati is book 3 in the Illuminati Rex Conspiracy Comic Books series. Despite the occasional humor and being crammed with anachronisms, this comic is a non-fiction look at the history of the Bavarian Illuminati.

NO.3 SKULL AND BONES

Elite senior fraternity at Yale University

Famous Bones men: William H. Taft (Us President), George H.W. Bush (Us President, CIA), George W. Bush (US President) Averell Harriman, H.J. Heinz II, Henry Luce (Time-Life,CIA), Bill Bundy (CIA) and William F. Buckley. (CIA)

AKA Chapter 322, is a secret society at Yale University established by William Russell and Alphonso Taft in 1832. Each year 15 juniors are selected to join the Skulls in their senior year.

The Tomb, Yale

Investment banking firm Brown Brothers Harriman pays the tax bill. No one lives inside the Tomb. At the mention of the words Skull and Bones, they must leave the room. Meetings are on Thursdays and they always have dinner on Sundays. In the 2004 US Election, two Bones men, John Kerry and George W. Bush went head-to-head for the Presidency of the United States.

INITIATION:

“Skull and Bones, do you accept?”

If the neophyte accepts, he is given a rolled up message tied with a black ribbon and sealed with the skulls emblem imprinted into black wax. The message instructs the neophyte of the time of place of his initiation. He is also instructed not to bring any metal. (Note that Masons are also “divested of all metals” during their initiation ceremonies.) Once they accept, they are members for life.

Skull and Bones owns Deer Island in St-Lawrence River

The initiation happens every April. It is supervised by Uncle Toby, with Don Quixote, the Pope and Elihu Yale in attendance. On Saturday evening, neophytes give a detailed biography of themselves and on Sunday they give a sexual biography while lying in a coffin. Members are assigned nick names. The tallest is called Long Devil, the most sexually experienced is called Magog. George HW Bush was Magog, Averell Harriman was Thor, Henry Luce was Baal. They call themselves the Knights of Eulogia and refer to non-Bones men as Barbarians.

The clock is 5 minutes faster, which represents Skull and Bones which is to differentiate time spend inside the tomb from the outside, which is referred to as Barbarian time.

In 1876 a group of students calling themselves File and Claw broke into the Tomb and discovered that the Order was founded in 1832 (32) as the second chapter (+2) of a German secret society. They discovered a painting of a skull surrounded by Masonic symbols in Room 322 and released floor plans of the Tomb. The Skull themselves claim that 322 represents 322 bce, the year Demosthenes died. In keeping with this legend, their calendar begins 322 years before the Roman calendar. The year 2013 would be 2335 Anno Demostheni in Bonespeak.

They reportedly have the bones of Geronimo and Pancho Villa hidden in 322. Room 322 is the inner temple of the Skull and Bones. It features an encased skeleton which the Bones men called “Madame Pompadour”. There are other compartments in the case including manuscripts, secrecy oaths and initiation rituals.

HW Bush, Bonesman, 1948

Author of Fleshing out the Skull and Bones Kris Milliken, claims that the core group of Skull and Bones is still very much involved in the dope trade. They are Sorcerers of Death performing black magic. Taft Russell’s family fortune came from opium and according to Eustace Mullins, the fraternity continued to be involved in the dope trade all the way up to the Vietnam War.

NO.4 COUNCIL ON FOREIGN RELATIONS

3000 elites from academia, government, media, intelligence, military, banking and top corporations.

Official site: www.cfr.org

Famous Members: David Rockefeller, Henry Kissinger, Bill Clinton, Conrad Black, William F. Buckley, Bill Bundy, Allen Dulles, Gerald Ford, Herbert Hoover, Angelina, Jolie George Kennan, Carl Sagan, Paul Warburg, Oprah Winfrey, George Soros, Colin Powell, Bill Moyers, Rupert Murdoch, Zbigniew Brzezinski and Edgar Bronfman, Sr.

List of Council on Foreign Relations Members (wiki) Membership map on They Rule

The Council on Foreign Relations grew out of the round table groups and began as a gathering of scholars known as the Inquiry which included the power behind FDR’s throne and author of Philip Dru: Administrator, Colonel House and Walter Lippmann.

This group attended the Paris Peace Conference where powerful members of the elite attended a private gathering at the Majestic Hotel. Round Table member Lionel Curtis suggested the creation a Royal Institute for Interna- tional Affair in London and the Council of Foreign Relations, its US counterpart in New York. The CFR was officially founded in 1921.

Council on Foreign Relations HQ at 58 East 68th Street and Park Avenue

It is one of the most powerful private organizations and has a major influence on U.S. foreign policy. It’s equally powerful British sister organization, the Royal Institute of International Affairs has been renamed Chatham House. Today the CFR has over 3000 members.

Formations of “League of Nations” & “United Nations”

“The group suggested the formation of a League of Nation. Five of the 6 men of the “Agenda Group” which drafted the United States proposal for a United Nations were members of the CFR. Carol Quigley called its members the “international financial coterie” The CFR was instrumental in planning the post-World War 2 economic and political world order”. *

About the round table groups:

De Beer’s Cecil Rhodes and journalist William T. Stead organized a secret society with an executive committee known as the “Circle of Initiate”. The secret society had an outer circle known as the “Association of Helpers” which eventually evolved into the Round Table Groups.

Sources and further information: Memoirs (Amazon) David Rockefeller, 2003

Excerpts and Quotations

The Rockefellers, Morgans

and the Global Media Censors

See also Rockefeller & Global Mind Control | The Mainstream Media

Real Conspiracies | Clinton Global Initiative & The Aspen Institute

Both major political parties used the media to build the perception of opposing positions on key issues, while all the while building consensus on issues that were critical to social change. That's verified in the Congressional Record for 1917, which reported that

"...the J.P. Morgan [banking] interests.... and their subsidiary organizations got together 12 men high up in the newspaper world and employed them to select the most influential newspapers in the United States and sufficient number of them to control generally the policy of the daily press of the US.... They found it was only necessary to purchase the control of 25 of the greatest papers. ...an editor was furnished for each paper to properly supervise and edit information...." --Congressman Oscar Callaway statements were included in the Congressional Record

"The Council on Foreign Relations co-sponsors an assembly Rethinking America's Security: Beyond Cold War to New World Order which is attended by 65 prestigious members of government, labor, academia, the media, military, and the professions from nine countries. Later, several of the conference participants joined some 100 other world leaders for another closed door meeting of the Bilderberg Society in Baden Baden, Germany. The Bilderbergers also exert considerable clout in determining the foreign policies of their respective governments. While at that meeting, David Rockefeller -- co-founder (with Zbigniew Brzezinski) of the Trilateral Commission -- said in a speech:

'We are grateful to The Washington Post, The New York Times, Time Magazine, and other great publications whose directors have attended our meetings and respected their promises of discretion for almost forty years. It would have been impossible for us to develop our plan for the world if we had been subject to the lights of publicity during those years. But, the world is now more sophisticated and prepared to march towards a world government. The supranational sovereignty of an intellectual elite and world bankers is surely preferable to the national auto-determination [read as 'democracy'] practiced in past centuries."

--June 5, 1991, Bilderberger meeting in Baden Baden, Germany (a meeting also attended by then-Governor Bill Clin- ton)www.mega.nu/ampp/bilderberg.html. [Main source: Dr. Dennis Cud- dy, A Chronological History of the New World Order

In the Introduction to Censored [1996]: The News That Didn't Make the News-And Why, a 1996 book by Carl Jensen, Walter Cronkite wrote:

"'A handful of us determine what will be on the evening news broadcasts, or, for that matter, in the New York Times or Washington Post or Wall Street Journal.... Indeed it is a handful of us with this awesome power... a strongly editorial power.

"...we must decide which news items out of hundreds available we are going to expose that day. And those [news stories] available to us already have been culled and re-culled by persons far outside our control.'"

"The Invisible Hand of the Me- dia" at http://www.internetwks.com/pauling/lie/story.html

"George Orwell's prophetic world where 'ignorance is strength' no longer seems a prophetic forecast, but a present reality....

"Carl Jensen's assessment of Adolph Hitler's philosophy of information control—

"More than half a century ago Hitler said the masses take a long time to understand and remember, thus it is necessary to repeat the message time and time and time again. The public must be conditioned to accept the claims that are made...no matter how outrageous or false those claims might be." Censored 1996. ....

"'If, however, the public does not receive all the information it needs to make informed decisions,' Jensen claims, "then some form of news blackout is taking place... some issues are overlooked (what we call 'censored') and other issues are over-covered (what we call 'junk food news').'Why does a boxer's bitten ear receive local and nationwide coverage, but we are never told about presidential Executive Orders that affect the entire nation?' ...

"Aldous Huxley in his book, Brave New World, observes, 'The greatest triumphs of propaganda have been accomplished, not by doing something, but by refraining from doing. Great is truth, but still greater, from a practical point of view, is silence about truth.'...

"World bankers, by pulling a few simple levers that control the flow of money, can make or break entire economies. By controlling press releases of economic strategies that shape national trends, the power elite are able to not only tighten their stranglehold on this nation's economic structure, but can extend that control worldwide. Those possessing such power would biogically want to remain in the background, invisible to the average citizen." See also Legalizing Mind Control & The Revolutionary Roots of the UN & UNESCO: Its purpose and Its Philosophy

NO.5 TRILATERAL COMMISSION

David Rockefeller’s elite think tank of over 300 private citizens from Europe, Asia, and North America.

Official site: www.trilateral.org

Famous Members: David Rockefeller, George HW Bush, Bill Clinton, Zbigniew Brzezinski, Jean-Claude Trichet, Henry Kissinger and Jimmy Carter.

List of List of Trilateral Commission Members (tilateral.org – .PDF) Membership map on They Rule.

David Rockefeller had been looking for a way to include Japan into international cooperation discussion. At the Belgium Bilderberg conference of 1972, Rockefeller discussed the idea with Columbia University Russian Studies professor Zbigniew Brzezinski (Zbig) who had himself previously approached the Bilderberg Steering Committee. The Steering Committee had been unreceptive to the idea.

The think tank had its first executive committee meeting in Tokyo in October 1973. The Trilateral Commission receive funds mostly from the Rockefeller Brothers Fund and is deeply rooted in the CFR. The commission helps governments around the world reach “constructive accords” with other governments. They promote closer cooperation between Europe, Asia, and North America. In 1974 they published The Crisis of Democracy calling for democracy in “moderation”.

NO.6 PRIORY OF SION (PRIEURÉ DE SION)

Ancient secret society sworn to protect the holy bloodline of Jesus Christ and Mary Magdalene

Famous Grandmasters: Jean de Gisors (1188–1220), Nicolas Flamel (1398– 1418), René d’Anjou (1418–1480), Léonard de Vinci (1510–1519), Isaac Newton (1691–1727), Charles de Lorraine (1746–1780), Maximilian de Lor- raine (1780–1801), Victor Hugo (1844–1885), Claude Debussy (1885– 1918),Jean Cocteau (1918–1963)

Certainly one of the most intriguing of all secret societies, unfortunately, it isn’t real. The Priory of Sion legend is completely made up! (almost)

I too, am in Arcadia

The Priory fantasy is due in great part to the work of hoaxer Pierre Plantard. He claimed to be a descendant of French King Dagobert II of the Merovingian dynasty. According to his own theory, he was also the prophesied Last Roman Emperor. He threw in the very real, Order of Sion for authenticity and proceeded to plant documents in the French National Archive later known as the Dossier Secret.

He also included Rennes-le-Château restaurant owner Noël Corbu’s (another admitted hoaxer) legend of Father François Bérenger Saunière about discovering parts of the Knights Templars’s lost treasure. It all made for a great story.

The strange events of the Priory of Sion and Rennes-le-Château were finally epitomized on the big screen in 2006 Da Vinci Code starring Tom Hanks.

Note to Mr. Langdon: Vinegar freezes at just under 0°C (32°F ). Next time you encounter an impossible-to-open-without-the-combination-type Cryptex, consider sticking the thing in the freezer for a few hours.

Researchers Lynn Pickett and Clive Prince have found evidence for the existence of a Priory of Sion within the Masonic Strict Observance Rites of Germany. Their goal was to form a United States of Europe.

NO.7 BOHEMIAN GROVE

Male elites meet every July for a 2 week encampment at private campground.

“Famous Attendees”: Henry Kissinger, David Rockefeller, Ronald Reagan, GW Bush, Gerald Ford, Richard Nixon, Malcolm Forbes, William F. Buckley, Clint Eastwood, and William Randolph Hearst. – Camp Membership

Founded in 1872, the Bohemian Grove is a 2700-acre campground in the midst of ancient Redwood trees located in Sonoma County, California. Every July, elites participate in a 2 week encampment to make ritual sacrifices to the sinister owl-god Moloch. Power brokers assemble at, ”The Owl Shrine” for informal “Lakeside Talks.” Nixon cancelled his scheduled Lakeside Talk in 1971 because the media was insisting on covering it.

Thanks to the work of Alex Jones, Chris Jones and Phillip Weiss who have each individually infiltrated the Grove, the outside world has been able to assemble a lot of information on what happens there. Alex Jones’ footage can be seen in Dark Secrets: Inside Bohemian Grove and Chris Jones’s (who worked undercover at the Grove) can be seen in Alex Jones’ The order of Death, which was released 5 years later to commemorate Alex Jones infiltration of the Grove.

President Ronald Reagan and Richard Nixon, 1967

Weiss stayed as a “guess” at Bohemian Grove for 7 days in 1989. Weiss heard Walter Cronkite himself as the voice of the infamous owl. He even shook Ronald Reagan’s hand who confirmed that it was indeed at the Grove in ’67 that he had assured Nixon that he would not challenge him in the upcoming Republican nomination. (so much for non-weaving. spiders) He also witnessed a Grover engaging in “un-Bohemian” behaviour when Henry Kissinger rudely cut in line at the phone banks.

NO.8 FREEMASONRY

The Founding Founders, Freemasonry and the capital of the United States

Mostly harmless today, the freemasons held immense power in the 18th and 19th century. The earliest historical document mentioning the “Old Charges” of Freemasonry is the Regius Poem and dates to around 1425. The Grand Lodge of England formed in 1717. Masonic expressions that have become common idioms include: “On the square”, “On the level”, “giving/getting the third degree” and “blackballing”

Blue Lodge and 2 major appending bodies

They have been accused of plotting the American and French revolution and the Jack the Ripper killings. Author Stephen Knight writes in The Brotherhood that the KGB controls masonry and though it exercises control over MI5 and MI6 and is a requirement for any advancement at Scotland Yard. Born if Blood traces the order back to the Knights Templars, and the Hiram Key traces the order back to Jesus and Ancient Egypt.

Due to multiple bans on Freemasonry by Popes, a good catholic is still expected join the Knights of Columbus, as President Kennedy did, the Vatican’s answer to Freemasonry. The Vatican is yet to reverse its stance on Freemasonry.

Freemasonry is composed of three levels, referred to as the Blue Lodge degrees:

1. Entered Apprentice 2. Fellow craft 3. Master Mason

Non-masons are called “Cowans”. There are multiple other degrees that a mason can obtain once he has become a “Master Mason” (Third degree) which masons call “Appending degrees”. The most popular ones are the Scottish Rite of Freemasonry, with 33 degrees and the York Rite.

In addition there are Masonic Lodges not “recognized” by the Grand Loge of England, and as a result, by the majority of “regular” Masonic lodges. For example, the Rite of Memphis-Misraim has 99 degrees and the Grand Orient de France accepts women.

See Top 10 Masonic Conspiracy Theories for more information of the Freemasons.

NO.9 COMMITTEE OF 300

A group of Three Hundred ruling individual descendant from the Black Nobility

Famous Members: British royals, Dutch royals, House of Hapsburg (?), Lord Halifax, Winston Churchill, Cecil Rhodes, George Bush, Aldous Huxley, Henry Kissinger, David Rockefeller, Giuseppe Mazzini and H.G. Wells

The existence of the Committee of 300 is wholly dependent on the word of Dr John Coleman, author of Conspirators’ Hierarchy – The Story of The Committee of 300.

Joseph Pavlonksy – – – Coleman tells us that he gazed upon a mention of the supranational Committee of 300 or the Olympians while stationed with MI6 in Angola. He then decided to dedicate the rest of his life to exposing the group. His status as a MI6 whistle blower and the origin of his doctorate are never discussed in interviews. (Leading Eustace Mullins - to question his motives.)

Coleman uses the core of conspiracy theory literature and adds his own secret group which allegedly controls all the other ones. (Popular author David Icke added shape-shifting Reptilians to conspiracy lore and became an international bestseller) All the usual players are there.

The Bilderberg Group, RIIA “the Royal Institute of International Affairs”, the Club of Rome, the Trilateral Commission and the CFR “Council on Foreign Relations” all make an appearance and serve as the executive arms of the Committee of 300. In Coleman’s scenario, the RIIA is above all the others and chooses the American Secretary of State and through him/her give the US President his marching orders. Prime Minister Disraeli had MI6 snuff out Abraham Lincoln and later, William Stevenson of Mi6 ordered the hit on JFK.

He also throws in popular nuggets such as the Black Nobility, (the group varies a great deal in conspiracy lore from the historical Black Nobility) who according to Coleman, made the Borgias look like Sunday school teachers. (The mysterious nobles are always a crowd pleaser.) According to Dr. Coleman’s decade long studies at the Cairo Museum (?), no member of the families of the Black Nobility or their servants has ever died from the Black Plague. He discovered that they drank a secret herbal compound and exposed themselves to low-frequency radiation making them immune to the disease.

The Queen of England is the head of the Committee of 300. The 300 families all rule with equal shares! (highly doubtful) The Queen is actually from the Black Nobility family of the House of Guelph. (Rex note: It is true that they change their name from “Saxe-Coburg-Gotha” to “Windsor”)

The Committee of 300 were behind Beatlemania and used the Beatles to induce young Americans towards drugs and Rock n Roll. They even came up with the word teenager (or not)

New words and new phrases– prepared by Tavistock– were introduced to America along with the Beatles. Words such as “rock” in relation to music sounds, “teenager,” “cool,” “discovered” and “pop music” were a lexicon of disguised code words signifying the acceptance of drugs and arrived with and accompanied the Beatles wherever they went, to be “discovered” by “teenagers.”

Incidentally, the word “teenagers” was never used until just before the Beatles arrived on the scene, courtesy of the Tavistock Institute for Human Relations. Coleman’s own deep hatred seeps into his work:

”I hate to use these beautiful words in the context of “Beatlemania”; it reminds me of how wrongly the word “lover” is used when referring to the filthy interaction between two homosexuals writhing in pigswill. To call “rock” music, is an insult, likewise the language used in “rock lyrics.”

Is there any collaboration for Coleman’s Committee of 300 claims? No. Coleman claims to have heard Gorbachev referred to the Committee of 300 on CNN but no one has been able to confirm it and the clip has disappeared from the CNN archives. Proponents of the group often point to German industrialist Walter Rathenau’s quote, but there is no indication that Rathenau was referring to an actual group rather than a number.

“Three hundred men, all of whom know one another, direct the economic destiny of Europe and choose their successors from among themselves. – “Geschäftlicher Nachwuchs”, Neue freie Presse, Walter Rathenau, 1909

Note that there is no doubt that the other groups which Coleman exposes are real. Some are outlined in this very article.

Sources and further information: Wake up America! (YouTube – Running Time : 1:43:30) John Coleman lecture – The Committee of 300 information is towards the beginning of the video. He does make good observations on the GATT later on in the video demonstrating that he has a grasp of the globalist’s agenda and method.

Dr. John Coleman Breaks Down The Committee of 300 (YouTube – Running Time: 10:55 Alex Jones Show

21 Goals of the Illuminati and The Committee of 300 (educate-yourself.org) Typical list of Illuminati goals

NO.10 KNIGHTS TEMPLAR

Military order of warrior monks founded in the aftermath of the First Crusade

The military order was founded in 1118 by French nobleman Hugues De Payens with the mission of guarding pilgrims on the atrociously dangerous roads from the coast of the Mediterranean to Jerusalem. The Templars are officially endorsed by the Church in 1129 at the Council of Troye. Knights Templars were given tax-free status by the Pope. The Templars became a popular charity and many people gave them land and property.

The Templars were given accommodations on the Temple Mount and began digging towards the Temple of Solomon. No one knows exactly what they found and rumours go from The Jews lost reassure lost in the Siege of Jerusalem in 70 ce. which according to the Copper Scroll found with the Dead Sea Scroll would contain around 200 tons of gold, Ark of Covenant, the severed head of John the Baptist or the Holy Grail, the most iconic item in all of Christendom. And at a time when everyone is cuckoo for relics, the Holy Grail was hot!

The Knights Templars went through secret rituals that began by entering the temple from the west door at dawn, signifying that the knight was being born into a new life. The Warrior-monks took vows of chastity, poverty and obeisance.

Templars weren’t allowed to charge interest, so they charged “rent” on properties left with them. More than 90% of Templars were non-combatant and actually involved in the day-to-day running of the vast Templar Empire. The Templars as an organization now owned agricultural estates, mines, vineyard, castles and vast tracks of land and money.

The Templars soon became the west’s first international bankers. They pio- neered banking concepts such as safety deposit boxes, letters of credit, and what appears to be the first form of traveller’s check in the West – Upon depositing property at any Templar depository in Europe, you were given note with a coded cipher. If you needed to withdraw funds in another location, even Jerusalem, a Templar clerk would give you your funds and give you back a re-coded cipher.

The King of France, Phillip the Fair was broke because of his father’s war with the English. The King was highly indebted to the Templars. By ridding himself of the Templars, he would rid himself of his debts to them.

In order to do so, he used the same generic charges of heresy that he had used against his enemy Pope Beniface VIII shortly before kidnapping him and beating him to death. He then poisoned his successor, Pope Benedict XI and bought up enough cardinals to install his childhood friend as Pope Clement V who later moved The Holy Sea to Avignon. (Owned by the King of Sicily but surrounded by Philip’s land.) At dawn on Friday October 13, 1307 orders were given to arrest Jacques de Molay and other top Templars.

The next month, Clement ordered all Christian monarchs to do the same.

The Templars were arrested in France and England but virtually nowhere else. They were charged with heresy, devil worship, spitting on cross, sodo- my, and one that stood out to Templars researchers as it was a charge unique to the Templars, worshipping a severed human head.

For recanting his confession previously obtained under torture, Grandmaster Jacques de Molay was slow cooked over a fire and his ashes scattered in the Seine River. Before dying, he cursed the pope and the king telling them they would follow him within the year, they did.

Last Templar Grandmaster Jacques De Molay

TOM A. HIDELL

Tom likes to research conspiracy, write conspiracy and talk conspiracy. His current interests include the Bavarian Illuminati, the Illuminati and the New World Order.

RULING THE WORLD FOR BEGINNERS

An Introduction to World Domination

CRYPTEX REPLICA

“The Elite” Engineering People to Love Their Servitude: The Essence of the “New World Order” Posted on 03/10/2015 Sagacious News Network

Summary: This is an excerpt of Andrew Gavin Marshall´s shocking essay. There is a paradox in the “New World Order ideology”: Officially it is working for the slogan of the French Revolution, its first big one, but in reality it is a deeply racist movement considering itself to be the master race and the populations of the world to be inferior beings. Being Luciferians, “The Elitists” consider themselves gods, entitled to shape mankind´s genes and minds according to their sick needs. They think the world ends up in chaos without their leadership – order out of chaos, as they say. But first they create chaos, since they own the world due to their incredible wealth. Their modern gurus are the brothers Aldous and Julian Huxley as well as Betrand Russell who introduced the idea of “global scientific dictatorship” by means of eugenics and “by making mankind slaves through mass psychology”. But more than that: they are making us love our slavery (welfare state, which they are now dismantling). Once completely established, their dictatorship will be impossible to abolish – for it is so interwoven and thought through, as an illuminist said already in 1781. “It is funded by Rockefeller Foundations, Ford, Carnegie, Mellon, Harriman, and Morgan”. It really took in California in the 1920es – and Hitler imitated and further developed the ideas and the system in the Holocaust. After the war, eugenics had to split up into population control, genetics, environmentalism – and mental hygiene. “The UNESCO is deeply involved”. “The eugenicists” are using tools like genetic manipulations, technology (chipping). Their aim is global mind control over a reduced humanity consisting of upgraded individuals – as in cattle breeding.

The following is an extract of part 1 of an essay by Andrew Gavin Marshall. It is well documented – also by many references. The most bizarre aspect, perhaps, is that all the while the global elite and their bought minions are preaching the slogan of their first big revolution, The French Revolution, they are in fact working hard to promote exactly the opposite: Servitude, inequality and extinction of the weak. “They now call this their New World order”. It all started with Mayer Amschel Rothschild of Frankfurt asking the “apostate” Jesuit, Adam Weishaupt, to make an organisation with which Mayer could rule the world by means of money. On May 1, 1776, this secret order for the New World was presented to Rothschild. Weishaupt called the order the Illuminati, which after the Wilhelmsbad freemason conference in 1781 infiltrated freemasonry – surviving there and outside till this day. On that occasion, Comte de Virieu, a Mason, upon his return home said: “I can only tell you that all this is very much more serious than you think. The conspiracy which is being woven is so well thought out, that it will be impossible for the Monarchy and the Church to escape it.” This illuminati movement – today called illuminism by the EU (explanatory statement) has its roots in the “master race” concept of the Pharisaic Talmud, as Mayer Rothschild was a “pious” Talmud Jew.

Andrew Gavin Marshall, Global Research 5 July 2010 Award-winning author and researcher, Edwin Black, wrote an authoritative history of eugenics in his book, “War Against the Weak,” in which he explained that, “the incremental effort to transform eugenics into human genetics forged an entire worldwide infrastructure,” with the founding of the Institute for Human Genetics in Copenhagenin 1938, led by a Rockefeller Foundation eugenicist. It was financed with money from the Rockefeller Foundation. While not abandoning the eugenics goals, the new re-branded eugenics movement “claimed to be eradicating poverty and saving the environment.”

The story of humanity has been the struggle between the free-thinking individual and structures of power controlled by elites that seek to dominate land, resources and people. The greatest threat to elites at any time – historically and presently – is an awakened, critically thinking and politically stimulated populace. The tools and systems of social control are vast and evasive; they penetrate the very psychology and biology of the individual. The elite feel that they are entrusted – due to their supposed ‘innate’ superior intelligence and specialization – to control society and reshape it as they see fit, to actively mould and construct public opinion and ideas. They have a belief that people are essentially irrational emotional beings, and that they must be controlled by an elite or else the world would be in chaos. This is what underpins the ideas of ‘stability’ and ‘order’.

The Technological Revolution, especially the internet, has fostered an Information Revolution which has fed a global political awakening. Simultaneously, the Technological Revolution has led to free humanity being faced with the dominating threat of a truly global elite, who have at their hands the technology to impose a truly global system of control: a global scientific dictatorship increasingly having the ability to control the very biology and psychology of the individual . image: https://i1.wp.com/euro-med.dk/billeder/billederaldous-20huxley- thumb12.jpg

In 1932, Aldous Huxley wrote his “Brave New World,” in which he looked at the emergence of the scientific dictatorships of the future. In his 1958 essay, “Brave New World Revisited,” Huxley examined how far the world had come in that short period since his book was published, and where the world was heading.

Huxley wrote that: In economics, the equivalent of a beautifully composed work of art is the smoothly running factory in which the workers are perfectly adjusted to the machines. Huxley explained that, “The twenty-first century, I suppose, will be the era of World Controllers, the scientific caste system and Brave New World.”

In a 1962 speech at UC Berkeley, Huxley spoke primarily of the ‘Ultimate Revolution’ that focuses on ‘behavioural controls’ of people: If you are going to control any population for any length of time, you must bring in an element of getting people to consent to what is happening to them. We are in process of developing a whole series of techniques, which will enable the controlling oligarchy – who have always existed and will presumably always exist – to get people to love their servitude… I think there are going to be scientific dictatorships in many parts of the world. If you can get people to consent to the state of servitude – then you are likely to have a much more stable, a much more lasting society; much more easily controllable society than you would if you were relying wholly on clubs, and firing squads and concentration camps.

image: https://i1.wp.com/euro-med.dk/billeder/billederbertrand-russell- thumb1.jpg

In 1952, Bertrand Russell wrote the book, “The Impact of Science on Society. Russell explained that: I think the subject which will be of most importance politically is mass psychology. Its importance has been enormously increased by the growth of modern methods of propaganda. Of these the most influential is what is called education’.

Religion plays a part, though a diminishing one; the Press, the cinema and the radio. What is essential in mass psychology is the art of persuasion. I see no reason why a scientific dictatorship’ should be unstable. After all, most civilised and semi-civilised countries known to history have had a large class of play an increasing part. Slaves or serfs completely subordinate to their owners. When the government controls the distribution of food, its power is absolute so long as it can count on the police and the armed forces. And their loyalty can be secured by giving them some of the privileges of the governing class. I do not see how any internal movement of revolt can ever bring freedom to the oppressed in a modern scientific dictatorship.

Fichte laid it down that education should aim at destroying free will, so that, after pupils have left school, they shall be incapable, throughout the rest of their lives, of thinking or acting otherwise than as their schoolmasters would have wished... Diet, injections, and injunctions will combine, from a very early age, to produce the sort of character and the sort of beliefs that the authorities consider desirable, and any serious criticism of the powers that be will become psychologically impossible. Even if all are miserable, all will believe themselves happy, because the government will tell them that they are so. Russell later proclaimed in his book that, “a scientific world society cannot be stable unless there is a world govern ent and here (established 2009 according to EU Pres. van Rompuy).

In 1961, President Eisenhower warned of the dangers to democracy posed by the military-industrial complex: the interconnected web of industry, the military, and politics creating the conditions for constant war. He also warned that public policy could itself become the captive of scientific-technological elite. image: https://i1.wp.com/euro-med.dk/billeder/billederzbigniew-brzezinski- thumb12.jpg

In 1970, Zbigniew Brzezinski wrote about “the gradual appearance of a more controlled and directed society,” in the “technetronic revolution”; explaining: Such a society would be dominated by an elite whose claim to political power would rest on allegedly superior scientific know-how. Unhindered by the restraints of traditional liberal values, this elite would not hesitate to achieve its political ends by using the latest modern techniques for influencing public behaviour and keeping society under close surveillance and control. Many sciences and large social movements are directed by the same foundation s and money that financed the eugenics movement in the early 20th century. The Rockefeller Foundations, Ford, Carnegie, Mellon, Harriman, and Morgan money that flowed into eugenics led directly to ‘scientific racism,’ and ultimately the Holocaust in World War II. Following the Holocaust, Hitler had discredited the eugenics movement he admired so much in America. So the movement branched off into forming several other social engineering projects: population control, genetics, and environmentalism, and here and here and here – as well as mental hygiene. Major environmental and conservation organizations were founded with Rockefeller and Ford Foundation money which then continued to be central sources of funding to this day; while the World Wildlife Fund (WWF) was founded in 1961 by Sir Julian Huxley, Aldous Huxley’s brother, who was also the President of the British Eugenics Society. Sir Julian Huxley also happened to be the first Director-General of the UNESCO (United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organisation). In 1946, Huxley wrote a paper titled, “UNESCO: It’s Purpose and its Philosophy.” In it, he wrote that the general focus of UNESCO is to help the emergence of a single world culture, with its own philosophy and background of ideas. This is opportune, since this is the first time in history that the scaffolding and the mechanisms for image: https://i2.wp.com/euro-med.dk/billeder/billederunesco-flag- thumb1.jpg

Eugenics is about the social organization and control of humanity.

world unification have become available….It is essential that eugenics should be brought entirely within the borders of science, for, as already indicated, in the not very remote future the problem of improving the average quality of human beings is likely to become urgent; and this can only be accomplished by applying the findings of a truly scientific eugenics. Thus low-grade mental defectives cannot be offered equality of educational opportunity, nor are the insane equal with the sane before the law or in respect of most freedoms. Many of these “genetic inequalities” revolve around the idea of intellectual superiority.” It just so happens that elites who propagate this ideology, also happen to view the masses as intellectually inferior; thus, there can be no social equality in a world with a technological intellectual elite. Eugenics is about the social organization and control of humanity. Ultimately, eugenics is about the engineering of inequality. In genetics, elites found a way to take discrimination down to the DNA.

In a 2001 issue of Science Magazine, Garland Allen, a scientific historian, wrote about genetics as a modern form of eugenics. The term eugenics was coined in 1883 by the Victorian polymath Francis Galton, geographer, statistician, and first cousin of Charles Darwin. It meant to him “truly- or well-born,” and referred to a plan to encourage the “best people” in society to have more children (positive eugenics) and to discourage or prevent the “worst elements” of society from having many, if any, children (negative eugenics).

John D Rockefeller III founded the Population Council in 1952 – funded by the Rockefeller Brothers Fund. It is rooted in the eugenics movement – and works for “reproductive health”, which means contraception. But the Rockefeller family has a long story of support for eugenics – funding Hitler´s Chief Eugenicist, Ernst Rüdin, extensively. Thus, in 1934 (February) a Rockefeller “progress report” (by one of the division heads) asks, “Can we develop so sound and extensive a genetics that we can hope to breed, in the future, superior men?”

Free humanity faces the most monumental decision we have ever been presented with: do we feed and fuel the global political awakening into a true human psycho-social revolution of the mind, creating a new global political economy which empowers and liberates all of humanity; or… do we fall silently into a ‘brave new world’ of a global scientific oppression, the likes of which have never before been experienced, and whose dominance would never be more difficult to challenge and overcome? We are not powerless before this great ideational beast. We have, at our very fingertips the ability to use technology to re-shape the world so that it benefits the peoples and not simply the powerful.

Comment

This is even more sinister. The ruling elite is about to steal our very souls, making us post human robots – by mean of devilish, weird technology and genetics. The forces trying to change mankind according to its own Luciferian needs hate mankind. In fact their number does not exceed 7.000 – but they are in control of nearly everything due to their incredible wealth:

They have simply bought the world and made its inhabitants their slaves.

Even more incredible that mankind puts up with it. But since the elite own the media the masses have no idea about what is going on – nor where they are being pushed – towards the slaughter- house. It even seems that Aldous Huxley was right: mankind has come to love its servitude – so far called the welfare state – which is now rapidly being taken away. But of course people will put up with that, too. And if they don´t, it will be a bloody affair, first gendarmerie forces (Eurogend for)– then military forces having the permission to shoot demonstrators – in the EU as a consequence of the Lisbon Treaty which was dictatorially passed in spite of its rejection by the populations.

All this being said, there is a problem with an explosive population increase in the LDCs – in particular the Muslim ones. And this problem is being actively increased by the elite encouraging the LDC birth surplus to lap into the developed countries to destroy them utterly. The paradoxical thing is that the European intelligence that developed the world is due to be extinguished in LDC populations demographically bound to take over and change the developed world into LDCs. May be because these uneducated people are easier to govern. The elite are also making our educational system mere junk. So, why do the elitist want good genes? The answer is: They don´t want racial hygiene. They want no genes but their own kind to survive. (LDC - “Less Developed Countries”)

The New World Order

See also The Revolutionary Roots of the UN

See Chronology of UN

Trade Biblical truth for a global spirituality and "service learning"

“If we do not follow the dictates of our inner moral compass and stand up for human life, then his lawlessness will threaten the peace and democracy of the emerging new world order we now see, this long dreamed-of vision we've all worked toward for so long.... The world can therefore seize the opportunity [Persian Gulf crisis] to fulfil the long-held promise of a New World Order where diverse nations are drawn together in common cause to achieve the universal aspirations of mankind… based on shared principles and the rule of law.... The illumination of a thousand points of light.... The winds of change are with us now.” George H. W. Bush, State of Union Message, January 1991.

“My vision of a new world order foresees a United Nations with a revitalized “peacekeeping function” George H.W. Bush speaking to the Economic Club of New York, February 6, 1991.

Trade fact-based education for dialectic, feeling-based "learning"

“But this present window of opportunity, during which a truly peaceful and interdependent world order might be built, will not be open for long. Already there are powerful forces at work that threaten to destroy all of our hopes and efforts to erect an enduring structure of global interdependence.” David Rockefeller, September 14, 1994.

Their visible tools for transformation are UNESCO's global education system, the World Health Organization's "Mental Health" hierarchy, and many other nice-sounding UN agencies and programs.

New World Order - Peace or Evil: "Further global progress is now possible only through a quest for universal consensus in the movement towards a new world order." Mikhail Gorbachev, UN, December of 1988.

“Single acts of tyranny may be ascribed to the accidental opinion of a day; but a series of oppressions, begun at a distinguished period, and pursued unalterably through every change of ministers, too plainly prove a deliberate systematical job of reducing us to slaves.” Thomas Jefferson, (1743 – 1826)

Former US President George H. W. Bush:

WHY OUR BORDER WITH MEXICO IS OPEN by RALPH EPPERSON: "The United Nations can help bring about a new day -- and to press forward to cap an historic movement towards A NEW WORLD ORDER." George Bush (the father), the United Nations on October 1, 1990, New York Times transcript (page A6).

"The foundation for the new world order would be laid in Helsinki and it would be established under the United Nations.” Bush added later at a news conference, "If the nations of the world, acting together, continue as they have been we will set in place the cornerstone of an international order more peaceful than any that we have known." 1990 meeting in Finland

'New World Order' Quotes of Note: "Time and again in this century, the political map of the world was transformed. And in each instance, a new world order came about through the advent of a new tyrant or the outbreak of a bloody global war, or its end." Feb 28, 1990, six months before Iraq's invasion of Kuwait in August.

'New World Order' Quotes of Note: "Out of these troubled times, our fifth objective--a new world order--can emerge...... We are now in sight of a United Nations that performs as envisioned by its founders." -- Sep 11, 1990

The New World Order - Chronology - Part 2: "Speaking to the graduating class at Texas A&M University, Mr. Bush states that the United States is ready to welcome the Soviet Union 'back into the world order.'" May 12, 1989???

A Critique and Chronology by Dennis L. Cuddy, Ph.D."...the crisis in the Persian Gulf offers a rare opportunity to move toward an historic period of cooperation. Out of these troubled times... a new world order can emerge, in which the nations of the world, east and west, north and south, can prosper and live in harmony.... Today the new world is struggling to be born". President Bush calls Gulf War opportunity for New World Order in address to Congress entitled "Toward a New World Order," September 11, 1990.

A Critique and Chronology by Dennis L. Cuddy, Ph.D.: President Bush speaks of the "collective strength of the world community expressed by the U.N.... a historic movement towards a new world order... a new partnership of nations... a time when humankind came into its own... to bring about a revolution of the spirit and the mind and begin a journey into a... new age". U.N. address, on October 1, 1990 World Leaders and Famous People Promoting a New World Order and a One World Government: "If we do not follow the dictates of our inner moral compass and stand up for human life, then his lawlessness will threaten the peace and democracy of the emerging new world order we now see, this long dreamed-of vision we've all worked toward for so long." President George H. W. Bush, January 1991.

'New World Order' Quotes of Note: "I think what's at stake here is the new world order....a reinvigorated United Nations." George H. W. Bush, Jan 7 1991, address to Congress titled "Toward a New World Order" (regarding the Gulf crisis).

100

“My vision of a new world order foresees a United Nations with a revitalized peacekeeping function.” George H.W. Bush speaking to the Economic Club of New York, February 6, 1991.

World Leaders and Famous People Promoting a New World Order and a One World Government. "Now, we can see a new world coming into view. A world in which there is the very real prospect of a new world order. In the words of Winston Churchill, a 'world order' in which 'the principles of justice and fair play... protect the weak against the strong...' A world where the United Nations, freed from cold war stalemate, is poised to fulfil the historic vision of its founders. A world in which freedom and respect for human rights find a home among all nations." President George H. W. Bush, March 6, 1991.

“It is the sacred principles enshrined in the United Nations charter to which the American people will henceforth pledge their allegiance.” President Bush addressing the General Assembly of the U.N. in 1992.

101

Soviet Secretary Mikhail Gorbachev

The same quote from different sources:

The On-Going Conspiracy To Create A One World Dictatorship: "Further global progress is now possible only through a quest for universal consensus in the movement towards a new world order." -- Mikhail Gorbachev, UN, December of 1988.

New World Order - Peace or Evil: "Further global progress is now possible only through a quest for universal consensus in the movement towards a new world order." Mikhail Gorbachev, UN, December of 1988.

Alex Jones on The Rise of the American Police State: "Further global progress is now possible only through a quest for universal consensus in the movement towards a new world order." Mikhail Gorbachev, UN, December of 1988.

World Leaders and Famous People Promoting a New World Order and a One World Government - by Wes Penre- February 20, 2004: "Further global progress is now possible only through a quest for universal consensus in the movement towards a new world order." Mikhail Gorbachev, in an address at the United Nations (December 1988).

Similar quotes which different dates:

The New World Order - Chronology - Part 2: "World progress is only possible through a search for universal human consensus as we move forward to a new world order." Mikhail Gorbachev, UN, May 12, 1989.??

“the New World Order would be ushered in by the Gulf Crisis.” Mikhail Gor- bachev on December 31 1990

102

The New World Order: A Critique and Chronology by Dennis L. Cuddy, Ph.D.: "All of us have felt how much we need the United Nations if we really are to move toward a new world and new kinds of relationships in the world in the interest of all countries.... The Soviet Union and the United States have more than enough reasons to be partners in building it, in shaping new security structures in Europe and in the Asian Pacific region. And also in the making of a truly global economy, indeed, and the creation of a new civilization. "Mikhail Gorbachev, speaking at Stanford University, 1990.

Bill Clinton

“We can't be so fixated on our desire to preserve the rights of ordinary Americans.” - March 11 1993 defending his newly signed ‘antiterrorism’ bill.' President Bill Clinton

"If the personal freedoms guaranteed by the Constitution inhibit the government's ability to govern the people, we should look to limit those guarantees.” - August 12, 1993, US president Bill Clinton.

“When we got organized as a country and we wrote a fairly radical Constitution with a radical Bill of Rights, giving a radical amount of individual freedom to Americans... and so a lot of people say there's too much personal freedom. When personal freedom's being abused, you have to move to limit it. That's what we did in the announcement I made last weekend on the public housing projects, about how we're going to have weapon sweeps and more things like that to try to make people safer in their communities.” President Bill Clinton 22 march 1994,on MTV’s ‘enough is enough’.

"There are a lot of very brilliant people who believe that the nation-state is fast becoming a relic of the past," Bill Clinton, New York Times, November 25, 1997

103

Henry Kissinger, addressing to the 1992 Bilderberg organization meeting at Evian, France: "Today Americans would be outraged if U.N. troops entered Los Angeles to restore order; tomorrow they will be grateful! This is especially true if they were told there was an outside threat from beyond, whether real or promulgated, that threatened our very existence. It is then that all peoples of the world will pledge with world leaders to deliver them from this evil. The one thing every man fears is the unknown. When presented with this scenarios, individual rights will be willingly relinquished for the guarantee of their wellbeing granted to them by their world government." (Transcribed from a tape recording made by one of the Swiss delegates, May 21, 1992.

"I can think of no faster way to unite the American people behind George W. Bush than a terrorist attack on an American target overseas. And I believe George W. Bush will quickly unite the American people through his foreign policy.” - Henry Kissinger on CNBC, December 13, 2000,

Brent Scowcroft

The On-Going Conspiracy To Create A One World Dictatorship: "We believe we are creating the beginning of a new world order coming out of the collapse of the U.S.-Soviet antagonisms." Brent Scowcroft (August 1990), quoted in the Washington Post (May 1991)

“We believe we are creating the beginning of a new world order coming out of the collapse of the U.S.-Soviet antagonisms.” Brent Scowcroft (G.H.W. Bush’s National Security Advisor), August 1990. Cited in the Washington Post, May 1991.

104

"A rising tide of protectionism could endanger European investment in the US, the president of the European Commission said ahead of a European Union-US summit in Vienna today.... Jose Manuel Barroso said... 'We deplore all decisions when there is -- because of a security concern -- the restrictions of the free flow of capital.... It's negative for all of us. We believe it's important to have more cross-border investment.'... Mr. Barroso is also worried about Washington's refusal to grant visa-free access to the US to citizens of 'new' EU member states, and the Commission has struggled to meet US demands to provide details of transatlantic air passengers in a way that is compatible with EU law..... Mr Barroso said the US 'position on the visa-waiver scheme treated people from new member states 'as second-class citizens'." [Wolfgang Proissl and Fidelius Schmid and Daniel Dombey, "EU attacks US 'protectionism'," Financial Times, 6-21-06]

"A rising tide of protectionism could endanger European investment in the US, the president of the European Commission said ahead of a European Union-US summit in Vienna today.... Jose Manuel Barroso said .... 'We deplore all decisions when there are -- because of a security concern -- the restrictions of the free flow of capital.... It's negative for all of us. We believe it's important to have more cross-border investment.'.... Mr. Barroso is also worried about Washington's refusal to grant visa-free access to the US to citizens of "new' EU member states, and the Commission has struggled to meet US demands to provide details of transatlantic air passengers in a way that is compatible with EU law..... Mr Barroso said the US 'position on the visa-waiver scheme treated people from new member states 'as second-class citizens'." Wolfgang Proissl and Fidelius Schmid and Daniel Dombey, "EU attacks US 'protectionism'," Financial Times, 6-21-06

105

Today Americans would be outraged if U.N. troops entered Los Angeles to restore order; tomorrow they will be grateful! This is especially true if they were told there was an outside threat from beyond, whether real or promulgated, that threatened our very existence. It is then that all peoples of the world will pledge with world leaders to deliver them from this evil. The one thing every man fears is the unknown. When presented with these scenarios, individual rights will be willingly relinquished for the guarantee of their wellbeing granted to them by their world government." Henry Kissinger, addressing to the 1992 Bilderberger meeting at Evian, France, May 21, 1992. Psalm 2

“Beware the leader who bangs the drums of war in order to whip the citizenry into a patriotic fervour, for patriotism is indeed a double-edged sword. It both emboldens the blood, just as it narrows the mind. And when the drums of war have reached a fever pitch and the blood boils with hate and the mind has closed, the leader will have no need in seizing the rights of the citizenry. Rather, the citizenry, infused with fear and blinded by patriotism, will offer up all of their rights unto the leader and gladly so. How do I know? For this is what I have done. And I am Caesar.” - Around 50 B.C., Julius Caesar.

“Single acts of tyranny may be ascribed to the accidental opinion of a day; but a series of oppressions, begun at a distinguished period, and pursued unalterably through every change of ministers, too plainly prove a deliberate systematical job of reducing us to slaves.” Thomas Jefferson, (1743 – 1826)

“I would support a Presidential candidate who pledged to take the following steps: ... At the end of the war in the Persian Gulf, press for a comprehensive Middle East settlement and for a 'new world order' based not on Pax Americana but on peace through law with a stronger U.N. and World Court.” - George McGovern, New York Times, February 1991.

106

“As President, I would work toward international creation of a new world order.” Nelson Rockefeller. (1968)

“George Bush has been surrounding himself with people who believe in one-world government. They believe that the Soviet system and the American system are converging. The vehicle to bring this about is the United Nations.” David Funderburk, former U. S. Ambassador to Romania, October 29, 1991.

"Finding the Russian scientists may be a problem being that Russia does not have a Social Security System—as here in America—that allows us to monitor, track down and capture an American citizen.” June 17, 2001, discussing lost nuclear materials in Russia and the true purpose of the social security number." Colin Powell

107

The Rockefellers, Morgans

and the Global Media Censors

See also Rockefeller & Global Mind Control | The Mainstream Media

Real Conspiracies | Clinton Global Initiative & The Aspen Institute

--Congressman Oscar Callaway statements were included in the Congres- sional Record

"The Council on Foreign Relations co-sponsors an assembly Rethinking America's Security: Beyond Cold War to New World Order which is attended by 65 prestigious members of government, labor, academia, the media, military, and the professions from nine countries. Later, several of the conference participants joined some 100 other world leaders for another closed door meeting of the Bilderberg Society in Baden Baden, Germany.

108

The Bilderbergers also exert considerable clout in determining the foreign policies of their respective governments. While at that meeting, Da- vid Rockefeller -- co-founder (with Zbigniew Brzezinski) of the Trilateral Commission -- said in a speech:

But, the world is now more sophisticated and prepared to march towards a “world government”. “The supranational sovereignty of an intellectual elite and world bankers is surely preferable to the national auto-determination [read as 'democracy'] practiced in past centuries."

--June 5, 1991, Bilderberger meeting in Baden Baden, Germany (a meeting also attended by then-Governor Bill Clinton) www.mega.nu/ampp/bilderberg.html. [Main source: Dr. Dennis Cuddy,

A Chronological History of the New World Order

In the Introduction to Censored [1996]: The News That Didn't Make the News-And Why, a 1996 book by Carl Jensen, Walter Cronkite wrote: "'A handful of us determine what will be on the evening news broadcasts, or, for that matter, in the New York Times or Washington Post or Wall Street Journal.... Indeed it is a handful of us with this awesome power... a strongly editorial power.

109

"we must decide which news items out of hundreds available we are going to expose that day. And those [news stories] available to us already have been culled and re-culled by persons far outside our control.'"

"The Invisible Hand of the media" at http://www.internetwks.com/pauling/lie/story.html

"George Orwell's prophetic world where 'ignorance is strength' no longer seems a prophetic forecast, but a present reality....

"Carl Jensen's assessment of Adolph Hitler's philosophy of information control--

110

"'Those who manipulate the organized habits and opinions of the masses constitute an invisible government which is the true ruling power of our country', wrote Edward Bernays, assistant to William Paley, founder of CBS. '...We are dominated by a relatively small number of persons.... ' "World bankers, by pulling a few simple levers that control the flow of money, can make or break entire economies. By controlling press releases of economic strategies that shape national trends, the power elite are able to not only tighten their stranglehold on this nation's economic structure, but can extend that control worldwide. Those possessing such power would logically want to remain in the background, invisible to the average citizen."

111

New World Order

New World Order: What does this term mean?

New World Order is a term used to describe an accord of the world's superpowers to rule, secure, and maintain the premise of "global peace." The concept is to bring the world under submission “to one supreme government”, enforce one controlled common religion and one worldwide economic system. (The EU has already instituted this with the 'Euro' currency.) “In reality, it is a move toward a socialistic, controlled, and godless world”.

This is not a recent New Age plan or idea. Though 20th and 21st Century world leaders have talked a great deal about entering a "new era" and the establishment of a "New World Order," the plan is said to have begun prior to the 12th Century with a group known as the Illuminati leading to the Knights Templar and The Scottish Rites Free Masonry.

112

New World Order: Who is involved? New World Order advocates believe the cause is a worthy one, after all, who wouldn't want world peace? While many university students, professors, and others adhere to the schema, the highest echelon of NWO engineers are said to include many of the world's wealthiest people, top political leaders, and the corporate elite.

For instance, Soviet Prime Minister Mikhail Gorbachev, addressed the UN in December of 1988 saying, "Further global progress is now possible only through a quest for universal consensus in the movement towards a “new world order." In a 1990 meeting in Finland, the former US President George H. W. Bush quoted, "The foundation for “the new world order” would be laid in Helsinki and it would be established under the United Nations.” Bush added later at a news conference, "If the nations of the world, acting together, continue as they have been we will set in place the cornerstone of an international order more peaceful than any that we have known."

“New World Order” Socialists became more public during Bill Clinton's US Presidency. A powerful lobby, the Progressive Caucus, began openly promoting the principles of socialism and signed onto the agenda of the Democratic Socialists of America. Clinton quite successfully pushed toward 'big government' involvement into American private life. This paved the way for subtle, democratic freedoms to slip away as more and more governmental control was established.

113

Movies including Skulls and National Treasure have been made about 'secret-societies' such as The Skull and Bones Society. Other reportedly involved secret brotherhoods and/or international organizations include the Bilderbergers, the Trilateral Commission, the Illuminati, the World Health Organization, and the United Nations. Unlike some conspiracy theories, these are matters of general public knowledge.

New World Order: What Would This Mean? As the world becomes increasingly secularized and atheistic, we find many other influences moving people toward a New World Order agenda. False Political Correctness and desensitization (to crime, violence, genocide, godlessness, occultism, etc.) have taken place while persecution against Christians and Jews run rampant worldwide.

Pastor Ron Riffe (Cutting Edge) writes: "This world is currently awash with occult literature such as The Da Vinci Code and the Gnostic Gospels. Extremely expensive television programs about UFO's and many other occult themes are being aired during network prime time because they know the audience is ripe for the picking. A mass hypnosis is taking place before our eyes and the evidence is overwhelming."

Texe Marrs, author of Mystery Mark of the New Age, reminds us that those familiar with the Bible will recognize that there will be a one world government under direct authority of the Antichrist. The Bible says God will prevail against all evil. The New Age message is nothing new! It is the same old rebellion against God!

114

Learn what God Scriptures say is regarding the plan of the Antichrist and what you can do as these things take place. “My people are being destroyed because they don't know me. It is your entire fault, you priests, for you yourselves refuse to know me. Now I refuse to recognize you as my priests. Since you have forgotten the laws of your God, I will forget to bless your children”

Learn More About The End Times!

WHAT DO YOU THINK? - We have all sinned and deserve God's judgment. God, the Father, sent His only Son to satisfy that judgment for those who believe in Him. Jesus, the creator and eternal Son of God, who lived a sinless life, loves us so much that He died for our sins, taking the punishment that we deserve, was buried, and rose from the dead according to the Bible. If you truly believe and trust this in your heart, receiving Jesus alone as your Saviour, declaring, "Jesus is Lord," you will be saved from judgment and spend eternity with God in heaven.

115

The On-Going Conspiracy To Create “A One World Dictatorship” From Ron Schmidt [email protected]

http://www.rense.com/general14/theongoing.htm

Quotes That Show Proof Of The On-going Conspiracy To Create A One World Government *Dictatorship*

"The CFR (Council of Foreign Relations) is the establishment. Not only does it have influence and power in key decision-making positions at the highest levels of government to apply pressure from above, but it also finances and uses individuals and groups to bring pressure from below, to justify the high level decisions for converting the U.S. from a sovereign Constitution Republic into a servile member of a one-world dictatorship." - -- Congressman John R. Rarick

"The most powerful clique in these elitist groups has one objective in common - they want to bring about the surrender of the sovereignty of the national independence of the United States. A second clique of international members in the CFR (Council of Foreign Relations) comprises the Wall Street international bankers and their key agents. Primarily, they want the world banking monopoly from whatever power ends up in the control of global government." - -- Rear Admiral Chester Ward, a former member of the CFR for 16 years (CFR - Council of Foreign Relations)

The late Carroll Quigley (Bill Clinton's mentor), Professor of History at Georgetown University, member of the CFR, stated in his book, "Tragedy & Hope": "The CFR is the American Branch of a society which originated in England, and which believes that national boundaries should be obliterated, and a one-world rule established."

116

"The ultimate aim of the CFR (Council on Foreign Relations) is to create a one-world socialist system, and to make the U.S. an official part of it." –

Dan Smoot, a former member of the FBI Headquarters staff in Washington, D.C.

"It would have been impossible for 'US' to develop 'OUR' plan for the world if 'WE' had been subject to the bright lights of publicity during these years."

But the world is now more sophisticated and prepared to march towards a “world government” which will never again know war but only peace and prosperity for the whole of humanity. The supranational sovereignty of an intellectual elite and world bankers is surely preferable to the national auto determination practiced in the past centuries." - -- FROM DAVID ROCKEFELLER at a BILDERBERGER meeting in 1992

"The real menace of our republic is the invisible government which, like a giant octopus, sprawls its slimy length over our city, state and nation. At the head is a small group of banking houses generally referred to as international bankers? This little coterie of powerful international bankers virtually run our government for their own selfish ends." - -- JOHN F. HYLAN, mayor of NYC in 03-26-1922

"The real truth of the matter is, as you and I know, that a financial element in the large centres has owned the government ever since the days of Andrew Jackson... " - -- Written by FDR in a letter to an associate dated November 21, 1933

"Every Republican candidate for President since 1936 has been nominated by the Chase National Bank." - From ROBERT A. TAFT after his defeat at the 1952 Republican convention

117

"The Trilateral Commission is intended to be the vehicle for multinational consolidation of the commercial and banking interests by seizing control of the political government of the United States. The Trilateral Commission represents a skilful, coordinated effort to seize control and consolidate the four centres of power political, monetary, intellectual and ecclesiastical. What the Trilateral Commission intends is to create a worldwide economic power superior to the political governments of the nation states involved. As managers and creators of the system, they will rule the future." -- U.S. Senator Barry Goldwater in his l964 book: "With No Apologies"

"The great strength of our Order lies in its concealment; let it never appear in any place in its own name, but always covered by another name, and another occupation. By establishing reading societies, and subscription libraries, and taking these under our direction, and supplying them through our labours, WE MAY TURN THE PUBLIC MIND WHICH WAY WE WILL...".-- From ADAM WEISHAUPT, founder of the ILLUMINATI

Progress and peace and justice are attainable. So we say to all peoples and governments: Let us fashion together a new world order." - -- Henry Kissinger, in address before the General Assembly of the United Nations, October 1975 "The planning of UN can be traced to the 'secret steering committee' established by Secretary [of State Cordell] Hull in January 1943. All of the members of this secret committee, with the exception of Hull, a Tennessee politician, were members of the Council on Foreign Relations. They saw Hull regularly to plan, select, and guide the labours of the [State] Department's Advisory Committee. It was, in effect, the coordinating agency for all the State Department's post war planning." - -- Professors Laurence H. Shoup and William Minter, writing in their study of the CFR, "Imperial Brain Trust: The CFR and United States Foreign Policy." (Monthly Review Press, 1977.

118

"At the founding of the United Nations in San Francisco, Nelson Rockefeller was in the forefront of the struggle to establish not only an American system of political and economic security but a new world order." - -- Part of article in the New York Times (November 1975)

"Further global progress is now possible only through a quest for universal consensus in the movement towards a new world order." - -- Mikhail Gorbachev, in an address at the United Nations during December 1988

"We believe we are creating the beginning of a new world order coming out of the collapse of the U.S.-Soviet antagonisms." - -- Brent Scowcroft (August 1990), quoted in the Washington Post (May 1991)

"We can see beyond the present shadows of war in the Middle East to a new world order where the strong work together to deter and stop aggression." - -- Richard Gephardt, in the Wall Street Journal (September 1990)

"If we do not follow the dictates of our inner moral compass and stand up for human life, then his lawlessness will threaten the peace and democracy of the emerging new world order we now see, this long dreamed-of vision we've all worked toward for so long." - -- President George Bush speaking of Saddam Hussein (January 1991).

"The world can therefore seize the opportunity [Persian Gulf crisis] to fulfil the long-held promise of a New World Order where diverse nations are drawn together in common cause to achieve the universal aspirations of mankind." - -- President George Bush, 1991

119

"But it became clear as time went on that in Mr. Bush's mind the New World Order was founded on a convergence of goals and interests between the U.S. and the Soviet Union, so strong and permanent that they would work as a team through the U.N. Security Council." - -- Excerpt from A. M. Rosenthal, (New York Times, January 1991)

"I would support a Presidential candidate who pledged to take the following steps: ... At the end of the war in the Persian Gulf, press for a comprehensive Middle East settlement and for a 'new world order' based not on Pax Americana but on peace through law with a stronger U.N. and World Court." - -- George McGovern, in the New York Times (February 1991)

"How I Learned to Love the New World Order" - -- Article by Sen. Joseph R. Biden, Jr. in the Wall Street Journal (April 1992)

"The Final Act of the Uruguay Round, marking the conclusion of the most ambitious trade negotiation of our century, will give birth - in Morocco - to the World Trade Organization, the third pillar of the New World Order, along with the United Nations and the International Monetary Fund."

-- Part of full-page advertisement by the government of Morocco in the New York Times (April 1994) - "New World Order: The Rise of the Region-State"

-- Title of article by Kenichi Ohmae, political reform leader in Japan, in the Wall Street Journal (August 1994)

The "new world order that is in the making must focus on the creation of a world of democracy, peace and prosperity for all." - -- Nelson Mandela, in the Philadelphia Inquirer (October 1994)

120

The renewal of the non - proliferation treaty was described as important "for the welfare of the whole world and the new world order."

-- President Hosni Mubarak of Egypt, in the New York Times (April 1995)

"We are not going to achieve a new world order without paying for it in blood as well as in words and money."

-- Arthur Schlesinger, Jr., in Foreign Affairs (July/August 1995)

121

Brave New Schools Chapter 2

The International Agenda

"A major goal...should be... to organize a worldwide education program... In the process, we should actively search for ways to promote a new way of thinking about the current relationship between human civilization and the earth." Al Gore, The Earth in the Balance

"The basic goal of education is change -- human change...."Harold Drummon, former president of the Association for Supervision and Curriculum Develop- ment (ASCD)

"Enlightened social engineering is required to face situations that demand global action now... Parents and the general public must be reached also, otherwise, children and youth enrolled in globally oriented programs may find themselves in conflict with values assumed in the home. And then the educational institution frequently comes under scrutiny and must pull back." Professor John Goodlad, Foreword in Schooling for A Global Age

"We can't teach that only America is good," said Seema Desai, a tenth-grader who moved from India to Florida in 1993. "That would hurt my feelings."

Seema had joined an impassioned war--led by the local teachers' union-- against three Lake County school board members who wanted Florida schools to emphasize America's unique merits. Seeking to overturn a requirement that would "indoctrinate" students with the intolerable old-paradigm notion that America is best, the union had sued the school board.

Such ethnocentric teaching, it argued, emphasizes one culture over another. Therefore it breaks a state law that requires multicultural education.

122

Did you know that multiculturalism ruled out loyalty to our country? I didn't. Like most parents, I believed that multicultural education simply helps students understand other cultures and people. In reality, it trains students to view the world and its people from a global and pantheistic perspective rather than from a national and Judeo-Christian perspective. In other words, it is designed to speed the paradigm shift--the current transformation toward a radical new way of thinking, believing, and relating to "our global family."

This paradigm shift is supposed to prepare students for life in the 21st century "global village," the envisioned worldwide community of people joined together through high-tech superhighways and a common set of values. To mould world-class students, social engineers are testing the latest techniques in behaviour modification on our children. As you will see in coming chapters, children must either reject their old home-taught faith or stretch it far beyond biblical boundaries to include the world's pantheistic, polytheistic belief systems.

"Multicultural education...strives to integrate multi ethnic and global perspectives," wrote Christine Bennet in Comprehensive Multicultural Education, a popular textbook for student teachers. Its goal is not to teach factual history, but to "challenge [the student's] cultural assumptions" and mould global citizens with an "emotional commitment to the fundamental unity of all humans...."

In other words, a new commitment to universal oneness must supersede commitments to God and country. While grandiose dreams of global unity reach back to the beginning of history, it was more recently documented in 1973 by the authors of the Humanist Manifesto II. They wrote, "We deplore the division of human-kind on nationalistic grounds. We have reached a turning point in human history where the best option is to transcend the limits of national sovereignty and to move toward the building of a world community...."

123

Professor Philip Vander Velde, who taught "Foundations of Education" at Western Washington University, authored the book, Global Mandate: Pedagogy for Peace. Reflecting the views of countless other change agents, he wrote,

"...unless a new faith... overcomes the old ideologies and creates planetary synthesis, world government is doomed.... Nation-states have outlived their usefulness, and a new world order is necessary if we are to live in harmony with each other... The task of reordering our traditional values and institutions should be one of the major educational objectives of our schools."

These revolutionary beliefs didn't originate with Vander Velde. When he penned these chilling words in 1985, his book merely articulated a transformation that was already well under way. Since then, this philosophy has permeated curriculum and teaching strategies from coast to coast.

Today's history lessons are designed to reflect and fuel the paradigm shift. Alarmed parents in every state report that they do. "My son told me that he had seen some videos in his high school history class," said Pam Hoffecker, a Pennsylvania mother and co-author of Outcome-Based Education. "One of the videos, The Columbus Controversy, gave a politically correct view of Christopher Columbus. The other, The Puritan Experience, was about a girl who disobeys her parents, skips church, and helps the Indians. It showed that a formal religion like Christianity is bad, but disrespect toward traditional authority is good."

Pam borrowed the whole series from the school. Later, she summarized what she had seen in a telephone conversation:

"When I looked at the video about Columbus, I was very upset. It began with a teacher grabbing a purse from a student's desk, saying 'This is my purse. I didn't steal Samantha's purse. I discovered this purse.' Columbus was presented as an anti-hero who sought gold and slaves, brought genocide to the indigenous, and should be ridiculed.

124

It never mentioned that the supposedly peace loving Carob Indians owned slaves and would fatten, castrate and eat male babies in cannibalistic rituals. True, the European immigrants did exploit Indians, but there are two sides to the story...."

Let me read you an assignment from the pamphlet that came with the video. "Have students choose one of these consequences and explain how it was--or was not--caused by the Spanish Conquest of the Americas that Columbus initiated." All choices would lead students to emphasize social injustice from a revisionist perspective. Listen to the topics: The triumph of capitalism, The genocide of the indigenous, The slavery of people of colour, The colonization of the world, The destruction of the primal environment, and The impending catastrophe of ecocide of the planet Earth."

As Pam told her story, I shared her sadness at the growing hatred for a culture that has offered security, freedom and peace to millions of people from around the world. Her son, Timothy, had heard the missing facts from his parents, but most children who learn history from the new-paradigm perspective will never know why America was called the land of the free.

One thing is certain; the 1994 National Standards for American History would not provide the needed balance. That the newly elected conservative U.S. Senate refused to approve them, made little difference. Long before those standards were discussed in public, they had become the unofficial standards in our tax-funded regional educational laboratories, in curriculum guidelines, and in our public schools. In fact, Gary Nash, who authored our nation's most popular social studies text in the early nineties, led the panel that wrote the official History Standards. Ponder his attitude toward Western culture.

Rewriting history to fit the global paradigm. "Imagine an outline for the teaching of American history in which George Washington makes only a fleeting appearance and is never described as our first president," suggested Lynne Cheney, former chairman of the National Endowment for the Humanities.

125

"Or in which the founding of the Sierra Club and the National Organization for Women are considered noteworthy events, but the first gathering of the U.S. Congress is not... This is, in fact, the version of history set forth in the soon-to- be released National Standards for United States History." She continued:

"...not a single one of the 31 standards mentions the Constitution. True, it does come up in the 250 pages of supporting materials. It is even described as "the culmination of the most creative era of constitutionalism in American history"- -but only in the dependent clause of a sentence that has as its main point that students should "ponder the paradox that the Constitution side tracked the movement to abolish slavery...."

"African and Native American societies, like all societies, had their failings, but one would hardly know it from the National Standards. Students are encouraged to consider Aztec "architecture, skills, labour systems and agriculture." But not the practice of human sacrifice....

"What went wrong? ... According to [an unnamed member of the panel], those who were "pursuing the revisionist agenda" no longer bothered to conceal their "great hatred for traditional history."

Gary Nash represents the academic bureaucracy charged with training America's youth. His debate with Lynne Cheney on the MacNeil/Lehrer News Hour on October 26, 1994, highlights the two opposing paradigms in American culture.

[Cheney] "There is very little sense here of our nation's greatness, of our progress... It is a very grim and gloomy picture of the American past... You don't find Robert E. Lee... Thomas Edison and many other people who have the misfortune to have been born white males."

[Nash] "The hundreds of teachers, and the hundreds of historians from every part of the country who were collaborators and co-authors of this document would truly disagree that this is a gloomy dark picture.... We do not top up lists of names for students to absorb, in fact to memorize and attach to dates....

126

[Cheney] "We are asked to look at King Mansa Musa, an African king, and to admire his wealth. The point is that we don't hold everyone to the same standard. When we look at a phenomenon in another country we say, "Oh that was wonderful..." when we look at it in this country, it becomes an object of derision....

[Nash] "There are hundreds and thousands of people who have reviewed this book, who have never raised that objection. We have sent out over six thousand copies of five drafts of this book for review to every corner of this country. And this is the first criticism of this sort...

[Cheney] "The fact that Mr. Nash didn't receive a lot criticism, perhaps speaks for the state of history.... "

She is right. America's perception of the past has changed. Not only do recent social studies texts bring shame and anger, they drive wedge between parents and children. Poll after poll show that the majority of adult Americans still believe in God and appreciate the nation He established. But their children are taught that the Judeo-Christian values have failed us; now it's time to seek discard the old stories and find "new" models in the world's earth-centred cultures.

Contrary to revisionist rhetoric, the facts of history prove both America's uniqueness. For over two centuries, our nation offered shelter and freedom to the world's oppressed people. It built schools and hospitals in needy nations that showed no concern for their own poor. It demonstrated a compassion toward far-away tribes that was unthinkable in earth-centred cultures. Yet, the very cultures that abandoned their poor to karmic laws and their enemies to cruel tortures have become classroom models for unity and tolerance. It makes no sense!

127

It doesn't have to make sense. The next chapter will show you that facts and reason have been tossed out along with history. Today's politicized curriculum undermines nationalism, discredits the "obsolete" traditions of capitalism and national sovereignty, and transfers children's loyalties from America to a utopian global welfare state.

From personal freedom to global oneness. While Gary Nash and his panel of historians were rewriting American history, others were gathering worldwide support for an international education system. "Increasing numbers of educators, particularly those in leadership roles, have moved toward cross- national educational concerns," wrote Professor John I. Goodlad in Schooling for a Global Age, funded by powerful globalist foundations such as the Danforth and Rockefeller Foundations as well as the U.S. Department of Education. Their common goal was "the preparation of better persons for a better world." Around the earth, they would teach their students the same basic "global or humankind" beliefs using the same psychological strategies. If they could inspire all children with a common vision of a planet without national boundaries, the battle for global governance would be won.

They have come a long way. As if pulled by invisible strings, teachers around the world were introducing the same kind of psycho-social curriculum designed to reprogram children's minds until their beliefs and attitudes conform to global ideals. A report in the American Sociological Review summarized their global progress. It found that "primary-school curricula have become remarkably similar around the world, reflecting the increasing global dominance of a single concept of modern society."

How did it happen? The chronology in Part 2 traces the steps back to 1919, but in this section we'll begin in November 1985. Leading educators from 12 nations had gathered in the Netherlands for an international-curriculum symposium. One of the sponsors was the ASCD (Association for Supervision and Curriculum Development), the influential curriculum arm of the powerful NEA (National Education Association). Naturally, its executive director, Dr. Gordon Cawelti, was one of the main speakers.

128

According to Education Week, Dr. Cawelti "urged representatives of other Western nations and Japan to press for the development of a 'world-core curriculum' based on knowledge that will ensure 'peaceful and cooperative existence among the human species on this planet'."

Knowledge that would ensure peace and cooperation? What kind of knowledge would that be?

Education Week explained: "Cawelti's world-core curriculum would be based... on proposals put forth by Robert Muller, assistant secretary-general of the United Nations, in his recent book New Genesis: Shaping a Global Spirituality."

Do you wonder what kind of "global spirituality" that might be? The following Theosophical statement from Muller's book offers a clue:

"Once again, but this time on a universal scale, humankind is seeking no less than its reunion with the "divine," its transcendence into ever higher forms of life. Hindus call our earth Brahma, or God, for they rightly see no difference between our earth and the divine. This ancient simple truth is slowly dawning again upon humanity. Its full flowering be the real, great new story of humanity as we are about to enter our cosmic age...."

After the symposium, Cawelti expressed his appreciation for the positive response to his suggestion. Despite "the pride all countries have in their own core curriculum," he said, all shared a common response "to urgency of defining what global interdependency means for the schools."

Since the ASCD so heartily endorsed Muller's World Core Curriculum, how have Muller's ideas influenced our schools? The answer will help us understand the seductive pull of holistic education, which, like holistic medicine, has suddenly won mainstream support. It provides globalists with the spiritual link needed for a plausible vision of a united world, of connectedness with nature, and of the oneness of the human family around the world.

129

This is no trivial fringe vision. The much-acclaimed Chech President Vaclav Havel, who joined Michael Gorbachev and other world leaders in San Fran- cisco for the 1995 anniversary celebration of the U.N. Charter, shared the same dream in a speech in Philadelphia on July 4, 1994, when he was awarded the Philadelphia Liberty Medal.

Compare his words with those of Robert Muller:

"The central political task of the final years of this century, then, is the creation of a new model of coexistence within a single interconnected civilization.... The only real hope for people today is probably a renewal of our certainty that we are rooted in the Earth, and at the same time in the cosmos. This awareness endows us with the capacity for self- transcendence.... Transcendence is the only real alternative to extinction.

Theosophy, Robert Muller and his World Core Curriculum.

During a visit to Arlington, Texas, some years ago, a friend took me to see the original Robert Muller school. While she waited in the car, I walked past a little Buddha, climbed the steps to the front door, and rang the bell. Gloria Crook, the Director opened the door and asked why I had come. I listed my credentials: I was interested in global education, was concerned about the environment, and was an immigrant from Norway -- a country well known for its global concerns and admiration for the United Nations.

I must have passed the test, because she invited me in and led me into a massive hallway. Looking to the left, I saw a room full of young mothers and pregnant women in yoga position. On a table next to the doorway, I noticed a stack of papers. The title startled me: "Occult Meditation."

To those who don't know God, the occult seems good, not bad, I thought to myself.

"Are you familiar with Alice Bailey?" she asked me as we entered a large cluttered office.

130

"Yes." I nodded, well aware of her links to Theosophy and the occult messages she channelled from her favourite spirit guide. "Didn't she write books full of messages she received from the Tibetan Master, Djwhal Khul?"

"Yes," answered Ms Crook. "Here, sit down and look at some of them." She pulled down several of Bailey's books from a shelf and put them in my lap. I silently thanked God for His spiritual protection as I flipped through the pages of the first one, Education in the New Age.

Then she handed me the Robert Muller World Core Curriculum al. I turned a few pages and read,

"The underlying philosophy upon which the Robert Muller School is based will be found in the teaching set forth in the books of Alice A. Bailey by the Tibetan teacher, Djwhal Khul ...."

The back of the manual contained two certificates. The first announced that The Robert Muller School "is a participating institution in the UNESCO Associated Schools Project in Education for International Co-operation and Peace." The other confirmed its accreditation by the Southern Association of Colleges and Schools. On behalf of the Southern Association's review team, Dr. Eileen Lynch wrote,

"The visiting team... was so impressed with the Robert Muller School that they thought the educational process and the general curriculum would be most valuable as a model for teacher education... Throughout this report the committee has recommended that information of the school's educational processes be shared with educators everywhere as much as possible." (Emphasis added)

Finally Ms Crook pulled two large golden frames from the wall and showed them to me. I shivered when I looked at the first. It pictured a beautiful calligraphies rendition of "The Great Invocation," an occult prayer used around the world to invoke a global outpouring of spiritual light and power.

131

The other frame displayed a letter from the White House. President Bush had sent his greetings and appreciation for the contributions made by the school. Did the former president know whom he had endorsed?

Whether Bush knew Muller or not, the former U.N. leader is no stranger to the educational establishment. You saw that back in 1985, Muller's vision of a World Core Curriculum, as outlined in his book New Genesis: Shaping a Global Spirituality, was endorsed by the powerful ASCD and recommended to enthusiastic educators at an international curriculum symposium. Two years later, it was promoted by Andy LePage in his well-endorsed book on holistic learning, Transforming Education. In the nineties, it is spreading into local school districts.

For example, Eugene, Oregon, School District 4J developed and published its "Integrated Curriculum K-5" in 1989. Page eleven in this public school curriculum acknowledges that "The three curriculum strands are adapted from the World Core Curriculum by Robert Muller...." The three curriculum strands match those in Muller's book: "Oneness with the planet," "Unity with people," and "Harmony with self." Muller's fourth strand, which deals with evolution through time, is incorporated into the other three strands. In New Genesis: Muller pulls the strands together into one utopian vision:

"The ecumenical teachings of the Christ [not the Biblical Jesus] - peace, justice, love, compassion, kindness, human brotherhood... must also find their way in world-wide global education. We must give the newcomers into the ceaseless renewed stream of human life the right education about their planetary home, about their human family, about their past, present and future, about their place in the universe and in time, so that they can flower to their utmost beauty - physically, mentally and spiritually - and become joyful and grateful members of the universe or kingdom of God."

Muller's vision can be seen at a glance in two diagrams for "Defining World Class Education" designed by the Iowa Department of Education. The first diagram, called "The Old Story: Conventional Wisdom" shows an oval picture of the earth with its land and oceans.

132

The globe is surrounded by arrows pointing toward the centre and bombarding the planet with terrors like "Domination," "Biocide," "Ecocide," "Earth is Man's to Exploit," "WAR," "Intercultural Conflicts," and "Boundaries."

The second diagram shows students "the right education about their planetary home." It pictures a rounder, more mystical planet. Titled "The New Story: Transformation," it shows arrows radiating out from the earth. Here the descriptions reflect the vision of a healthy harmonious planet: "Beyond War," "Humanity Evolving," "Reverence for all Life," "Interconnectedness; we are All One," and "Gaia"--a spiritualized Earth renamed after an ancient Greek goddess.

This mystical teaching tool was fabricated by tax-funded educators, not fringe fanatical. The paradigm shift it promotes has gained enough acceptances to be established in local classrooms as well at global symposiums. Listen to the message in "The Peacemakers Planetary Anthem" sung to the melody of the Star Spangled Banner during an assembly at an elementary school in Sunnyvale, California. Encouraging children to imagine a peaceful planet with pristine forests and crystal-clear rivers, it begins with this millennial view:

O say can you see - by the one light in all - A New Age to embrace - at the call of the nations....

Now compare the Iowa chart and the California song to Muller's vision of a world united through global education and evolving spiritually toward ultimate perfection:

"We need a new world education. Global education, namely the education of the children into our global home and into the human family, is making good progress. But we have to go beyond. We need the cosmic education foreseen by the religions and by people like Maria Montessori. We need a holistic education, teaching the holism of the universe and of the planet...."

133

Muller didn't mention Waldorf Schools, but they fit right in. Their founder, Ru- dolf Steiner (1861-1925), shared Alice Bailey's occult roots in Theosophy, but broke away to start his own cult, Anthroposophy, which he described as "knowledge produced by the higher self in man." Like the Robert Muller schools, Waldorf schools offer holistic education and have long used the strategies now implemented in all states through Mastery Learning: whole language instead of phonics, stories and "literature" instead of factual history, and a strong emphasis on myth, imagination, guided imagery, art, creativity, movement (Steiner's founded eurhythmy: movement as art), and spiritual oneness with nature.

Global Education is still Muller's driving ambition. His main headquarters are now in Costa Rica where he serves as Chancellor of the University of Peace, which is sponsored by the United Nations as a model for education in the 21st Century.

In 1989, UNESCO (United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization) awarded him its Peace Education Prize. In his acceptance speech, Muller shared his vision of the new world education program. Part of his dream was...

 "That all schools and universities of this Earth will teach peace and non- violence and become schools and universities for peace;

 "That UNESCO will study and recommend by the year 2000 a world core curriculum for adoption by all nations;

 "That all human beings of this earth become instruments of peace, thus fulfilling the cosmic function deeply engraved in each of us...

By the time Muller shared this vision, the world had already made a giant leap toward fulfilling it.

The World Conference on Education for All (WCEFA). When UNESCO convened a conference that drew delegates from 155 countries to Jomtien, Thailand, in 1990 to plan the international agenda for education, Muller's heart must have been singing.

134

His vision for world education was nearing reality. Within five days in early March, the world's leaders reached consensus on six international goals. Like the six U.S. goals prepared by the Bush administration (America 2000) and later adopted by the Clinton administration (Goals 2000 added two goals ), the international goals call for implementation by year 2000.

Notice the similarities between the two sets of goals:

NATIONAL GOALS GLOBAL GOALS America 2000 and Goals World Conference Education For All 2000

"Expansion of early childhood care "By the year 2000, all chil- and developmental activities, includ- 1: Readiness for school dren in America will start ing family and community interven- school ready to learn." tions...."

"Universal access to, and completion "By the year 2000, the high 2: Certificate of Initial Mas- of, primary education (or whatever school graduation rate will tery? higher level...each country considers increase to at least 90%." as "basic")...."

"By the year 2000, Ameri- "Improvement in learning achieve- can students will leave ment at all grade levels... an agreed 3: Achievement, citizenship grades four, eight and percentage attains or surpassed a twelve having demonstrat- defined level...." ed competency...."

"By the year 2000, U.S. "Reduction of the adult illiteracy students will be first in the rate to at least one-half its 1990 lev- 4: Science, Math and Reading world in science and math- el by the year 2000, with sufficient ematics." emphasis on female literacy...."

"...basic education and training in "By the year 2000, every other essential skills... program ef- adult American will be lit- fectiveness assessed in terms of be- 5: Adult literacy and lifelong erate and will possess the havioural changes and impacts on learning knowledge and health, employment and productivi- skills necessary to compete ty." in a global economy...."

135

"...the knowledge, skills and values "By the year 2000, every required for better living and sound school in America will be and sustainable development... 6: Behaviour modification for free of drugs and violence through all education channels in- safe, drug-free schools and will offer a disciplined cluding the mass media...and social environment conducive to action, with effectiveness assessed learning." in terms of behavioural change."

These goals were designed to inspire a common vision and draw a ground- swell of support. They must appeal to the public, but hide their true purpose. For example, the first international goal, "expansion of early childhood care... is including family and community intervention," sounds good to tired, frustrated parents who would welcome community support. Few realize that this goal set the stage for "parent educators" or other school-based authorities to intervene when parents don't follow their new-paradigm guidelines. If you find that hard to believe, I trust that the rest of this book will convince you.

One of the crucial documents prepared at the 1990 WCEFA was "The Framework for Action to Meet Basic Learning Needs." It describes three levels of action:

1. Direct action within individual countries

2. Co-operation among groups of countries

3. Multilateral and bilateral cooperation in the world community

To bridge the gap between domestic and international education, educators and politicians formed a U.S. branch of the WCEFA. Called the United States Coalition for Education for All (USCEFA), it first met in Virginia in 1991 with Barbara Bush as its Honorary Chairwoman. For three days, nearly 300 leaders from over 28 countries "worked together to find ways to build stronger partnerships...."

136

The USCEFA partnerships include all kinds of educational organizations, universities, international business and media groups as well as local teachers and principals. Some of the links are familiar: the National Education Association, the National Centre for Education Statistics, Apple Computer, Encyclopaedia Britannica Education Corporation, and [Ted] Turner Educational Services. The religious partners include World Vision and The Baha'i Foundation.

These partnerships between governmental and non-governmental groups are essential to the network of support on every level: local, state, national and global. Chapter 7 will explain more about this deceptive strategy--and show how mainstream churches have been lured into partnerships designed to weaken the very families they serve.

The USCEFA met again in December, 1994. To set the stage, it prepared a report with some familiar guidelines. They turned out to be the same ones that are being promoted in local communities across America: lifelong learning, partnerships, communication technologies....

These "innovations can be used creatively to bring about change from the local to the international levels," the report explained. They must be implemented in one package, not piecemeal. After all, education is "the key mechanism for attaining a global society that is peaceful and just, and provides a decent living for all its present and future citizens."

Few would disagree with such noble goals. The problem is their solution. Later, you will see that the new path to peace mapped out by leading educators looks more like the mystical steps to occult oneness described in James Redfield's top-selling Celestine Prophecy than anything the Western world has ever seen.

The following USCEFA standard sounds strangely similar to the 1995 state standards written to conform to national standards:

137

"Schools will need to reach learners as never before, developing responsibility for learning, encouraging self-esteem and motivation, stimulating curiosity and emotions, concentrating on higher order [thinking] skills and instructing people how to work together."

The next chapter will show you what these new-paradigm euphemism actually mean...

 Trading facts for imagination so that children cannot think or reason independently

 Teaching occult formulas for empowerment to help students feel good about themselves and school--at least for a while

 Daily lessons in group conformity to quench individual choices

 Using cooperative learning so that all will progress to the same mediocre level.

This kind of "Education for All" leads to global socialism, not to the kind of freedom the American republic has offered its people from around the world. It breeds intolerance and religious persecution, not respect and religious freedom. It produces a pliable workforce that can easily be manipulated, not individuals who stay true to their conscience. It follows the blueprint of Soviet indoctrination, which should come as no surprise considering the secretive Soviet-American educational exchange agreements led by the Carnegie Foundation during the eighties. It aims to destroy everything that Americans once called "good."

Listen to this warning from Dr. Thomas Sowell, Senior Fellow at Stanford University's Hoover Institution. In his review of Friedrich Hayek's expose of socialism, Road to Serfdom, he writes,

"At the heart of the socialist vision is the notion that a compassionate society can create more humane living conditions for all through government 'planning' and control of the economy....

138

"The rule of law, on which freedom itself ultimately depends, is inherently incompatible with socialism. People who are free to do as they wish will not do as the economic planners wish. Differences in values and priories are enough to ensure that.

These differences must be ironed out by propaganda or power, if socialism is to be socialism. Indoctrination must be part of the program, not because socialist want to be brainwashers, but because socialism requires brainwashing.

"Idealist socialist create systems in which idealist are almost certain to lose and be superseded by those whose drive for power, and ruthlessness in achieving it, make them the 'fittest' to survive under a system where government power is the ultimate prize.... The issue is not what anyone intends but what consequences are in fact likely to follow."

In this article, aptly titled "A Road to Hell Paved with Good Intentions," Sowell points out that "Marxism as an ideal continues to flourish on American college campuses, as perhaps nowhere else in the world." Collectivist visions appeal to academic idealists and others who ignore the lessons of history.

Others know well what communism proved: that central controls lead to tyranny and poverty, not peace and equality. Yet, our lawmakers continue to pave the path to lifelong management of our children while raising the promise of "local control" as a smokescreen to pacify concerned parents. Chapter 7 explains how the planned "community" will heed state, national, and global directives, not local parents.

The goal of education is no longer to teach the kind of literacy, wisdom and knowledge we once considered essentials of responsible citizenship. It is to train world citizens--a compliant international workforce, willing to flow with the storms of change and uncertainty. These citizens must be ready to believe and do whatever will serve a pre-determined "common good" or "greater whole".

139

Educators may promise to "teach students to think for themselves," but if they finish what they have started, tomorrow's students will have neither the facts nor the freedom needed for independent thinking. Like Nazi youth, they will be taught to react, not to think, when told to do the unthinkable.

In another excellent article titled "Indoctrinating the Children," Dr. Thomas Sowell, summarized the process:

"The techniques of brainwashing developed in totalitarian countries are routinely used in psychological conditioning programs imposed on American school children. These include emotional shock and desensitization, psychological isolation from sources of support, stripping away defences, manipulative cross-examination of the individual's underlying moral values, and inducing acceptance of alternative values by psychological rather than rational means.”

The next two chapters will show how this is happening--even in your community.

Meanwhile, don't despair. You just made it through the heaviest part of the book and the next section will lighten up. If you feel overwhelmed by the globalist agenda, know that hopeful answers are coming. Remember, when we know the truth, stand together, trust God and do what He says, we join the winning team. "Thanks are to God, who leads us in His triumph...."

140

Moulding the The UN Plan for Your Mental Health Minds of the by Berit Kjos - 1999 (Updated November 2014) Masses

"We believe that mental health is just as important as physical health maybe even more so."5 Donna Shalala, former Secretary of the Department of Health and Human Services

"Mental health refers to how a person thinks, feels, and acts when faced with life's situations." National Mental Health Services Knowledge Exchange Network [link now obsolete]

"The challenge to humanity is to adopt new ways of thinking, new ways of acting, new ways of organizing itself in society in short, new ways of living."20 Our Creative Diversity, UNESCO

Don't be deceived by nice sounding labels such as Healthy Start, Healthy People, Healthy Families, Healthy Communities, and Healthy Cities. These and other "local" campaigns for public and mental health follow a global blueprint. They all fit into a worldwide system of "health management" and surveillance led by the World Health Organization, a UN special agency that equates faith with hate and truth with intolerance.1 the goal is conditioning the masses to willingly conform to new "universal" values, environmental guidelines, and a global management system.

141

Dr. David Satcher, U.S. Surgeon-General and Assistant Secretary for Health, gave a progress report at a National Healthy People Consortium in November 1998: "We have a clear blueprint in place," he announced. "Currently, 47 states are actively involved in Healthy People 2000 and 'Healthy City and Healthy Community' initiatives are being pursued throughout the country. Hundreds of national organizations have reviewed the Year 2000 objectives and have adopted them as their own."

Dr. Satcher then drew the connection between Healthy Start, Healthy People, mental health and the World Health Organization:

"Every child should be given the opportunity for a healthy start... No priority yet has generated as much interest and enthusiasm as this one on mental health..." "...our efforts will be focused on maintaining a system of global health surveillance...

"Healthy People 2010 is the United States' contribution to the World Health Organization's call to the nations of the world to renew their commitment to health for all."

A NEW WAY OF THINKING

In a 1996 speech at The National Children's Mental Health Initiative, Donna Shalala, Secretary of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS), said,

"From fully immunizing children by age two... to stopping domestic violence, we're working to improve the lives of young people from the cradle to young adulthood. And a strong part of our vision is the mental health of children. We believe that mental health is just as important as physical health ...maybe even more so..."

As head of the DHHS, Shalala helped organize The National Mental Health Services Knowledge Exchange Network (KEN). Ponder its definition for mental health:

142

"Mental health refers to how a person thinks, feels, and acts when faced with life's situations. It is how people look at themselves, their lives, and the other people in their lives ...and explore choices."

Do you wonder what Dr. Shalala and her network of health planners would consider good thinking? Or bad thinking? This definition doesn't tell us. How do they want people "to look at themselves" or "explore choices"? The answer is clear when you study UNESCO's psycho-social strategies for conforming the minds of our children to its anti-Christian world view. But without background information, these ambiguous, open-ended phrases hide the true intentions.

However, Dr. Shalala and other self-proclaimed "change agents" do tell us that the old ways "a person thinks, feels, and acts" must change. They don't fit the new global ideology or the consensus process. According to Professor Benjamin Bloom, called the Father of OBE, the new "purpose of education and the schools is to change the thoughts, feelings and actions of students."

So it's not surprising that UNESCO's Commission on Culture and Development in its report, Our Creative Diversity, wrote that -

"The challenge to humanity is to adopt new ways of thinking, new ways of acting, new ways of organizing itself in society, in short, new ways of living."

Referring to the management and monitoring of its education program, the Kansas State Board of Education made a similar statement, "QPA [Quality Performance Accreditation] is a process which demands new thinking, new strategies, new behaviour, and new beliefs."

"New beliefs" and "new thinking" are key to the global management system. Adults as well as children must trade truth, facts, and logical thinking for myths, UN values, and the consensus process. The masses must learn to see themselves, not as individuals, but as part of a greater whole: a group, a community, the planet. Finally, the United Nations is nearing its goal: to create a unified, socialist world made up of compliant world citizens ready to adapt to what Al Gore called "a wrenching transformation of society."

143

THE WORLD HEALTH ORGANIZATION (WHO)

In 1946, the first head of WHO laid the foundation for today's mental health program. Having implied that Christian parents indoctrinated "their defenceless children" with "poisonous certainties" that cause war and conflict, Canadian psychiatrist Brock Chisholm, added,

"The problem is no longer the germ of diphtheria, but rather the attitudes of parents who are incapable of accepting and using proven knowledge...

"Surely the training of children in home and schools should be of at least as great public concern as their vaccination.... Individuals who have emotional disabilities of their own--guilt’s, fears, inferiorities--are certain to project their hates on to others... such reaction now becomes a dangerous threat to the whole world....

"We must be prepared to sacrifice much.... If it cannot be done gently, it may have to be done roughly or even violently..."

Half a century has passed since Dr. Chisholm called for UN controls that would abolish divisive Christian "certainties". Today, WHO commands an international networking agency that helps nations around the world change and monitor the ways their people think, choose, and act. Called Nations for Mental Health, it links each member state to the UN agenda and promises to steer each nation toward the UN goal:

"Governments will be assisted to formulate, implement, monitor and evaluate mental health policies.

"Mental health policies should enable all individuals whose mental health is disturbed or whose psychological balance may be compromised to obtain services adapted to their needs, and to promote the optimal development of the mental health of the population."

144

To develop "the mental health of the population" and to prevent dissent and conflict from blocking progress, everyone must participate in the consensus process. Assessments for all -- young and old -- will show who might be "at risk" of not meeting the new mental standards for healthy communities.

For a glimpse at the vast network already in place, look at some of the mental health partners in the WHO agenda:

 World Health Organization (WHO)

 Nations for Mental Health

 Dept. of Health and Human Services

 National Mental Health Services Knowledge Exchange Network (KEN)

 Healthy Cities

 Healthy Communities

 Healthy Families

 Healthy People

 Healthy Start

Children, in private as well as government schools, practice compliance by signing the Healthy Practices Pledge. It sounds innocuous at first -- just promise to "brush with fluoride toothpaste," choose "snacks such as fruits and vegetables," and "make our home a smoke-free zone," then sign the pledge. But the contract is open-ended. It suggests that other "healthy" behaviours will be added later. What if the next contract adds "cooperation with" and "tolerance for" something that conflicts with a child's faith? What if a refusal to sign the contract brings ridicule and persecution? Is your child ready to follow God, even when pressured to conform?

145

HEALTHY CITIES AND COMMUNITIES

The Healthy Cities project was launched by WHO in the early eighties. Its web site explains its purpose: "The Healthy Cities Project helps change the ways in which individuals, communities, private and voluntary organizations and local governments think about, understand and make decisions about health."

Today, its guidelines are followed by leaders across America -- whether they use the label "Healthy City" or not. Remember Dr. Satcher's report at the 1998 Healthy People Consortium:

"'Healthy City and Healthy Community' initiatives are being pursued throughout the country. Hundreds of national organizations... have [adopted] the Year 2000 objectives... Healthy People 2010 is the United States' contribution to the World Health Organization's call to the nations of the world to renew their commitment to health for all.

It's no accident that the last three words, "health for all," sound like UNESCO's 1990 World Conference on “Education for All” (EFA). The latter introduced the same six education goals President Bush announced in 1991. EFA's counterpart in the health arena is WHO's Health for All (HFA). And, like Goals 2000, the US branch of UNESCO's outcome-based education system, "a Healthy City is defined in terms of process and outcome."

WHO's Healthy Cities program works with America's Coalition for Healthier Cities and Communities, whose members may or may not use the WHO labels. But they must all follow the Total Quality Management process which calls for continual monitoring of change and progress. They must also agree to:

 "measure our progress. "

 "address the root causes of problems."

 "promote a broader definition of health that includes physical, mental, social, and spiritual dimensions."

 "focus on prevention, wellness and change incentives."

146

PREVENTING CONFLICT AND MENTAL PROBLEMS

The key to prevention is continual and controlled training, monitoring, and remediation. As Clinton suggested at the 1997 White House Conference on Hate Crimes,

"There would almost have to be some sort of club or organization at the school, because if you think about it, your parents are still pretty well separated ... We have to find a disciplined, organized way out of this so that we reach every child in an affirmative way before something bad happens."

In the UN plan for Healthy Cities, prevention becomes a personal duty. Since the group counts more than the person, friends and neighbours would be asked to report on one another -- just as in Nazi Germany.

"I challenge our young people to realize their important role in this seamless system," said Donna Shalala. "Many times, you as friends are the strongest link in the chain of contact. You know best when your brother, your sister or your friend is facing problems..."

President Clinton suggested the same tactic during the above hate-crimes conference: "The Justice Department will make its own hate crimes training curriculum available. A lot of hate crimes still go unreported... If a crime is unreported, that gives people an excuse to ignore it." Then he announced a Justice Department website which invites children to tell "trusted adults" about "hateful" or exclusive attitudes they see in their relatives at home or in friends in school.

Hard to believe? It all makes sense when you consider the United Nations' hostility toward traditional values. Ponder the words of Federico Mayor, Director-General of UNESCO:

"The mission of UNESCO... is that of advancing... international peace and the common welfare... We have witnessed... the resurgence of nationalism, the growth of fundamentalism and of religious and ethnic intolerance.

147

The roots of exclusion and hatred have shown themselves even deeper and more tenacious than we had feared... Peace... requires, in the words of the Constitution, 'the intellectual and moral solidarity of mankind'."

MOLDING THE MINDS OF THE MASSES

Children who refuse to conform may be considered handicapped. According to a Teacher Training Manual from the National Training Institute for Applied behavioural Science,

"Although they appear to behave appropriately and seem normal by most cultural standards, they may actually be in need of mental health care in order to help them change, adapt, and conform to the planned society in which there will be no conflict of attitudes or beliefs."

Conflict must be replaced with solidarity, and -- as in the USSR -- everyone must be monitored for compliance with the new global beliefs and values. Such a surveillance system is at the heart of President Clinton's Executive Order 13107 (See "Trading U.S. Rights for UN Rules." It establishes "an Interagency Working Group on Human Rights Treaties", and its functions include:

 the monitoring of the actions by the various States for their conformity with relevant treaties,

 the provision of relevant information for reports and other monitoring purposes, and

 the promotion of effective remedial mechanisms;"

Monitoring the progress of mental Health for All (HFA) is essential to the process of managed change. Non-compliance or dissent must be spotted, reported, and corrected before it spreads. Even "a substantial risk" of failure to conform could bring preventative correction. Remediation, conflict resolution, and other mind changing strategies include these steps:

148

 challenge traditional values

 evoke strong feelings

 produce cognitive dissonance, a form of mental and moral confusion

 dialogue to consensus

 elicit a response that

1. demonstrates a change in attitude

2. can be measured

3. becomes part of a child's individual electronic data file

The goal of brainwashing in the Soviet Union was to create the new "Soviet Man."

The UN goal is to mould global citizens so committed to the new ideology that they cannot be turned back even by the most logical arguments. UNESCO's 1995 report, Our Creative Diversity, said it well:

"Education must inform... but it must also form, it must provide them with a sense of meaning to guide their actions...

"Education should promote 'rational understanding of conflict, tensions, and the processes involved, provoke a critical awareness... and provide a basis for the analysis of concepts that will prevent ...chauvinist and irrational explanations from being accepted.'...

"Its primary task is to provide information, explain and analyse problems and subject them to criticism...

"It should cover adults as well. The principle of lifelong education should be the aim of all societies."

149

Edward Hunter wrote the book Brainwashing, an insightful report on the experience of prisoners who survived Soviet brainwashing strategies in Communist Countries during the fifties. His warnings should shine a red light into our foolish presumptions that this process couldn't be used in our nation.

Compare his words with the above UNESCO report written over four decades later:

"Even when he stands by himself, the truly indoctrinated communist must be part of the collective. He must be incapable of hearing opposing ideas and facts, no matter how convincing or how forcibly they bombard his senses. A trustworthy communist must react in an automatic manner without any force being applied."

Having learned to process away facts and fear truth, these conditioned masses would resist logic and hate God's Word. It's natural. After all, "the whole world is under the control of the evil one." Therefore, Jesus warned His disciples long ago, "If they persecute me, they will persecute you. for they do not know the One who sent me." Are you and your children ready to face hostility and rejection for your faith? If so, you will delight in this promise:

"Blessed are you when men hate you exclude you, and revile you, and cast out your name as evil for the Son of Man's sake. Rejoice in that day and leap for joy, for great is your reward in heaven."

For practical information about the consensus process and other psycho- social strategies, read chapter 3 in Brave New Schools. To understand the worldwide feminist movement's goals and influence on mental health regulations, read chapter 9 of A Twist of Faith.

150

Trading U.S. Rights for UN Rules The UN Plan for A report on President Clinton's Executive Order 13107: Your

"The Implementation of Human Rights Treaties" Mental Declaration on (signed 12-10-98) Health Tolerance

By Berit Kjos, 1998

While Americans focused on more scintillating news, President Clinton quietly signed a new executive order titled "The Implementation of Human Rights Treaties." The media ignored it and our leaders didn't tell us. Yet we will pay the cost -- in freedom as well as dollars -- for the creation of a massive government bureaucracy to promote, monitor, and enforce compliance with human rights regulations mandated by the United Nations. Remember, this governing body shows only contempt for biblical values, American sovereignty, and the U.S. Constitution.

Clinton's timing was perfect. An attack on Iraq had been planned. And after December's impeachment proceedings, Congress would adjourn for the holidays. Without its objection, the executive order would take effect within 30 days (not a hard and fast rule 1), and become a federal law. Once implemented, no one would be free to do or say anything contrary to the new global ideology.

Hard to believe? Before studying the executive order itself, take a look at the Universal Declaration of Human Rights. It illustrates the deceptive meanings behind the noble words used to persuade the American people to accept unthinkable regulations. Even so, on December 10, 1998, President Clinton used its 50th anniversary to celebrate its ideals, to honour its late sponsor Eleanor Roosevelt, to announce his Human Rights Initiatives, and to sign this executive order.

151

Background Information

At the first glance, the Universal Declaration of Human Rights sounds good, as do all the intrusive UN human rights treaties. Article 18 upholds "the right to freedom of thought, conscience and religion..." Article 19 affirms "the right to freedom of opinion and expression... and to seek receive and impart information and ideas through any media and regardless of frontiers."

But Article 29 states that "these rights and freedoms may in no case be exercised contrary to the purposes and principles of the United Nations." In other words, these "rights" or "freedoms" don't apply to those who would criticize the UN or its policies. Your rights would be conditioned on your compliance. Only if your message supports official ideology are you free to speak it. As Andrei Vishinsky wrote in The Law of the Soviet State, "There can be no place for freedom of speech, press, and so on for the foes of socialism."

The Convention on the Rights of the Child has not been ratified by the Senate. Yet, it would be included among "other relevant treaties" in this executive order which begins with these words:

"By the authority vested in me as President by the Constitution and bearing in mind the obligations of the United States pursuant to the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights and other relevant treaties concerned with the protection and promotion of human rights to which the United States is now or may become a party in the future, it is hereby ordered."

Like the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, the UN Convention on the Rights of the Child uses manipulative and misleading language. According to Article 13, "The child shall have the right to freedom of expression; this right shall include freedom to seek, receive, and impart information and ideas of all kinds, regardless of frontiers..." In other words, parents have no authority to keep a child from reading a sexually explicit magazine or visiting pagan chat rooms on Internet.

152

While parents lose their right to set safe boundaries for their children, the State assumes full power to "protect" the child and define the rules. Thus Article 13 concludes with: "This right may be subject to certain restrictions, but these shall only be such as are provided by law and are necessary for respect of the rights or reputations of others; or for protection of national security or public order."

Likewise, if parents restrict their child's "right to freedom of association" or their child's ambiguous rights to "privacy" or "conscience and religion" (Arti- cles 14 -16), they would break this law and face the potential loss of their child to the state's "protection" services.

In the context of UN ideology, "national security or public order" refers to the concept of solidarity, a utopian community oneness based on shared values defined by globalist leaders. In their minds, anything less than social solidarity in every community could stir conflict or incite violence. In this context, dissenters become foes; facts or beliefs that clash with its vision of unity become threats; and the uncompromising truths of biblical Christianity become intolerable, even dangerous to public safety.

These "human rights" restrictions are already filtering into American culture. For example, any Christian website that promotes biblical standards for right and wrong could be targeted for censorship by Cyber Patrol, the world's most powerful Internet thought police. Owned by the Learning Company, America's "premier developer of educational software," it has formed some powerful "partners" around the world. These include AOL, AT&T, Bell Atlantic, CompuServe, IBM, Microsoft, Netscape, Scholastic Network, and others. Its website shows the categories in its Cyber NOT Block List, a list of offenses that determines which websites should be screened to protect schools and families that buy their service. These dangers include Violence/Profanity, Nudity, Sexual Acts, Intolerance, Satanic/Cult, Drugs, and Militant/Extremist.

153

Notice "Intolerance" amidst the more obvious threats. Cyber Patrol warns us that "any picture or text that elevates one group over another" would be considered intolerant. Their filters now "protect" children and schools across the country from visiting American Family Association and other Christian websites simply because they present God-given warnings and view Christian truth and lifestyles as superior to pagan alternatives.

An international "Declaration on Tolerance," prepared by UNESCO and signed by its member nations, defines the new global standard for right and wrong. All nations would be responsible for fulfilling this international contract by teaching the "right" kind of tolerance and training their people to "respect" every kind of ritual and lifestyle -- no matter how contrary to God's Word. Though the U.S. didn't sign this anti-Christian Declaration 4, our leaders are fuelling the transformation. Consider how its decrees would undermine our Bill of Rights:

 "Tolerance is respect, acceptance and appreciation of the rich diversity of our world's cultures It is not only a moral duty, it is also a political and legal requirement."

 "Tolerance involves the rejection of dogmatism and absolutism." [Biblical truth?]

 "Tolerance... means that one's views are not to be imposed on others." [Would this end freedom to share the gospel with others? Could the UN still share its views?]

 "Intolerance... is a global threat."

 "Scientific studies and networking should be undertaken to coordinate the international community's response to this global challenge, including analysis of root causes and effective countermeasures, as well as research and monitoring... "

154

 "Tolerance promotion and the shaping of attitudes of openness, mutual listening and solidarity should take place in schools and universities and through non-formal education... at home and in the workplace."

 "Promote rational tolerance teaching methods that will address the cultural, social, economic, political and religious sources of intolerance-- major roots of violence and exclusion.”

As you read on, you will see how the suggestions in the last three points are worked into President Clinton's Initiatives and Executive Order. But don't forget, the first four points provide the rationale for the last three points.

Clinton's Human Rights Initiatives

A White House Press Release, posted with the executive order at the White House website, explained that "on the historic anniversary of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, President Clinton announced several policy initiatives to advance human rights at home and abroad." These initiatives include the following:

1. "Signing of a Human Rights Executive Order that strengthens our efforts to implement human rights treaties, and creates an Administration working group to coordinate these efforts." Its main points are listed below.

2. "Establishment of a Genocide Early Warning Centre, jointly run by the State Department and the Central Intelligence Agency, to train intelligence resources on situations that could potentially lead to genocide."

The response of the liberal media and politicians to the bombing of the Oklahoma Federal Building gives us a clue to the rising hostility toward those who refuse to embrace the new global visions. Remember how Christian and conservative radio hosts were accused of "creating a climate of hate" that could incite violence. In this cultural atmosphere, such an Early Warning Centre, using intrusive CIA surveillance technology to monitor those who dissent, could well lead to repression of contrary opinions.

155

In fact, that might be its main purpose. Remember UNESCO's Declaration on Tolerance which equates intolerance with biblical absolutes. Since "intolerance is a global threat," today's crisis calls for analysis "of root causes effective countermeasures" and "monitoring..."

When the US delegation signed the Action Plan prepared at the 1995 UN Conference for Women in Beijing, we agreed to "develop gender-sensitive databases, information and monitoring systems." These information systems would monitor every school, workplace, and home for compliance with "women's rights" to cast aside traditional gender roles in the home and assume 50-50 representation in business, entertainment, and political leadership. This massive global information management system would be controlled by the UN Social and Economic Council.

The technology needed for worldwide surveillance has been created. Existing databases are being linked and the information management systems completed.

The planned "unique personal identifier" is becoming reality, and the process of intrusive surveillance is under way. We are ready for the next step:

3. "Enhancing our response to human rights emergencies. The U.S. Agency for International Development will provide up to $8 million over the next five years to non-governmental organizations to enhance their rapid response capacities. Organizations can use these funds for a variety of purposes, including the creation of assessment teams, monitoring units or other means of addressing situations where human rights may be imminently threatened."

Whenever you see the open-ended word "other", beware. It could be interpreted to mean anything the authors might later include.

156

4. "Preventing youth hate crime through publication in January of a guide for schools entitled 'Protecting Students from Harassment and Hate Crimes,' developed jointly by the Department of Education and the National Association of Attorneys General. The guide provides suggestions to school systems for addressing the issue of school violence."

Remember, words such as violence and hate have been redefined to reflect a global perspective. They now include various forms of conflict, biblical "intolerance", and failure to comply with the new global standards for mental health, i.e. the attitudes, values, beliefs, behaviour, and collective mind-set required for community solidarity. (See "Zero Tolerance for Non-Compliance" and "Clinton's War on Hate Bans Christian values")

5. "encourage greater reporting to and cooperation with U.S. authorities in targeting abusers of human rights."

Assessing, monitoring, re-educating, and tracking every person around the world is key to the UN vision of global governance. 9 And, as President Clinton stressed at his 1997 White House Conference on Hate Crimes, "reporting" intolerant words and attitudes is the duty of every person in the community. The following executive order adds legal authority to this unconstitutional plan.

The Executive Order

Look again at the scope of the executive order in its opening paragraph:

"By the authority vested in me as President by the Constitution and the laws of the United States of America, and bearing in mind the obligations of the United States pursuant to the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights (ICCPR), the Convention Against Torture and Other Cruel, Inhuman or Degrading Treatment or Punishment (CAT), the Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Racial Discrimination (CERD),and other relevant treaties concerned with the protection and promotion of human rights to which the United States is now or may become a party in the future, it is hereby ordered."

157

Notice that it includes "other relevant treaties concerned with the protection and promotion of human rights..." In other words, it would apparently include such un-ratified treaties as The Convention on the Rights of the Child and other treaties "to which" we may "become party in the future." As you read its precepts below, consider whether this executive order protects human "rights" or oppressive "responsibilities."

Section 1(a) commits the U.S. "fully to respect and implement its obligations under the international human rights treaties to which it is a party, including the ICCPR, the CAT, and the CERD."

Don't assume that this EO only applies to ratified treaties. This section doesn't rule out all the other present and future un-ratified treaties included in the opening paragraph and in Sec. 4(vi).

While the Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination against Women has not been ratified, its values have been established as a cultural norm through the liberal media, education, and a variety of laws, rules and regulations. To speed the process, President Clinton established an agency to manage and oversee the implementation of the Beijing Plan for Action signed after the 1995 UN Conference for Women. It includes all the key provisions of the above Convention, such as 50-50 representation in influential positions.

"(b) It shall also be the policy and practice of the Government of the United States to promote respect for international human rights, both in our relationships with all other countries and by working with and strengthening the various international mechanisms for the promotion of human rights, including, inter alia, those of the United Nations, the International Labour Organization, and the Organization of American States."

Don't forget that ILO, the International Labour Organization, shows little concern for the rights of those who oppose its liberal, political, and global agenda.

Sec. 2 titled, "Responsibility of Executive Departments and Agencies" brings all these agencies together in a coordinated effort to follow UN guidelines for human rights and global solidarity.

158

Sec. 4 establishes "an Interagency Working Group on Human Rights Treaties for the purpose of providing guidance, oversight, and coordination with respect to questions concerning the adherence to and implementation of human rights obligations and related matters." It would be chaired by the "designee of the Assistant to the President for National Security Affairs."

The functions of this Interagency Working Group would include:

"(i) co-ordinating the interagency review of any significant issues concerning the implementation of this order..."

"(iii) co-ordinating the responses of the United States Government to complaints against it concerning alleged human rights violations submitted to the United Nations, the Organization of American States, and other international organizations;"

"(iv) developing effective mechanisms to ensure that legislation proposed by the Administration is reviewed for conformity with international human rights obligations and that these obligations are taken into account in reviewing legislation under consideration by the Congress as well;"

Apparently, the United Nations and its Human Rights treaties would replace the U.S. Constitution as our main standard and filter for legal action.

"(v) developing recommended proposals and mechanisms for improving the monitoring of the actions by the various States, Commonwealths, and territories of the United States... for their conformity with relevant treaties, the provision of relevant information for reports and other monitoring purposes, and the promotion of effective remedial mechanisms;"

Remember UNESCO's Declaration on Tolerance. It, too, called for "analysis of root causes [of intolerance] and effective countermeasures, as well as research and monitoring...."

159

Just as the provisions of the un-ratified Biodiversity treaty are being implemented through the EPA regulations, executive orders, and environmental guidelines so un-ratified human rights agreements are being implemented through executive orders, reinterpretation of old laws, and a variety of local, state and national regulations that bypass Congress. However, the heart of the transformation is UNESCO's plan for Lifelong Learning, a psycho-social process of re-learning: replacing traditional beliefs, values, attitudes, and individual thinking with the new global ideology and collective thinking.

This program demands everyone's participation in the Hegelian dialectic (or consensus) process. Everyone must be willing to compromise in order to find "common ground". People from every cultural background must agree to dialogue to consensus over divisive social issues under the leadership of a facilitator trained in psycho-social manipulation.

"(vi) developing plans for public outreach and education concerning the provisions of the ICCPR, CAT, CERD, and other relevant treaties and human rights-related provisions of domestic law;"

The last sentence would include Clinton's hate-crimes initiatives and legislation as well as other prohibitions against any information that would be offensive to our politically correct thought police. That Christian websites are being tagged by the Cyber Patrol because they violate its guidelines on "tolerance" shows how "private" organizations, in partnership with our government, are implementing the international political agenda.

Remember the last two points in UNESCO's Declaration on Tolerance. They call for "rational tolerance teaching methods that will address the cultural, social, economic, political and religious sources of intolerance-major roots of violence and exclusion." No person would be free from the duty to conform to UN standards through its manipulative program for "shaping... attitudes of openness, mutual listening and solidarity in schools and universities, and through non-formal education... at home and in the workplace."

160

These two points summarize the UNESCO plan for re-learning" or "remediation" for adults as well as children. Tied to the national-international plan for School-to-Work signed into law by Clinton in 1998, this section probably means that no one would receive a work certificate without conforming to the new ideology and group thinking.

"(vii) coordinating and directing an annual review of United States reservations, declarations, and understandings to human rights treaties, and matters as to which there have been non-trivial complaints or allegations of inconsistency with or breach of international human rights obligations..."

A typical inconsistency would be churches that refuse to hire pagans or homosexuals. Such "separatism" could be challenged both on the bases of discrimination and refusal to enter into dialogue and seek "common ground." The UN vision of solidarity rules out such "separatism." Al Gore summarized this sentiment well at a 1991 Communitarian conference in Washington: "Seeing ourselves as separate is the central problem in our political thinking."

Clinton's Hate-Crimes Conference called for "some sort of club or organization at the school -- because if you think about it, your parents are still pretty well separated.... Most houses of worship are still fairly segregated. We have to find a disciplined, organized way out of this so that we reach every child in an affirmative way before something bad happens..."

But that isn't enough. Every person-young and old -- must be held responsible for reporting violations. As in Nazi Germany, children would have to report on parents, neighbours on neighbours, etc. Our president outlined the plan at his 1997 Hate-Crimes Conference,

"The Justice Department will make its own hate crimes training curriculum available. A lot of hate crimes still go unreportedº. If a crime is unreported, that gives people an excuse to ignore it."

161

"The real answer to our success in this endeavour is obviously that we all have to work together. And all of you can strike new energy into this entire endeavour around the country."

At the same conference, Attorney General Janet Reno added:

" ...the first line of defence is to prevent it. But then it is very important when you see hate to speak out against it immediately and strike it down. How can we in the federal government improve our coordination with local law enforcement, with the state authorities, and with groups such as the churches or other advocacy groups in the community, one, to get it reported, and two, to work with you so that the investigations and the prosecutions are designed with one objective in mind to eliminate hate..."

This executive order links Clinton's goals to the UN vision of controlled solidarity. For the Interagency Working Group would coordinate its efforts with "international human rights institutions, including the Inter-American Commission on Human Rights and the Special Rapporteurs and complaints procedures established by the United Nations Human Rights Commission."

Sec. 6, "Judicial Review, Scope, and Administration" gives an example of Clinton's ambiguous and misleading legal language: "(c) The term 'treaty obligations' shall mean treaty obligations as approved by the Senate pursuant to Article II, section 2, clause 2 of the United States Constitution."

This statement appears to be little more than a smoke screen, for the actual executive order extends far beyond ratified treaties or, rather, "our treaty obligations" (remember the first paragraph and Sec. 4 vi). Our president intends to create the American part of the United Nations' massive management system and monitoring process. He is betraying our nation into the hands of a global government with a newly established International Criminal Court with authority to prosecute its opposition. And he is ready to provide the technology the UN needs in order to track every person and community in the world.

162

Once this monstrous system is in place, it may not matter whether human rights treaties are ratified or not. We will have yielded control of our lives and thoughts to an anti-Christian world government. Let's hope Congress will awaken to this threat, blocks this executive order, and refuse to fund any of its seditious programs.

Meanwhile, the deception grows. In his speech commemorating the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, our president gave a glimpse of the changing meaning of "rights" and "freedom":

"In the future days, which we seek to make secure, we look forward to a world founded four essential human freedoms.

1. "The first is freedom of speech and expression -- everywhere in the world. 2. "The second is freedom of every person to worship God in his own way -- everywhere in the world. 3. "The third is freedom from want . . . . 4. "The fourth is freedom from fear . . . anywhere in the world . . . . The world order which we seek is the cooperation of free countries, working together in a friendly, civilized society."

The last two "freedoms", which apparently are now considered human rights, would require a totalitarian world government. The third "freedom" would require a global welfare system, and the fourth would require absolute control of human behaviour -- no guns, no free speech, etc., except in the hands of elitist rulers.

Our Response

We shouldn't be surprised. The Bible tells us to prepare for a world government that would persecute all who refuse to conform to its ideology and group thinking. 11 Since Biblical Christianity is incompatible with the UN's global spirituality, Christians had better prepare to face persecution even in America.

163

Long ago, God showed us what to expect in this post-Christian era: "But know this, that in the last days perilous times will come: For men will be lovers of themselves, lovers of money, boasters, proud, blasphemers, disobedient to parents, unthankful, unholy, unloving, unforgiving, slanderers, without self-control, brutal, despisers of good, traitors, headstrong, haughty, lovers of pleasure rather than lovers of God. From such people turn away!"

Remember, separatism is intolerable to the UN. To "turn away" would violate its vision of social solidarity. So it's not surprising that the passage continues with this warning:

"...all who desire to live godly in Christ Jesus will suffer persecution. But evil men and impostors will grow worse and worse, deceiving and being deceived. But you must continue in the things which you have learned..."

It won't be easy to continue to stand firm in God's uncompromising Word when the world demands consensus. But there is no other safe position in this fast-changing world. Only our King can provide all the strength, wisdom, peace, and love we need for the battle. When we choose to follow Him, he strength becomes ours! His life in us will bring encouragement and hope to all around us. Remember, we are on the winning side. "Blessed are the people whose God is the Lord!"

The LORD is my light and my salvation; Whom shall I fear? The LORD is the strength of my life; Of whom shall I be afraid?"

Psalm 27:1

Apparently, some executive orders take effect immediately. Others provide more time for Congressional action. There seems to be a lack of agreement among Congressional aides on a clear standard or procedure.

The Declaration of Principles on Tolerance adopted and signed by the Member States of the UNESCO on 16 November, 1995.

164

In this case, "or other means of addressing." may refer to the UN plan outlined in a 1995 report titled Towards a Rapid Reaction Capability for the United Nations.

Published by the Canadian government and written with the aid of an International Consultative Group, it calls for a "highly trained" UN Volunteer Force armed with America's latest surveillance and reconnaissance technology ready to carry out the "riskier operations" which national governments might forbid. Ponder some of its suggestions:

"This study's central objective is to recommend changes at all levels of the UN system which would give the UN an enhanced capability to respond rapidly to crisis situations..."...the UN would need to create a database which could capture information provided by national authorities."

"To enhance rapid reaction, the UN and Member States need to address... the management systems which should be put into place to ensure that national training programs are responsive to the UN's requirements."

"The fact that the theoretically best solution is not at present politically feasible does not mean that the system must simply muddle on indefinitely in its present condition. A great deal can be achieved without constitutional change, by changes in such salient features as geography, legal mandates and behaviour." Sir Brian Urquhart and Esrskine Childers

"...surveillance technologies and information management systems could be integrated into an organization-wide system to enhance contingency planning."

"Governments are sometimes reluctant to release their forces for duty... Even when Governments are disposed to concur the process of seeking authorization is often slow."

165

"As professional volunteers develop into a cohesive UN force, they can assume responsibility for some of the riskier operations mandated by the Council but for which troop contributors have been hesitant to contribute... Without the need to consult national authorities, the UN could cut response time significantly... As the 1995 Commission on Global Governance noted, "The veryble and effective UN Volunteer Force could be a deterrent."

166

Marching toward Global Solidarity By Berit Kjos - July 22, 2006

James Morton, Federico Mayor (former head of UNESCO) or Ismail Serageldin (World Bank)

Habitat Symbol Ismail Serageldin, World Bank VP, 1996

"The new generation...[has] a deeper sense of solidarity as people of the planet than any generation before them.... On that rests our hope for our global neighbourhood." Report of “The UN Commission on Global Govern- ance”.

"Welfare depends on the intellectual and moral solidarity of mankind." Federico Mayor, then Director General of UNESCO

"I trust in You, O Lord.... My times are in your hand." Psalm 31:14-15

During the 1996 UN Conference on Human Settlements (Habitat II), I attended a day-long "Dialogue" on the meaning of "Solidarity" at Istanbul’s elegant Ciragan Palace. Registered as a reporter, I received a list of 21 panel members. It included UNESCO's Director General Federico Mayor, the now discredited UN leader Maurice Strong, World Bank Vice President Ismail Serageldin, and Millard Fuller who founded Habitat for Humanity. Together with other globalist dignitaries, they would explore the missing factor in the old Soviet version of dialectical materialism: a spiritual foundation for an evolving global ethic.

167

"To speak of solidarity is to speak of things of the spirit," began Habitat Secretary-General Wally N’Dow. "For we are well aware that the future of our human settlements... is not just a matter of bricks and mortar but equally a question of attitudes and determination to work for the common good.... This spiritual dimension is the only ingredient that can bind societies together."

N'Dow had chosen an American moderator who would add credibility to the discussion: Robert McNeil (of McNeil-Lehrer), "one of the gurus, the spiritual lights of the media industry today."[4] Moments later, McNeil introduced the panel of dignitaries ready to shape the new vision of oneness.

"What’s needed is an interfaith centre in every city of the globe," said James Morton, former dean of the Episcopal Cathedral of St. John the Divine. "The new interfaith centres will honour the rituals of every… faith tradition: Islam, Hinduism, Jain, Christian… and provide opportunity for sacred expression needed to bind the people of the planet into a viable, meaningful, and sustainable solidarity."

Dean Morton's version of "Christianity" is actually a universalized distortion of truth that matches the new religious union. Anything less would be dis- missed as fundamentalist extremism.

Millard Fuller, President of Habitat for Humanity, fit right into this interfaith dialogue. Like other emerging leaders in the neo-Christian movement, he redefined Scriptures to "prove" his message:

"When Jesus launched His ministry 2000 years ago, He said, 'We must repent for the Kingdom of Heaven is at hand.' In English, that sort of connotes feeling sorry for getting caught. But in the Greek, we read that what He really said was to metamorphose. Metamorphose is what a butterfly becomes when it metamorphoses out of a little fuzzy caterpillar.... Change your whole way of thinking, because the new order of the spirit is confronting and challenging you. ... The only way we will achieve human solidarity in dealing with it is to have a completely new way of thinking."

168

This "new way of thinking" has already permeated every segment of society: education, business, government, and the church growth movement, including Purpose-Driven churches. Pushing transformation in all these sectors are the leadership training programs that pursue the vision of management gurus such as Peter Drucker, Peter Senge, and Ken Blanchard. The core of their teaching is "general systems theory" or "systems thinking." In short, everything is interconnected, therefore all is one and all divisions and boundaries must be eliminated in order to establish the "Global Neighbourhood," i.e. New World Order. Emerging Church leaders like Brian McLaren call it "The Kingdom of God."

God makes us "one" in Christ when we respond to His gospel with faith and genuine repentance (acknowledging our sin and humbly turning to God). Millard's "new way of thinking" points people to the world's corrupt system, not to God and His ways.

Let’s not forget that familiar words with strategic new meanings are likely to mislead the masses. For example, in Webster's Dictionary (1989) the familiar meaning of solidarity sounds perfectly safe: "common interest and active loyalty within a group." But contemporary change agents have infused that word with a far more revolutionary meaning. Let's take a closer look.

THE NEW SOCIAL CONTRACT

During a break, I asked moderator Robert McNeil to define solidarity for me. In his answer, he acknowledged that solidarity is strengthened by a common enemy as well as a "common good":

"It means people with shared values or responsibilities cooperating or working together. In our culture, it was probably exemplified most often by the union movement. Industrial unions often used the phrase solidarity-- 'solidarity forever.' And in the socialist movement, of course, solidarity was a very strong word -- the solidarity of the workers against the employers, their oppressor, capitalists.... whatever it was...."

169

"Solidarity is like a social contract, like people agreeing that this is the way it should be. Whether I am poorer or richer than you are, we somehow agree that the way it is set up works best for all of us."

What if we don't agree? Then we are vilified as divisive resisters -- excluded from the feel-good solidarity. Pastor Brian McLaren, an acknowledged leader in the Emerging Church movement, summarized it well:

"...to be truly inclusive, the [earthly] kingdom must exclude exclusive people, to be truly reconciling, the kingdom must not reconcile with those who refuse reconciliation.'"

Social contracts hold people accountable to the new standard. It pushes people toward the planned conformity, whether the society is a church, a school, or the "global neighbourhood." So I wasn't surprised when UNESCO's Federico Mayor made the same point: "The 21st Century city will be a city of social solidarity," he said. "We have to redefine the words... [and write a new] social contract."

This evolving "social contract" has been written into every UN treaty and declaration. And former President Clinton's Executive Order 13107 helped turn that UN "contract" into US policy. It is being implemented through government policies as well as laws whether the treaties were ratified by Congress or not. [See Trading U.S. Rights for UN Rules]

This "social contract" guarantees "freedom from want," from fear, from hunger, and from offense by those who might voice contrary values. It also promises "freedom of thought and expression" -- but only to those who share the UN vision. Remember, Article 29 of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights states that "...these rights and freedoms may in no case be exercised contrary to the purposes and principles of the United Nations."

Reflecting the same communitarian constraint, Ismail Serageldin, then Vice President of the World Bank, said:

170

"We should stop bemoaning the growth of cities. It’s going to happen and it’s a good thing, because cities are the vectors of social change and transformation. Let’s just make sure that social change and transformation are going in the right direction.... The media must act as part of the education process that counters individualism."

BEHAVIOR MODIFICATION

A cooperative media is essential to the planned change in public consciousness. As in totalitarian regimes, "voluntary" social transformation relies on effective propaganda. That's why our Education Department's Community Action Toolkit, The President's Council for Sustainable Development, and the UN's Local Agenda 21 all call for partnerships between educators and the news and entertainment media in every community. The public must be persuaded to give its consent; the people must learn to feel so uncomfortable with dissent that contrary voices would be silenced. The masses must never notice that this manipulative process is changing their minds and actions. Since few people do notice, Pro- fessor Raymond Houghton's triumphant promise in a 1970 NEA publication is becoming an alarming reality:

"...absolute behaviour control is imminent. ... The critical point of behaviour control, in effect, is sneaking up on mankind without his self-conscious realization that a crisis is at hand. Man will never self-consciously know that it has happened."

This plan for "behaviour control" would include three essentials steps:

(1) a supportive news and entertainment media willing to disseminate politically correct information and inspire values that erode the old boundaries,

(2) a management system for measuring and monitoring change, and

(3) universal participation in the dialectic (consensus) process.

171

By use of a change agent, or “facilitator”, individuals are herded toward “consensus” by compromising their position for the sake of “social harmony.” According to Kurt Lewin,

“A successful change includes, therefore, three aspects: UNFREEZING the present level, MOVING to the new level, and FREEZING group life on the new level.”

This is precisely the technique with which the communists brainwashed American POWs, the only difference being they could accelerate the “unfreezing” phase with physical torture. In group dynamics the pain is not physical, it’s emotional. ... Transformational Marxists such as Kurt Lewin refined their weapon for the new battlefield: Using group dynamics to invade the culture to affect the paradigm shift. The weapon looks like this:

● A Diverse Group (“Diversity” needed for conflict)

● Dialoguing to Consensus (Dialectic process)

● Over a Social Issue (Problem/Crisis/Issues)

● In a Facilitated Meeting (Controlled environment using facilitator /change agent)

● To a Predetermined Outcome (Paradigm shift)

From The Dialectic: Fomenting the Revolution

The latter has become the norm in US schools, corporations, government agencies, and communities. The dialectic process used to control the masses in the former Soviet Union has invaded every corner of U.S. society – even churches.

172

The goal is to involve every human resource (human capital) in the UNESCO program of lifelong learning -- a continual process of training and immersion in the new way of thinking and relating to others.

To succeed, every level of this hierarchical management system (marketed as "local control) must continually assess change, monitor compliance, and remediate the non-compliant. (See Brainwashing in America & Moulding Human Resources for the Global Workforce)

We shouldn't be surprised. God warned us long ago that the world's ways would lead to corruption and tyranny, not peace and love. His lasting peace is reserved for those who will face the rising hostility with faith and love:

"... in the last days perilous times will come: For men will be lovers of themselves, lovers of money, boasters, proud, blasphemers, disobedient to parents, unthankful, unholy, unloving, unforgiving, slanderers, without self-control, brutal, despisers of good, traitors, headstrong, haughty, lovers of pleasure rather than lovers of God.... And from such people turn away!" 2 Timothy 3:1-13

“These things I have spoken to you, that in Me you may have peace. In the world you will have tribulation; but be of good cheer, I have overcome the world.” John 16:33

173

From Christian Values to Global Mind Control

The Century-Old Roots of Common Core Standards Serving the Novus Ordo Seclo- By Berit ~ May rum Greater Whole

New Order of the Home Ages

In 1947, Julian Huxley, the first head of the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO) wrote,

"The task before UNESCO... is to help the emergence of a single world culture with its own philosophy and background of ideas and with its own broad purpose. This is opportune, since this is the first time in history that the scaffolding and the mechanisms for world unification have become available.... And it is necessary, for at the moment, two opposing philosophies of life confront each other....

"You may categorize the two philosophies as two super-nationalisms, or as individualism versus collectivism; or as the American versus the Russian way of life, or as capitalism versus communism, or as Christianity versus Marxism. Can these opposites be reconciled...? I believe not only that this can happen, but that, through the inexorable dialectic of evolution, it must happen...." [1]

But God's Word tells us:

Train up a child in the way he should go, And when he is old he will not depart from it." Proverbs 22:6

174

America has changed! We were "a nation under God, indivisible, with liberty and justice for all." We have become a divided nation with eroding liberties for those who refuse to conform. The seeds for this transformation were planted long ago, but few saw the warning signs. Now that the evidence is too profuse to deny, it may be too late to slow or stop the process. I hope not.

As you read, notice the powerful people, organizations and foundations that inspire, plan, and fund the transformation. Follow their names and see their links to other groups. By the time you reach the eighties, the names will become more familiar: President Bush, Lamar Alexander, President Clinton, Ted Turner.... Many of the names and titles have been written in bold letters to help you trace their steps and influence through the years. Significant statements have been emphasized with italics.

Three main themes flowing through this chronology:

 Purge the beliefs, values, individualism, independence and free enterprise that made this nation unique.

 Promote global beliefs and interdependence, universal values, a managed economy, and controlled "human capital" -- even at the cost of our constitutional rights and personal freedom.

 Implement the psycho-social strategies developed in various Regional Educational Laboratories across our country to modify beliefs, values and behaviour to match the UN-globalist agenda.

1905. The Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching (CFAT) was founded. Together with other Carnegie Foundations, it has been a major promoter and funder of socialistic, global education projects.

1908. While the patriotic President Teddy Roosevelt was finishing his White House term, John Dewey was laying the foundations for a revolutionary transformation of America and the rest of the world. In "Religion and our Schools", he wrote,

175

"Our schools ... are performing an infinitely significant religious work. They are promoting the social unity out of which in the end genuine religious unity must grow. ...dogmatic beliefs... we see.. Disappearing.... It is the part of men to... work for the transformation of all practical instrumentalities of education till they are in harmony with these ideas.".

1919. The Institute of International Education was established with a grant from the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace. Edward R. Murrow became the IIE's Assistant Director and John Dewey served on its National Advisory Council.

1933. John Dewey, "father of progressive education" and honorary president of the National Education Association (NEA), co-authored the Humanist Manifesto I. Its introduction warned against identifying "religion" with existing doctrines which "are powerless to solve the problems of human living in the Twentieth Century... Any religion that can hope to be a synthesizing and dynamic force for day, must be shaped for the needs of this age."

1934. Former Executive Secretary of the “National Education Associa- tion (NEA)” Willard Givens warned that "...all of us, including the 'owners', must be subjected to a large degree of social control... An equitable distribution of income will be sought.... [T]he major function of the school is the social orientation of the individual. It must seek to give him understanding of the transition to a new social order."

1934. The Carnegie Corporation funded the American Historical Association's Report of the Commission on the Social Studies. Like most of today's social studies curricula, the report called for a shift from free enterprise to collectivism:

"...the age of individualism and laissez faire in economy and government is closing and... a new age of collectivism is emerging... It may involve the limiting or supplanting of private property by public property or it may entail the preservation of private property, extended and distributed among the masses..."

176

1946. In his NEA editorial, "The teacher and World Government," J. Elmer Morgan, wrote,

"In the struggle to establish an adequate world government, the teacher... can do much to prepare the hearts and minds of children.... At the very top of all the agencies which will assure the coming of world government must stand the school, the teacher, and the organized profession?"

1946 (February). Five decades ago, Canadian psychiatrist and World War II General Brock Chisholm, M.D. head of the World Health Organization (WHO), promoted the behaviour modification processes now mandated through Goals 2000. Compare his vision with today's Mastery Learning (Chapter 3) and planned control of the family (Chapter 7):

"We have swallowed all manner of poisonous certainties fed us by our parents, our Sunday and day school teachers... The results are frustration, inferiority, neurosis and inability to... make the world fit to live in.

"The re-interpretation and eventually eradication of the concept of right and wrong which has been the basis of child training... these are the belated objectives of practically all effective psychotherapy....

"[Psychology and sociology... the sciences of living, should be... taught to all children in primary and secondary schools, while the study of such thing as trigonometry, Latin, religions and others of specialist concern should be left to universities. Only so... can we help our children carry their responsibilities as world citizens....

"...it has long been generally accepted that parents have perfect right to impose any points of view, any lies or fears, superstitions, prejudices, hates, or faith on their defenceless children. It is, however, only recently that it has become a matter of certain knowledge that these things cause neuroses....

177

"Surely the training of children in homes and schools should be of at least as great public concern as are their vaccination... for their own protection and that of other people.... [Individuals with] guilt’s, fears, inferiorities, are certain to project their hates on to others.... Any such reaction now becomes a dangerous threat to the whole world. For the very survival of the human race, world understanding, tolerance and forbearance have become absolutely essential. We must be prepared to sacrifice much.... Whatever the cost, we must learn to live in friendliness and peace.... putting aside the mistaken old ways of our elders if that is possible. If it cannot be done gently, it may have to be done roughly or even violently."

1948. The NEA, funded in part by the Carnegie Corporation, produced a set of international guidelines called Education for International Understanding in American Schools - Suggestions and Recommendations. It included this statement:

"The idea has become established that the preservation of international peace and order may require that force be used to compel a nation to conduct its affairs within the framework of an established world system. The most modern expression of this doctrine of collective security is in the United Nations Charter... Many persons believe that enduring peace cannot be achieved so long as the nation-state system continues as at present constituted. It is a system of international anarchy."

1962. An editorial in the Chicago Sun-Times gave an insightful glimpse into the NEA's plan and power:

"For control -- real control over the Nation's children -- is being shifted rapidly to the NEA. That organization has about completed the job of cartelizing public school education under its own cartel... It is extending that control over colleges and universities."

1965. The U.S. Congress passed the federal Elementary and Secondary Education Act (ESEA). Months later, it decided to fund Citizens for the 21st Century, a book by UCLA Professor John Goodlad, who wrote,

178

"Although the conduct of education and especially the clientele have changed.... the school is perceived very much as it was then: a partitioned box where boys and girls come to sit still for six hours a day and to be told about some fragmentary pieces of 'knowledge' thought to reflect the rudiments of their 'culture.' This image must be shattered, violently if necessary -- and forever. The future of mankind may rest upon it."

1968. Professor John Goodlad reported that Professor Benjamin Bloom [called Father of OBE] "was invited by UNESCO in 1968 to submit a proposal for a six to nine week training program which would partially fulfil recommendations made at UNESCO's Moscow meeting dealing with the formation of national centres for curriculum development and research...." Bloom's "program was ultimately approved by the UNESCO General Council..."

1970. The Association for Supervision and Curriculum Development (ASCD), the curriculum arm of the NEA, published To Nurture Humaneness: Commitment for the '70's. The visionary statements of its authors are coming true in our times:

"The old order is passing.... The controls of the past were sacred.... Social controls cannot be left to blind chance and unplanned change -- usually attributed to God. Man must be the builder of new forms of social organizations.... Here education must play a stellar role.

(Dan W. Dodson, Professor of Educational Sociology at N. Y. University)

"The school will need to be supplemented by neighbourhood family centres which provide infant care and developmental activity.... Education may well begin at birth in cooperative family centres.

(Francis Chase, Professor Emeritus of the University of Chicago)

"Many daily decisions and value judgments now made by the individual will soon be made for him... How to plan for one's children's education will be partially taken out of his hands. - (John Loughary, Professor of Education at the University of Oregon.

179

"Vital questions of values, beliefs, feelings, emotions and human interrelationships in all forms must be integral parts of the curriculum."

(Arthur Combs, Professor of Education at the University of Florida)

1973. Global Education Associates (GEA) is founded. A publicity brochure for its 1989 conference at Wichita State University describes it as "an international network of men and women in over 70 countries who collaborate in research and educational programs aimed at advancing world peace and security, cooperative economic development, human rights and ecological sustainability."

That may sound good, but the book, Toward a Human World Order, written by GEA founders Gerald and Patricia Mische a few years later, puts their noble intentions into the new-paradigm context of a “world government and global socialism”. "It examines the strait-jacket of the present nation-state system and... explores world order alternatives...."

1974. Alvin Toffler (Newt Gingrich's mentor), Willard Wirtz and other futurists wrote a report issued Institute for Chief State School Officers titled "Man, Education, and Society in the Year 2000." Other CSSO participants were George Bush, James Baker, and Edmund de Rothschild. Funded by HEW's Office of Education, the report concluded that "the 50 states should organize a commission to establish the values that are significant in approaching problems (e.g., population) that must be faced in the future." The summary explained that

"The home, the church and the school cannot be effective maintainers [of society] since the future cannot be predicted... The traditional cluster of knowledge, skills, values and concepts will not help our young face the future in their private life, the international situation.... Perhaps there is a need for the clarification of new values needed to solve future problems."

180

1976. Phi Delta Kappan printed "America's Next 25 Years: Some implications for Education" by Harold Shane, Project Director for the NEA Bicentennial Committee. Notice that Shane used the same buzzwords that characterize Outcome-based Education today:

Rather than adding my voice to those who urge us to go "back to the basics," I would argue that we need to move ahead to new basics... Certainly, cross-cultural understanding and empathy have become fundamental skills of human relations and intercultural rapport... the arts of compromise and reconciliation, of consensus building, and of planning for interdependence, a command of these talents becomes "basics"... As young people mature, we must help them develop... a service ethic which is geared toward the real world... the global servant concept in which we will educate our young for planetary service and eventually for some form of world citizenship.

1976. The Russian book, The Scientific and Technological Revolution and the Revolution in Education, translated and imported to the U.S.A., helped lay the foundation for the philosophy behind Outcome-based Education. Its cover jacket explains that the book "examines the fundamental directions that the revolution in education will take: introduction of teaching machines, instruction from a younger age, linking instruction with productive labour, continuous education... Under socialism, education has become not only the personal affair of every individual, but also a concern of society as a whole." In the book, Vladimir Turchenko wrote that

One of the most important functions of education today is... the preparation of a skilled labour force for the national economy.... A second task... is to ensure the socialization of the younger generation.... A child at the moment of birth is but a biological organism that turns into a person... [through] socialization. Actualization [of education] involves shifting the focus of instruction from memorization to teaching how to think.... In many countries practical steps are being taken to begin education from earliest childhood... The upbringing of the younger generation will become the affair of all.

181

1978. According to Project Global 2000: Planning for a New Century, "Robert Muller and Margaret Mead challenged the people of the world to prepare for the year 2000 by a 'worldwide collaborative process of unparalleled thinking, education and planning for a just and sustainable human world order.'"

1981. Together, the UNESCO, the World Bank, and the Office of Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD) were researching Critical Thinking Skills.(You may want to review the true meaning of Critical Thinking.) The World Bank planned to "increase the Bank's lending for education and training to about $900 million a year."

1981. Professor Benjamin Bloom explained that the International Association for Evaluation of Educational Achievement (IAEEA ) "is an organization of 22 national research centres which are engaged in the study of education. This group has been concerned with the use of international tests.... The evaluation instruments also represent an international consensus on the knowledge and objectives most worth learning."

1983. The Institute for 21st Century Studies was founded by Dr. Gerald O. Barney, ex-director of the U.S. government's The Global 2000 Report (President Carter, 1980) and funded by the Rockefellers, the World Bank, UNESCO... Its mission is "to provide support for the growing international network of 21st Century Study teams," and to "engage participation of communities of education and others... in exploring alternative national futures... examining education and other key areas... adopting a global perspective."

1984. The Robert Muller School in Texas, which uses Muller's World Core Curriculum, was accredited by the Southern Association of Colleges, despite Muller's acknowledgment that his philosophy is based on "the teachings set forth in the books of Alice Bailey by [her spirit guide] the Tibetan teacher, Djwhal Khul." The review team "was so impressed with the Robert Muller School that they thought the educational process and the general curriculum would be most valuable as a model for teacher education... [T]he committee has recommended that information of the school's educational processes be shared with educators everywhere as much as possible."

182

1985. The New Age/globalist book, New Genesis: Shaping a Global Spirituality by Robert Muller who directed the U.N.'s powerful Economic and Social Council, was published. Within a year, it would influence leading educators around the world. (Chapter 2)

1985. The U.S. Department of State gave the Carnegie Corporation "authority to negotiate with the Soviet Academy of Sciences, which is known to be an intelligence-gathering arm of the KGB, regarding 'curriculum development and the restructuring of American education.'" (See the full report by Charlotte Iserbyt)

1985 (November). At a 12-nation international-curriculum symposium held in the Netherlands, Dr. Gordon Cawelti, President of the Association for Supervision and Curriculum Development (ASCD), the curriculum arm of the powerful NEA, urged representatives of 10 other Western nations and Japan to develop a "world core curriculum" built on knowledge that will ensure "peaceful and cooperative existence among the human species on this planet." It would be based on "proposals put forth by Robert Muller, assistant secretary-general of the United Nations, in his recent book New Genesis: Shaping a Global Spirituality."

1987 (March 21-24). Robert Muller was one of the "distinguished lecturers" at ASCD's 42nd Annual Conference and Exhibit Show, "COLLABORA- TION." Muller's topic: "Government and Global Influences on Educational Policy."

1987. In a Washington Post article titled "Experts Say Too Much is Read Into Illiteracy Crisis," Willis Harman and Thomas Sticht (Senior Scientist, Applied Behavioural and Cognitive Sciences, Inc., San Diego and a member of SCANS: Secretary's Commission on Achieving Necessary Skills) explain that

183

Many companies have moved operations to places with cheap, relatively poorly educated labour. What may be crucial, they say, is the dependability of a labour force and how well it can be managed and trained -- not its general educational level, although a small cadre of highly educated creative people are essential to innovation and growth. Ending discrimination and changing values are probably more important than reading in moving low income families into the middle class.

1987. Among the notable members of the Study Commission on Global Education were (then) Governor Bill Clinton, AFT president Albert Shanker, Professor John Goodlad, CFAT (Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching) president Ernest Boyer, and Frank Newman, president of the Education Commission of the States. (In 1995, Newman's commission plays a central role in the implementation of outcome-based education.) Together, they prepared a report titled The United States Prepares for Its Future: Global Perspectives in Education. In the Foreword to the Report, New Age networker Harlan Cleveland, author of The Third Try at World Order, wrote:

A dozen years ago... teaching and learning "in global perspective" was still exotic doctrine, threatening the orthodoxies of those who still thought of American citizenship as an amalgam of American history, American geography, American lifestyles and American ideas.... It now seems almost conventional to speak of American citizenship in the same breath with international interdependence and the planetary environment.

1988 (February 1-5). At a Soviet-American Citizens' Summit, the education task force recommended that the NEA "guide a global computer program." New Ager Barbara Marx Hubbard was one of the summit organizers.

1988 (April 21). Ted Turner and Robert Muller shared a platform at Peace through Education Conference in Arlington, Texas, sponsored by United Nations University for Peace and the Robert Muller School.

1989 (March 10-14). Robert Muller spoke at the ASCD's 44th Annual Conference in Florida. Title: "Educating the Global Citizen: Illuminating the Issues."

184

1989 (July). Eugene, Oregon, School District 4J published its "Integrated Curriculum K-5." Page eleven in this public school curriculum acknowledged that "The three curriculum strands are adapted from the World Core Curriculum by Robert Muller..."

1989 (August 7). UNESCO's Peace Education Prize is awarded to Robert Muller.

1989 (November) - President Bush called the nation's governors together. Education secretary Lamar Alexander, together with governors Bill Clinton and Richard Riley and others, plan the six goals of America 2000. Speaking at this Governor's Conference, Shirley McCune, Senior Director with MCREL (Mid Continent Regional Educational Laboratory, which develops curriculum), says,

What's happening in America today... is a total transformation of our society. We have moved into a new era... I'm not sure we have really begun to comprehend... the incredible amount of organizational restructuring and human resource development restructuring....

What the revolution has been in curriculum is that we no longer are teaching facts to children...."

1989. Howard Gardner, author of the influential, much quoted book, Frames of Mind: The Theory of Multiple Intelligences, wrote To Open Minds: Chinese Clues to the Dilemma of Contemporary Education. In the latter book, he gives a glimpse of the restrictions on human freedom that would accompany the managed economy envisioned by global change agents:

Ultimately, the educational plans that are pursued need to be orchestrated across various interest groups of the society so that they can, taken together, help the society to achieve its larger goals. Individual profiles must be considered in the light of goals pursued by the wider society; and sometimes, in fact, individuals with gifts in certain directions must nonetheless be guided along other, less favoured paths, simply because the needs of the culture are particularly urgent in that realm at that time.

185

1990 (February 23-24). Robert Muller was keynote speaker at a University of North Carolina conference titled Ensuring the Future: Educating for a World of Changes, sponsored by Educators for Social Responsibility and The Centre for Peace Education.

1990. In The Keys of This Blood: The Struggle for World Dominion, Malachi Martin described the trans nationalists' goal that "ideally the same textbooks should be used all over the world in both the hard sciences and the soft curricula. And sure enough, a concrete initiative in this direction has been under way for some years now, undertaken by Informatik, a Moscow-based educational organization, and the Carnegie Endowment Fund...." Martin then explains the new values they will promote:

'Good' will no longer be burdened with a moral or religious colouring. 'Good' will simply be synonymous with 'global.' Else, what's an education for? ... The emphasis is on homogeneity of minds, on the creation and nourishing of a truly global mentality.... We must all become little Trans nationalists.

1990 (March 5-9). The "flagship effort of the new spirit of sharing in education," became reality at the WCEFA (The World Conference on Education for All) in Jomtien, Thailand. Organized by UNESCO, UNICEF, World Bank and other international agents, it established six goals that matched the six goals of America 2000. Echoing promotional literature for America 2000/Goals 2000, the follow-up promotion indicates that the strategies for meeting these goals must be prepared in one package "by year 2000", for they "cannot be implemented successfully on a piecemeal basis."

1990. Project Global 2000 was founded by Global Education Associates (see 1973) in response to the 1978 challenge by Robert Muller and Margaret Mead to prepare for year 2000 by "a worldwide collaborative process of unparalleled thinking, education and planning for a just and sustainable human world order...." It is made up of "sixteen leading international non-governmental organizations and four United Nations Agencies" which work together to establish "Transcultural Dialogue, a Holistic Perspective; A Spiritual Renaissance; Environmental Security; Economic Security and Disarmament."

186

Linking the U.S. Goals 2000 to the international Global 2000, Dr. Dennis Cuddy explains that its Education Council works with educators to integrate World Order Perspectives into [American] curriculum and teacher education. UNESCO and UNICEF, which are Partners with Global 2000, are putting into action the initiatives developed at the World Conference on Education for

All [WCEFA], the largest educational conference ever held... It is very evident that Goals 2000 is only one phase leading to Project Global 2000.

1990. A cross-section of the educational community gathered in Chicago to explore holistic education, resulting in the formation of GATE (Global Alliance for Transforming Education), with Dr. Phil Gang as Executive Director and Dorothy Maver on the Steering Committee. In 1991, GATE printed Education 2000: A Holistic Perspective, which emphasizes multiple intelligences, experi- ential learning and other facets of Outcome-based Education. The document calls for "Educating for Participatory Democracy... for Global Citizenship... for Earth Literacy and Spirituality...." GATE networks with educators across the country, various United Nations organizations, government leaders, citizen groups for social change, the media and others.

1990 (October). Dorothy Maver, a Steering Committee member of GATE, presented a workshop in Sydney, Australia titled, "Creative Esoteric Education." She speaks of "bridging esoteric principles into mainstream education. There's a paradigm shift happening in education.. linking heart and mind... It is the process and not the content that is most important."

Maver is a founder of the Seven Ray Institute, an adjunct faculty member of Kean College in New Jersey. She is Co-Director for the Institute for Visionary Leadership, and is serving on the design team of the U.N.'s Global Education Program for Peace and Universal Responsibility sponsored by Robert Muller's University for Peace.

187

1991. In his introduction to America 2000, Lamar Alexander wrote, "On April 18, 1991, President Bush announced America 2000: An Education Strategy. It is a bold, comprehensive, and long-range plan to move every community in America toward the National Education Goals adopted by the President and the Governors last year." President Bush, who often mentions "new world order," called for "new schools for a new world" in his announcement.

1991 (May). "We've got to revolutionize education. The old answers are not good enough anymore," President Bush told students at the Saturn School of Tomorrow in St. Paul, Minnesota, a national model for educational innovation which proved to be a disaster academically.

1991 (July 8) At the request of President Bush, American business leaders form the New American Schools Development Corporation (NASDC), a private, non-profit, non-partisan organization. Its Board of Directors includes seven Council of Foreign Relations CFR members and five members of the Commit- tee for Economic Development.

"The private sector is charging ahead, helping clear the way for reform," said Education Secretary Lamar Alexander three years later. One of the ways privatization can "clear the way" is by avoiding the accountability due elected officials. As Dr.Hamburg, chief negotiator for the Soviet exchange admitted, “privately endowed foundations can operate in areas government may prefer to avoid."

1991 (August). Referring to Oregon's controversial School-to-Work legislation, Lamar Alexander said on a visit to the model state, "Oregon has taken a pioneering step, and America will be watching and learning."

What would America be learning? The Oregon Education Act for the 21st Century (HB 3565) decreed that all 10th grade students must pass an outcome- based test to earn their Certificate of Initial Mastery (CIM). Those who fail will move on to special Learning Centres.

188

Since people can neither attend college nor be employed without the CIM, the bill implies that home schoolers and students in Christian schools whose responses fail to reflect new global values would also have to be remediated and tested until they conform to state and national standards. This Oregon law parallels a federal School-to Work bill.

1991 (October 30-November 1) The U.S. Coalition for Education for All (USCEFA) held a conference on "Learning for All: Bridging Domestic and International Education," with First Lady Barbara Bush as the "honorary chair." The coalition is part of 156-nation network working to "reform" education worldwide. One of the conference programs is "Education for a New World Order" with keynote speaker Elena Lenskaya, deputy to the Minister of Education of Russia.

1991 (December 4). UNICEF, UNESCO, UNDP and The World Bank convene the International Consultative Forum on Education for All in Paris.

1992. Teachers as Change Agents by Allan Glatthorn was printed. The NEA Professional Library advertised it as: "This 'teacher-friendly' handbook uses research to show how you can take the lead in restructuring classroom instruction, school culture and climate, home-school relationships, and collegial relationships."

1993 (January). The 240 international affiliates of the NEA and the AFT (American Federation of Teachers) joined in Stockholm to form Education International (EI).

1993 (February 11-14). The third annual conference of the National Association for Multicultural Education (NAME) brought together multicultural educators from all 50 states. Keynote speaker Lily Wong Fillmore, a professor of language at the University of California at Berkeley, asserted that the radical curriculum reform they propose will provoke "definite clashes with the practices, beliefs and attitudes that are taught in many homes... No matter what students' parents and families think about others or the environment... we are going to have to inculcate in our children the rules that form a credo that will work for a multicultural 21st century...."

189

1993 (July 2-5). At the annual NEA convention in San Francisco, delegates approved resolutions supporting multicultural/global education, abortion- rights, school-based clinics, legal protection for teachers against censorship, and "early childhood education programs in the public schools for children from birth through age eight."

President Clinton addressed the delegates and assured them that his goals paralleled theirs: "...we have had the partnership I promised in the campaign of 1992, and we will continue to have it... You and I are joined in a common cause, and I believe we will succeed."

1994. The Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching (CFAT) along with the National Association of Secondary School Principals (NASSP) announced that they will appoint a 13-member group to study school reforms to develop a "holistic" plan for U.S. high schools.

1994. The State of South Dakota passed House Bill No. 1262, "an act to require that home school teachers be certified by the year 2000." Neither Chris- tian school teachers nor parents will be able to teach without going through the psychological training required to teach children the new beliefs and attitudes. Home schooled children will take "the same tests designated to be used in the public school district..."

1994. Education Secretary Richard Riley announced his "New Initiative to Connect Families and Schools." He used part of his "State of American Education" address to pave the way for a "new FAMILY INVOLVEMENT CAMPAIGN... [which] will draw on the lessons learned from examining parental practices around the world...."

1994 (April 10-13). The Global Village Schools National Conference opened in Atlanta to explore educational models for the 21st Century. Its publicity flier stated, "In the global village... networks will link students around the world to each other and to a vast body of information and human knowledge." The conference included a televised cross-Atlantic discussion between Washington and Berlin.

190

Education Secretary Richard Riley and Labour Secretary Robert Reich shared strategies for building the Global Village Schools with their German counterparts. They focused on the "School-to-Work transition," which is vital not only to global economics but also in enforcing social transformation.

1994 (June 2-6). The 2nd Annual Model Schools Conference in Atlanta, sponsored by the International Centre for Leadership in Education (ICLE), featured a Chinese boarding school. Su Lin, the founder of the China International Intellectual Resources Development Centre for Children, explained why she recommends her boarding school:

 Most parents are too busy working to pay enough attention to the education of their own children.

 Children from broken homes find comfort. Some prefer not to go home on weekends.

 Uneducated parents know nothing about how to bring up children.

 Children without siblings need to learn a sense of equality, solidarity and independence.

"We have established a school for the parents," said Su Lin, "where people can learn how to educate their own children." (Sounds like a change agent's dream, doesn't it? No wonder American educators were impressed.)

1994 (December 11-14). Educators from around the world gathered in Baltimore for a four-day USCEFA (United States Coalition for Education for All) conference titled Revolution in World Education: "Toward Systemic Change."

The theme highlighted the move toward global as well as community partnerships: "The traditional African belief that 'it takes an entire village to raise a child' is proving increasingly true. As we enter the next century, it may well take an entire nation--or world--to educate our children."

191

The brochure announcing the conference stated: "Nearly five years ago the world came together at the World Conference on Education for All in Jomtien, Thailand to ensure the right to education for all people. Since then, education systems around the world have embarked on significantly different programs of systemic reforms...."

This century-old plan for “socializing” the masses gathered momentum when Julian Huxley, brother of Aldous, was chosen to head UNESCO . Two years later, he wrote a book titled, "UNESCO: Its purpose and Its Philosophy." This 1947 blueprint for change called for a universal implementation of Georg Hegel’s dialectic process:

"The task before UNESCO... is to help the emergence of a single world culture with its own philosophy and background of ideas and with its own broad purpose. This is opportune, since this is the first time in history that the scaffolding and the mechanisms for world unification have become available.... And it is necessary, for at the moment, two opposing philosophies of life confront each other from the West and from the East....

"You may categorize the two philosophies as two super-nationalisms, or as individualism versus collectivism; or as the American versus the Russian way of life, or as capitalism versus communism, or as Christianity versus Marxism. Can these opposites be reconciled, this antithesis be resolved in a higher synthesis? I believe not only that this can happen, but that, through the inexorable dialectic of evolution, it must happen....

"In pursuing this aim, we must eschew dogma - whether it be theological dogma or Marxist dogma.... East and West will not agree on a basis of the future if they merely hurl at each other the fixed ideas of the past. For that is what dogma's are -- the crystallizations of some dominant system of thought of a particular epoch.

192

A dogma may of course crystallize tried and valid experience; but if it be dogma, it does so in a way which is rigid, uncompromising and intolerant.... If we are to achieve progress, we must learn to un-crystallize our dogmas." Julian Huxley, UNESCO: Its purpose and Its Philosophy (Washington DC: Public Affairs Press, 1947), page 61. http://www.unesco.org/new/fileadmin/MULTIMEDIA/HQ/CI/CI/pdf/strategy_ microsoft_agreement.pdf

2004. Cooperation Agreement between The United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO) [fits all the characteristics of Common Core) and Microsoft Corporation represented by its Chairman and Chief Software Architect, Bill Gates....

Whereas: The United Nations... UNESCO) promotes international cooperation among its Member States in the fields of education, sciences, culture and communication. As a specialized UN agency, it has a mission to mobilize resources, review approaches and build up multilateral action in order to contribute to peace and security by promoting collaboration among nations through education, science, culture and communication;

Whereas: Microsoft Corporation is a company whose mission is to enable people and businesses throughout the world to realize their full potential through the use of innovative information technology. As an international corporate citizen of conscience, it is committed to initiatives throughout the world that seek to create social change and to expand opportunities through greater access to technology;

Whereas: UNESCO is participating in the building of an international strategic partnership to bridge the digital divide and establish open and inclusive knowledge societies. It seeks to use “Information and Communication Technologies (ICTs)” and information to accelerate social and economic development, acting through the collaboration of a range of stakeholders;

193

Whereas: In this context, UNESCO recognizes the significant contribution that can be made by the private sector to these strategic objectives and is therefore actively promoting and guiding relationships with a variety of private sector stakeholders, including various companies in the ICT industries. UNESCO’s intention is to mobilize partners from civil society and, in particular, for the private sector to achieve its strategic goals and programme priorities;

Whereas : Microsoft supports the objectives of UNESCO as stipulated in UNESCO Constitution and intends to contribute to UNESCO's programme priorities;

Whereas: The Parties entered into, on 25 January 2004, a Letter of Intent stating their intention to collaborate on a variety of activities in support of the common objectives of UNESCO's and Microsoft's government, education and community programmers. Their Agreement seeks to build on that Letter of Intent and provide a framework to achieve the objectives expressed by the Parties;

Whereas: UNESCO and Microsoft entered into a regional agreement on 18 May 2004 for Latin America and the Caribbean to provide a framework under which UNESCO may access the Microsoft Partners in Learning Programmed in that region (known as the "OREALC Agreement");

Whereas: UNESCO and Microsoft with to explore possibilities for collaboration in several areas, including education and learning, community access and development and facilitating software appreciation sharing, cultural and linguistic diversity, digital inclusion and capacity building, as well as the exchange of best policies in the area of mainstreaming “ICT into socio- economic development programs”;

194

UNESCO and Microsoft hereby agree as follows: Article 1 - Objectives

UNESCO and Microsoft recognize the importance of harnessing the use of ICT for education and community development programmers as a means of improving sustainable livelihood in developing countries. As part of their common understanding, both Parties recognizes that analysing possibilities to align global and regional initiatives, as well as programmers, can enhance mutual efforts to build capacities, foster the diversity of ideas and empower people thorough participation in web communities and through their ability to access information and ICT.

Article 2 -- Scope of Agreement This agreement establishes a strategic framework with which the Parties agree to cooperate to achieve the stated objects.... (This agreement is signed by the two parties.)

Article 3 - Areas of Cooperation

UNESCO and Microsoft have identified the following areas where their cooperation and partnership can provide significant benefits to society and communities everywhere, but especially in “developing countries”:

Education and learning Community access and development Cultural and linguistic diversity and preservation Digital inclusion and capacity building...

Article 4 -- Initial projects and initiatives. .... In the field of education and learning: - (1) UNESCO believes that ICT has a major contribution to make in supporting teachers and teaching, particularly if the technology can be integrated into instructional design, planning, pedagogy and the other critical components of effective learning and teaching.... Together, UNESCO and Microsoft aspire for there to be a quantum leap in the quality of courses and in accelerating their uptake by educationalist and teacher training institutions through the availability of standard, guidelines or benchmarks....

195

Microsoft will be one of the founding members of UNESCO's multi-stake holder initiative to improve the quality and availability of teacher training on using ICT. Microsoft will collaborate with UNESCO on the Syllabus by drawing on Microsoft's experience in designing ICT product and services for use by educationalist.... (UNESCO Knowledge Communities - building web communities of practise.... (“Information and Communication Technologies (ICTs)”)

UNESCO’s work on building knowledge societies recognizes the great importance of "community" and the power of "communicating." ICTs make it possible to connect collaborative people and spaces -- to build "web-based communities of practice” that will foster the exchange of know-how and sharing of experiences....

In particular, UNESCO will bring together international and national experts and stakeholders to develop content, best practices, share tools, mobilize interested parties, and to suggest solutions and strategies to address critical issues.

Initially UNESCO will build and moderate a suite of knowledge communities that will develop capacities around the themes of 'Technology Solutions in Education', 'Multilingualism in Cyberspace' and 'Information for All.' ....

"So where are we?" asks Charlotte Iserbyt. "All is in place except for 'universal' education. That means that home schoolers, independent, private, religious schools must somehow be coerced into the international system. How to accomplish that? Heat up the debate over OBE, publish outrageous outcomes, get the controlled media to beat the drums about how bad public education is, send home obscene surveys for elementary school children to fill out, turn parents against teachers, teachers against administrators, administrators against State Superintendents, State Superintendents against Congress; and saddest of all, parents against parents.

In other words, create the problem, impose the solution....

196

The soil has been tilled; the seeds have been planted. We now await the blossoming of what John Dewey and his followers have mightily striven for since the early nineteen hundreds: universal socialist/internationalist education for the world government's planned economy.

Without the peace and hope which God offers every person who will trusts Him, we might be tempted to give up. Please don't. We are on the winning team, for our God reigns! He has already won the war. To put this disturbing information into a biblical perspective, remember Psalm 2:

"Why do the heathen rage, and the people imagine a vain thing? The kings of the earth set themselves, and the rulers take counsel together, against the LORD, and against his anointed, saying, Let us break their bands asunder, and cast away their cords from us.

"He that sits in the heavens shall laugh: the Lord shall have them in derision. Then shall he speak to them in his wrath... "I have set my king upon my holy hill.... Blessed are all they that put their trust in him." (Psalm 2:1-6, 12)

197

The Mind-Changing Dialectic Process

Training the masses to think collectively and Serving the Greater Whole http://www.unesco.org/new/fileadmin/MULTIMEDIA/HQ/CI/CI/pdf/strategy_microsoft_agr eement.pdf

Cooperation Agreement between The United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO) [fits all the characteristics of Common Core) and Microsoft Corporation represented by its Chairman and Chief Software Architect, Bill Gates....

Whereas: The United Nations... UNESCO) promotes international co-operation among its Member States in the fields of education, sciences, culture and communication. As a specialized UN agency, it has a mission to mobilize resources, review approaches and build up multilateral action in order to contribute to peace and security by promoting collaboration among nations through education, science, culture and communication;

Whereas: UNESCO is participating in the building of an international strategic partnership to bridge the digital divide and establish open and inclusive knowledge societies. It seeks to use Information and Communication Technologies (ICTs) and information to accelerate social and economic development, acting through the collaboration of a range of stakeholders;

198

Whereas: In this context, UNESCO recognizes the significant contribution that can be made by the private sector to these strategic objectives and is therefore actively promoting and guiding relationships with a variety of private sector stakeholders, including various companies in the ICT industries. UNESCO's intention is to mobilize partners from civil society and, in particular, for the private sector to achieve its strategic goals and programme priorities;

Whereas : Microsoft supports the objectives of UNESCO as stipulated in UNESCO Constitution and intends to contribute to UNESCO's programme priorities;

Whereas: UNESCO and Microsoft with to explore possibilities for collaboration in several areas, including education and learning, community access and development and facilitating software appreciation sharing, cultural and linguistic diversity, digital inclusion and capacity building, as well as the exchange of best policies in the area of mainstreaming ICT into socio- economic development programs;

199

Part Does your 'Mental Health' 1:Legalizing Meet global standards? Mind Part 2: Justifying Mind Control Control Recent history of the "prevention" side of "Mental Health" Novus Ordo by Berit Kjos, 2003 Seclorum

New Order of the Ages

"Americans today are being deluged with...proposals by federal, state, and local governments classified under the broad general and disarmingly innocent title of 'The Mental Health Program.'... Mental Robots

"...absolute behaviour control is imminent.... The critical point of behaviour control, in effect, is sneaking up on mankind without his self-conscious realization that a crisis is at hand. Man will... never self-consciously know that it has happened." Raymond Houghton, ASCD (curriculum arm of the NEA), 1970

"An Iceberg presents only one tenth of its deadly mass above the ocean’s surface," wrote Dr. Alesen in Mental Robots (1960). "So it is with this pernicious so-called mental health program." Alesen, a former surgeon who served as president of the California Medical Association in the 1950s, went on to describe the growing web of government control aimed at eliminating "barriers" to global oneness.

His conclusion? The revolutionary pioneers in the global "mental health" movement showed little concern for the standard forms of mental illness. Instead, their "therapy" would target the sick masses of humanity -- with the main focus on the misguided individuals who take their stand on the uncompromising truths of the Bible.

200

Their mass psychology has already changed our world. Have you wondered why we suddenly live in a "postmodern" world with little tolerance toward truth or traditional authorities? Or why France, Sweden and Canada are banning offensive Scriptures? Or why traditional morality means nothing to today's consensus-trained youth? [See "Ban truth; Reap Tyranny"]

The war against Christian symbols and holidays may be the most obvious symptom. God has been banned from Christmas celebrations, art projects, seasonal songs and American history. Even a first-grader's personal prayer has led to ridicule and reproof. How did this nation slide so far from its foundations?

Part of the answer is found in the new usage of a familiar word: "prevention." Decades ago, humanist visionaries twisted its focus 180 degrees. No longer directed against sexual immorality and occult seductions, "prevention" would instead open the door to forbidden thrills by blocking interference from old-fashioned parents, pastors and teachers.

In other words, prevention would be a key to social control and communal transformation. Just as the U.S. Homeland Security department uses the word prevention to justify extensive surveillance of ordinary citizens, so our U.S. Departments of Health and Human Services (DHHS) and Education (DOE) -- and their global partners-- use prevention to mould the views and values of our children.

"[Our objective] will require a change in the prevailing culture--the attitudes, values, norms and accepted ways of doing things," said Marc Tucker, the master-mind behind today's global school-to-work system.

Remember (from Part 1) the words of Dr. Brock Chisholm, the first head of the World Health Organization (WHO). He laid the blame for war and human conflict squarely at the feet of parents and Sunday schools teachers who -- from the beginning -- fed their children the "poisonous certainties" of the Bible. An active Unitarian who despised God's truths, he asked a suggestive question:

201

"Can we identify the reasons why we fight wars...? Many of them are easy to list --prejudice, isolationism, the ability to emotionally and uncritically believe unreasonable things....

"When the other [infectious diseases] were attacked at the preventative level, some martyrs had to be sacrificed to the cause of humanity, because reactionary forces fought back. Ignorance, superstition, moral certainties... resisted through anti-reform organizations, religious and political pressure groups, even political parties."

Chisholm's friend, Alger Hiss, agreed. In 1948, the infamous Soviet spy published Chisholm's message on mental health in his socialist journal, International Conciliation. Hiss, then president of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, added his own Preface which showed the involvement of the Rockefeller Foundation in the mental health movement.

Earlier, another loyal friend had launched a new journal called Psychiatry, which would gain immense prestige by the end of the century. Its owner, US psychiatrist Harry Stack Sullivan, also published Chisholm's message.

Dr. Sullivan and Dr. Chisholm had been working closely with the British Brigadier-General John Rawlings Rees. Dr. Rees had helped found the Tavistock Institute of Medical Psychology, the birthplace of the infamous Tavistock Institute for Human Relations [See "Brainwashing in America"]. As military officers, all three had been involved in psychological research using their respective armies. All wanted to know how conflict, fear and psychological trauma could be used to manage large human populations.

The three psychiatrists represented three nations -- the UK, USA and Canada. Together, they mapped the course for the world's mental health management system by the light of their own socialist vision of global conformity.

202

Dr. Rees had envisioned a global NGO (non-governmental organization) that would network with political and civic leaders around the world. His leadership led to the birth of the World Federation for Mental Health (WFMH) in 1948.

It would "enjoy consultative relationship with several UN agencies and... national groups" but remain free from government oversight. Its purpose: "To promote among all peoples and nations the highest possible level of mental health... in its broadest biological, medical, educational, and social aspects."

Dr. Chisholm, Margaret Mead (the federation’s second president) and other social scientists from ten countries wrote its founding document, "Mental Health and World Citizenship." Notice their attitude toward traditional values:

"Studies of human development indicate the modifiability of human behaviour throughout life, especially during infancy, childhood and adolescence.... The social sciences and psychiatry also offer a better understanding of the great obstacles to rapid progress in human affairs....

"Social institutions such as family and school impose their imprint early.... It is the men and women in whom these patterns of attitude and behaviour have been incorporated who present the immediate resistance to social, economic and political changes. Thus, prejudice, hostility or excessive nationalism may become deeply embedded in the developing personality... often at great human cost....

"...change will be strongly resisted unless an attitude of acceptance has first been engendered."

Today, more than half a century later, that "attitude of acceptance" has been built. Nations around the world are fast conforming to the pattern set in the 1940s. The global network of "mental health" partners is working to prevent anything that would hinder "positive" collective thinking in the rising global village. Few notice its tentacles reaching into community health programs and civil society in over 130 nations around the world.

203

Pushed by this massive system, our communities are changing fast. Ismail Serageldin, Vice President of the World Bank, calls cities "the vectors of social change and transformation" and so they are. That's where schools, health agencies, private institutions, the media, social activists and other members of "civil society" strive together to promote "progress" and to produce "world citizens" for the envisioned 21st century community. [See "The Habitat II Agenda"]

Mass immigration (planned back in the 1940s) and multicultural conflicts have added to the urgency, and the intentional crisis has helped promote pre-planned solutions. Today, strategies for social change such as group thinking, conflict resolution, consensus building and continual compromise are becoming the norm. All are based on the dialectic process used in the former Soviet Union to conform minds to Soviet ideology.

Small wonder Dr. Satcher, former U.S. Surgeon General, showed special interest mental health. "No priority yet has generated as much interest and enthusiasm as this one on mental health," he announced in 1998. "...our efforts will be focused on maintaining a system of global health surveillance."

Dr. Richard Carmona, the new U.S. Surgeon General appointed by President George W. Bush, seems to be following the same plan. In a speech at the American Psychological Association's 2003 Annual Convention in Toronto, he asked for help in raising "the public's mental health literacy."

"Until we can say the words 'public health' and everybody thinks of that as including mental health, we will not have a complete health-care system," Dr. Carmona told the crowd of psychologists. "I won't be satisfied until we achieve parity."

"My agenda is prevention," Cardona informed the U.S. National Institute on Health. "We need to become a prevention-oriented society — one that accepts social responsibility, makes good decisions. Things like not smoking, increasing physical activity and eliminating risky behaviours are very simple, cost-effective measures that can have a huge impact on our society.

204

After all, the lifestyles that we are creating today are what our children and grandchildren will inherit."

His argument rings true. Good medical doctors naturally encourage prevention. They would want their patients to maintain their health and strength. But when globalist "change agents" step into the picture with their psycho-social strategies -- calling their agenda "prevention" in order to gain your approval -- they bring oppression instead of peace.

Cardona mentioned positive life-style changes such as exercise and not smoking. Those are good suggestions. But when government officials assume the right to guide our personal lives, where else might they lead us?

Could they mandate participation in the consensus process through government-funded "service learning" and other manipulative "lifelong learning" programs? Actually, it's already happening -- just as it happened in the Soviet Union long ago.

Under the new system, noncompliant individuals would be caught and disciplined, for the web of surveillance and remediation is becoming virtually inescapable. In Part 1, you saw that President Bush's "Freedom Commission on Mental Health" would involve continual assessments and monitoring of human resources. Children classified as loners, independent thinkers, poor or uncooperative team members (unwilling to conform to the group) would be "at risk" of mandatory remediation. Ultimately, all people and institutions would be held accountable to the intrusive national and international standards for positive mental health.

Promoted as prevention, such controls might even seem right. After all, it's for the "common good." And (as you will see in Part 3) in a world dulled by feel-good thrills and the sensual seductions of the media, the masses will barely notice the loss of their freedom.

205

"...the time will come when they will not endure sound doctrine, but according to their own desires, because they have itching ears, they will heap up for themselves teachers; and they will turn their ears away from the truth, and be turned aside to fables.

"But you be watchful in all things, endure afflictions, do the work of an evangelist, fulfil your ministry." 2 Timothy 4:3-5

206

New Eugenics and the Rise of the Global Scientific Dictatorship The Technological Revolution and the Future of Freedom, Part 3 By Andrew Gavin Marshall Global Research, July 05, 2010 Region: USA Theme: Science and Medicine

This is the third and final part of the series, “The Technological Revolution and the Future of Freedom.”

Part 1: The Global Political Awakening and the New World Order

Part 2: Revolution and Repression in America

Introduction

We are in the midst of the most explosive development in all of human history. Humanity is experiencing a simultaneously opposing and conflicting geopolitical transition, the likes of which has never before been anticipated or experienced. Historically, the story of humanity has been the struggle between the free-thinking individual and structures of power controlled by elites that seek to dominate land, resources and people.

207

The greatest threat to elites at any time – historically and presently – is an awakened, critically thinking and politically stimulated populace. This threat has manifested itself throughout history, in different places and at different times. Ideas of freedom, democracy, civil and human rights, liberty and equality have emerged in reaction and opposition to power structures and elite systems of control.

The greatest triumphs of the human mind – whether in art, science or thought – have arisen out of and challenged great systems of power and control. The greatest of human misery and tragedy has arisen out of the power structures and systems that elites always seek to construct and manage. War, genocide, persecution and human degradation are directly the result of decisions made by those who control the apparatus of power, whether the power manifests itself as intellectual, ecclesiastical, spiritual, militaristic, or scientific. The most malevolent and ruthless power is that over the free human mind: if one controls how one thinks, they control the individual itself. The greatest human achievements are where individuals have broken free the shackles that bind the mind and let loose the inherent and undeniable power that lies in each and every individual on this small little planet.

Currently, our world is at the greatest crossroads our species has ever experienced. We are in the midst of the first truly global political awakening, in which for the first time in all of human history, all of mankind is politically awakened and stirring; in which whether inadvertently or intentionally, people are thinking and acting in political terms. This awakening is most evident in the developing world, having been made through personal experience to be acutely aware of the great disparities, disrespect, and domination inherent in global power structures. The awakening is spreading increasingly to the west itself, as the majority of the people living in the western developed nations are thrown into poverty and degradation. The awakening will be forced upon all people all over the world. Nothing, no development, ever in human history, has posed such a monumental threat to elite power structures.

208

This awakening is largely driven by the Technological Revolution, which through technology and electronics, in particular mass media and the internet, have made it so that people across the world are able to become aware of global issues and gain access to information from around the world. The Technological Revolution, thus, has fostered an Information Revolution which has, in turn, fed the global political awakening.

Simultaneously, the Technological Revolution has led to another unique and unprecedented development in human history, and one that is diametrically opposed, yet directly related to the global political awakening. For the first time in human history, free humanity is faced with the dominating threat of truly global elite, who have at their hands the technology to impose a truly global system of control: “a global scientific dictatorship”. The great danger is that through the exponential growth in scientific techniques, elites will use these great new powers to control and dominate all of humanity in such a way that has never before been experienced.

Through all of human history, tyrants have used coercive force and terror to control populations. With the Technological Revolution, elites increasingly have the ability to control the very biology and psychology of the individual to a point where it may not be necessary to impose a system of terror, but rather where the control is implemented on a much deeper, psychological, subliminal and individual biological manner. While terror can prevent people from opposing power for a while, the “scientific dictatorship” can create a personal psycho-social condition in which the individual comes to love his or her own slavery; in which, like a mentally inferior pet, they are made to love their leaders and accept their servitude.

So we are presented with a situation in which humanity is faced with both the greatest threat and the greatest hope that we have ever collectively experienced in our short human history. This essay, the third part in the series, “The Technological Revolution and the Future of Freedom,” examines the ideas behind the “global scientific dictatorship”, and how it may manifest itself presently and in the future, with a particular focus on the emergence of ‘new eugenics’ as a system of mass control.

209

We can either find a true freedom, or descend into a deep despotism. We are not powerless before this great ideational beast. We have, at our very fingertips the ability to use technology to our benefit and to re-shape the world so that it benefits the people of the world and not simply the powerful. It must be freedom for all or freedom for none.

What is the ‘Scientific Dictatorship’?

In 1932, Aldous Huxley wrote his dystopian novel, “Brave New World,” in which he looked at the emergence of “the scientific dictatorships” of the future. In his 1958 essay, “Brave New World Revisited,” Huxley examined how far the world had come in that short period since his book was published, and where the world was heading. Huxley wrote that:

In politics the equivalent of a fully developed scientific theory or philosophical system is a totalitarian dictatorship. In economics, the equivalent of a beautifully composed work of art is the smoothly running factory in which the workers are perfectly adjusted to the machines. The Will to Order can make tyrants out of those who merely aspire to clear up a mess. The beauty of tidiness is used as a justification for despotism.

Huxley explained that, “The future dictator’s subjects will be painlessly regimented by a corps of highly trained social engineers,” and he quotes one “advocate of this new science” as saying that, “The challenge of social engineering in our time is like the challenge of technical engineering fifty years ago. If the first half of the twentieth century was the era of technical engineers, the second half may well be the era of social engineers.”

210

Thus, proclaims Huxley, “The twenty-first century, I suppose, will be the era of World Controllers, the scientific caste system and Brave New World.”

In 1952, Bertrand Russell, a British philosopher, historian, mathematician, and social critic wrote the book, “The Impact of Science on Society,” in which he warned and examined how science, and the technological revolution, was changing and would come to change society. In his book, Russell explained that:

I think the subject which will be of most importance politically is mass psychology. Mass psychology is, scientifically speaking, not a very advanced study… This study is immensely useful to practical men, whether they wish to become rich or to acquire the government. It is, of course, as a science, founded upon individual psychology, but hitherto it has employed rule-of- thumb methods which were based upon a kind of intuitive common sense. Its importance has been enormously increased by the growth of modern methods of propaganda. Of these the most influential is what is called ‘education’. Religion plays a part, though a diminishing one; the Press, the cinema and the radio play an increasing part.

What is essential in mass psychology is the art of persuasion. If you compare a speech of Hitler’s with a speech of (say) Edmund Burke, you will see what strides have been made in the art since the eighteenth century. What went wrong formerly was that people had read in books that man is a rational animal, and framed their arguments on this hypothesis. We now know that limelight and a brass band do more to persuade than can be done by the most elegant train of syllogisms. It may be hoped that in time anybody will be able to persuade anybody of anything if he can catch the patient young and is provided by the State with money and equipment. This subject will make great strides when it is taken up by scientists under a scientific dictatorship.

211

Russell went on to analyse the question of whether a ‘scientific dictatorship’ is more stable than a democracy, on which he postulated:

Apart from the danger of war, I see no reason why such a regime should be unstable. After all, most civilised and semi-civilised countries known to history have had a large class of slaves or serfs completely subordinate to their owners. There is nothing in human nature that makes the persistence of such a system impossible. And the whole development of scientific technique has made it easier than it used to be to maintain a despotic rule of a minority. When the government controls the distribution of food, its power is absolute so long as it can count on the police and the armed forces. And their loyalty can be secured by giving them some of the privileges of the governing class. I do not see how any internal movement of revolt can ever bring freedom to the oppressed in a modern scientific dictatorship.

Drawing on the concept popularized by Aldous Huxley – of people loving their servitude – Bertrand Russell explained that under a scientific dictatorship:

It is to be expected that advances in physiology and psychology will give governments much more control over individual mentality than they now have even in totalitarian countries. Fichte lay it down that education should aim at destroying free will, so that, after pupils have left school, they shall be incapable, throughout the rest of their lives, of thinking or acting otherwise than as their schoolmasters would have wished… Diet, injections, and injunctions will combine, from a very early age, to produce the sort of character and the sort of beliefs that the authorities consider desirable, and any serious criticism of the powers that be will become psychologically impossible. Even if all are miserable, all will believe themselves happy, because the government will tell them that they are so.

Russell explained that, “The completeness of the resulting control over opinion depends in various ways upon scientific technique. Where all children go to school, and all schools are controlled by the government, the authorities can close the minds of the young to everything contrary to official orthodoxy.”

212

Russell later proclaimed in his book that, “a scientific world society cannot be stable unless there is a “world government”.” He elaborated:

Unless there is a “world government” which secures universal birth control, there must be from time to time great wars, in which the penalty of defeat is widespread death by starvation. That is exactly the present state of the world, and some may hold that there is no reason why it should not continue for centuries. I do not myself believe that this is possible. The two great wars that we have experienced have lowered the level of civilization in many parts of the world, and the next is pretty sure to achieve much more in this direction. Unless, at some stage, one power or group of powers emerges victorious and proceeds to establish a single government of the world with a monopoly of armed force, it is clear that the level of civilization must continually decline until scientific warfare becomes impossible – that is until science is extinct.

Russell explains that eugenics plays a central feature in the construction of any world government scientific dictatorship, stating that, “Gradually, by selective breeding, the congenital differences between rulers and ruled will increase until they become almost different species. A revolt of the plebs would become as unthinkable as an organized insurrection of sheep against the practice of eating mutton.”

In a 1962 speech at UC Berkeley, Aldous Huxley spoke about the real world becoming the ‘Brave New World’ nightmare he envisaged. Huxley spoke primarily of the ‘Ultimate Revolution’ that focuses on ‘behavioural controls’ of people. Huxley said of the ‘Ultimate Revolution’:

In the past, we can say, that all revolutions have essentially aimed at changing the environment in order to change the individual. There’s been the political revolution, the economic revolution . . . the religious revolution. All these aimed as I say not directly at the human being but at his surroundings, so by modifying his surroundings you did achieve – at one remove – an effect upon the human being.

213

Today, we are faced, I think, with the approach of what may be called the ‘Ultimate Revolution’ – the ‘Final Revolution’ – where man can act directly on the mind-body of his fellows. Well needless to say some kind of direct action on human mind-bodies has been going on since the beginning of time, but this has generally been of a violent nature. The techniques of terrorism have been known from time immemorial, and people have employed them with more-or- less ingenuity, sometimes with utmost crudity, sometimes with a good deal of skill acquired with a process of trial and error – finding out what the best ways of using torture, imprisonments, constraints of various kinds . . .

If you are going to control any population for any length of time, you must have some measure of consent. It’s exceedingly difficult to see how pure terrorism can function indefinitely, it can function for a fairly long time; but sooner or later you have to bring in an element of persuasion, an element of getting people to consent to what is happening to them.

Well it seems to me the nature of the Ultimate Revolution with which we are now faced is precisely this: that we are in process of developing a whole series of techniques, which will enable the controlling oligarchy – who have always existed and will presumably always exist – to get people to love their servitude. This is the ultimate in malevolent revolution…

There seems to be a general movement in the direction of this kind of Ultimate Control, this method of control, by which people can be made to enjoy a state of affairs by which any decent standard they ought not to enjoy; the enjoyment of servitude . . .

I am inclined to think that the scientific dictatorships of the future – and I think there are going to be “scientific dictatorships” in many parts of the world – will be probably a good deal nearer to the “Brave New World” pattern than to the 1984 pattern. They will be a good deal nearer, not because of any humanitarian qualms in the scientific dictators, but simply because the ‘brave new world’ pattern is probably a good deal more efficient than the other.

214

That if you can get people to consent to the state of affairs in which they are living – the state of servitude – if you can do this, then you are likely to have a much more stable, a much more lasting society; much more easily controllable society than you would if you were relying wholly on clubs, and firing squads and concentration camps.

In 1961, President Eisenhower delivered his farewell address to the nation in which he warned of the dangers to democracy posed by the military- industrial complex: the interconnected web of industry, the military, and politics creating the conditions for constant war. In that same speech, Eisenhower warned America and the world of another important change in society:

Today, the solitary inventor, tinkering in his shop, has been overshadowed by task forces of scientists in laboratories and testing fields. In the same fashion, the free university, historically the fountainhead of free ideas and scientific discovery has experienced a revolution in the conduct of research. Partly because of the huge costs involved, a government contract becomes virtually a substitute for intellectual curiosity. For every old blackboard there are now hundreds of new electronic computers.

The prospect of domination of the nation’s scholars by Federal employment, project allocations, and the power of money is ever present – and is gravely to be regarded. Yet, in holding scientific research and discovery in respect, as we should, we must also be alert to the equal and opposite danger that public policy could itself become the captive of scientific-technological elite.

In 1970, Zbigniew Brzezinski wrote about “the gradual appearance of a more controlled and directed society,” in the “technetronic revolution”; explaining:

Such a society would be dominated by elite whose claim to political power would rest on allegedly superior scientific know-how. Unhindered by the restraints of traditional liberal values, these elite would not hesitate to achieve its political ends by using the latest modern techniques for public behaviour and keeping society under close surveillance and control.

215

Under such circumstances, the scientific and technological momentum of the country would not be reversed but would actually feed on the situation it exploits.

New Eugenics

Many sciences and large social movements are directed by the same foundations and money that financed the eugenics movement in the early 20th century. The Rockefeller foundations, Ford, Carnegie, Mellon, Harriman, and Morgan money that flowed into eugenics led directly to ‘scientific racism,’ and ultimately the Holocaust in World War II.

Following the Holocaust, Hitler had discredited the eugenics movement he admired so much in America. So the movement branched off into forming several other social engineering projects: population control, genetics, and environmentalism. The same foundations that laid the foundations for eugenic ideology – the belief in a biological superiority and right to rule (justifying their power) – then laid the foundations for these and other new social and scientific movements.

Major environmental and conservation organizations were founded with Rockefeller and Ford Foundation money, which then continued to be Central sources of funding to this day; while the World Wildlife Fund (WWF) was founded in 1961 by Sir Julian Huxley, Aldous Huxley’s brother, who was also the President of the British Eugenics Society. Prince Bernhard of the Netherlands became the organization’s first president. Prince Bernhard also happened to be one of the founders of the elite global think tank, the Bilderberg Group, which he co-founded in 1954; and he was previous to that, a member of the Nazi Party and an SS officer. Sir Julian Huxley also happened to be the first Director-General of the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organisation (UNESCO). In 1946, Huxley wrote a paper titled, “UNESCO: It’s Purpose and its Philosophy.” In it, he wrote that the general focus of UNESCO:

216

Is to help the emergence of a single world culture, with its own philosophy and background of ideas, and with its own broad purpose. This is opportune, since this is the first time in history that the scaffolding and the mechanisms for world unification have become available, and also the first time that man has had the means (in the shape of scientific discovery and its applications) of laying a world-wide foundation for the minimum physical welfare of the entire human species.

At the moment, it is probable that the indirect effect of civilisation is dysgenic instead of eugenic; and in any case it seems likely that the dead weight of genetic stupidity, physical weakness, mental instability, and disease-proneness, which already exist in the human species, will prove too great a burden for real progress to be achieved. Thus even though it is quite true that any radical eugenic policy will be for many years politically and psychologically impossible, it will be important for UNESCO to see that the eugenic problem is examined with the greatest care, and that the public mind is informed of the issues at stake so that much that now is unthinkable may at least become thinkable.

Still another and quite different type of borderline subject is that of eugenics. It has been on the borderline between the scientific and the unscientific, constantly in danger of becoming a pseudo- science based on preconceived political ideas or on assumptions of racial or class superiority and inferiority. It is, however, essential that eugenics should be brought entirely within the borders of science, for, as already indicated, in the not very remote future the problem of improving the average quality of human beings is likely to become urgent; and this can only be accomplished by applying the findings of a truly scientific eugenics.

It is worth pointing out that the applications of science at once bring us up against social problems of various sorts. Some of these are direct and obvious. Thus the application of genetics in eugenics immediately raises the question of values- what qualities should we desire to encourage in the human beings of the future?

217

On page 6 of the UNESCO document, Sir Julian Huxley wrote that, “in order to carry out its work, an organisation such as UNESCO needs not only a set of general aims and objects for itself, but also a working philosophy, a working hypothesis concerning human existence and its aims and objects, which will dictate, or at least indicate, a definite line of approach to its problems.” While much of the language of equality and education sounds good and benevolent, it is based upon a particular view of humanity as an irrational, emotionally driven organism which needs to be controlled. Thus, the ‘principle of equality’ becomes “The Fact of Inequality”:

Finally we come to a difficult problem-that of discovering how we can reconcile our principle of human equality with the biological fact of human inequality… The democratic principle of equality, which is also UNESCO’S, is a principle of equality of opportunity-that human beings should be equal before the law, should have equal opportunities for education, for making a living, for freedom of expression and movement and thought. The biological absence of equality, on the other hand, concerns the natural endowments of man and the fact of genetic difference in regard to them.

There are instances of biological inequality which are so gross that they cannot be reconciled at all with the principle of equal opportunity. Thus low-grade mental defectives cannot be offered equality of educational opportunity, nor are the insane equal with the sane before the law or in respect of most freedoms. However, the full implications of the fact of human inequality have not often been drawn and certainly need to be brought out here, as they are very relevant to UNESCO’S task.

Many of these “genetic inequalities” revolve around the idea of intellectual superiority: the idea that there is no equality among the intellectually inferior and superior. That inequality is derived from human biology – from genetics; it is a “human fact.” It just so happens that elites who propagate this ideology, also happen to view the masses as intellectually inferior; thus, there can be no social equality in a world with a technological intellectual elite.

218

So eugenics must be employed, as the UENSCO paper explains, to address the issues of raising human welfare to a manageable level; that the time will come where elites will need to address the whole of humanity as a single force, and with a single voice. Eugenics is about the social organization and control of humanity. Ultimately, eugenics is about the engineering of inequality. In genetics, elites found a way to take discrimination down to the DNA.

Genetics as Eugenics

Award-winning author and researcher, Edwin Black, wrote an authoritative history of eugenics in his book, “War Against the Weak,” in which he explained that, “the incremental effort to transform eugenics into human genetics forged an entire worldwide infrastructure,” with the founding of the Institute for Human Genetics in Copenhagen in 1938, led by Tage Kemp, a Rockefeller Foundation eugenicist, and was financed with money from the Rockefeller Foundation. While not abandoning the eugenics goals, the new re-branded eugenics movement “claimed to be eradicating poverty and saving the environment.”

In a 2001 issue of Science Magazine, Garland Allen, a scientific historian, wrote about genetics as a modern form of eugenics. He began by citing a 1998 article in Time Magazine which proclaimed that, “Personality, temperament, even life choices. New studies show it’s mostly in your genes.” Garland explains the implications:

Coat-tailing on major advances in genetic biotechnology, these articles portray genetics as the new “magic bullet” of biomedical science that will solve many of our recurrent social problems. The implication is that these problems are largely a result of the defective biology of individuals or even racial or ethnic groups. If aggressive or violent behaviour is in the genes, so the argument goes, then the solution lies in biomedical intervention–gene therapy in the distant future and pharmacotherapy (replacing the products of defective genes with drug substitutes) in the immediate future.

219

By promoting such claims, are we heading toward a new version of eugenics? Are we getting carried away with the false promise of a technological fix for problems that really lie in the structure of our society? My answer to these questions is “yes,” but with some important qualifications that derive from the different historical and social contexts of the early 1900s and the present…

The term eugenics was coined in 1883 by the Victorian polymath Francis Galton, geographer, statistician, and first cousin of Charles Darwin. It meant to him “truly- or well-born,” and referred to a plan to encourage the “best people” in society to have more children (positive eugenics) and to discourage or prevent the “worst elements” of society from having many, if any, children (negative eugenics). Eugenics became solidified into a movement in various countries throughout the world in the first three decades of the 20th century, but nowhere more solidly than in the United States and, after World War I, in Germany.

While genetic traits such as eye colour and the like were proven to be hereditary, “eugenicists were more interested in the inheritance of social behaviours, intelligence, and personality.” Further:

American eugenicists also strove to disseminate the results of eugenic research to the public and to lawmakers. They supported the idea of positive eugenics [encouraging the ‘best’ to become better], but focused most of their energies on negative eugenics [to encourage the ‘worst’ to become fewer]. Eugenicists wrote hundreds of articles for popular magazines, published dozens of books for the general (and some for the scientific) reader, prepared exhibits for schools and state fairs, made films, and wrote sermons and novels.

American eugenicists, fully backed by the financial support of the major American philanthropic fortunes, passed eugenics legislation in over 27 states across the United States, often in the form of forced sterilizations for the mentally ‘inferior’, so that, “By the 1960s, when most of these laws were beginning to be repealed, more than 60,000 people had been sterilized for eugenic purposes.” As Garland Allen wrote:

220

For the wealthy benefactors that supported eugenics, such as the Carnegie, Rockefeller, Harriman, and Kellogg philanthropies, eugenics provided a means of social control in a period of unprecedented upheaval and violence. It was these same economic elites and their business interests who introduced scientific management and organizational control into the industrial sector…

[In 1994] we saw the resurrection of claims that there are genetic differences in intelligence between races, leading to different socio-economic status. Claims about the genetic basis for criminality, manic depression, risk-taking, alcoholism, homosexuality, and a host of other behaviours have also been rampant in scientific and especially popular literature. Much of the evidence for such claims is as controversial today as in the past.

We seem to be increasingly unwilling to accept what we view as imperfection in ourselves and others. As health care costs skyrocket, we are coming to accept a bottom-line, cost-benefit analysis of human life. This mind-set has serious implications for reproductive decisions. If a health maintenance organization (HMO) requires in utero screening, and refuses to cover the birth or care of a purportedly “defective” child, how close is this to eugenics? If gene or drug therapy is substituted for improving our workplace or school environments, our diets and our exercise practices, how close is this to eugenics? Significant social changes are expensive, however. If eugenics means making reproductive decisions primarily on the basis of social cost, then we are well on that road.

Genetics unleash an unprecedented power into human hands: the power of unnatural creation and the manipulation of biology. We do not yet fully understand nor comprehend the implications of genetic manipulation in our food, plants, animals, and in humans, themselves. What is clear is that we are changing the very biology of our environment and ourselves in it. While there are many clear and obvious benefits to genetic technology, such as the ability to enhance ailing senses (sight, hearing, etc.) and cure diseases, the positive must be examined and discussed with the negative repercussions of genetic manipulation so as to better direct the uses of this powerful technology.

221

Debates on issues such as stem-cell research and genetic manipulation often focus on a science versus religion aspect, where science seeks to benevolently cure mankind of its ailments and religion seeks to preserve the sanctity of ‘creation’. This is an irrational and narrow manner to conduct a real debate on this monumental issue, painting the issue as black and white, which it most certainly is not. Science can be used for good as well as bad, and human history, most especially which of the 20th century, is nothing if not evidence for that fact. Incredible scientific ingenuity went into the creation of great weapons; the manipulation of the atom to kill millions in an instant, or the manufacturing of biological and chemical weapons. The problem with the interaction of science and power is that with such great power comes the temptation to use and abuse it. If the ability to create a weapon like an atom bomb seems possible, most certainly there are those who seek to make it probable. Where there is temptation, there is human weakness.

So while genetics can be used for benevolent purposes and for the betterment of humankind, so too can it be used to effectively create a biological caste system, where in time it would be feasible to see a break in the human race, where as human advancement technologies become increasingly available, their use is reserved to the elite so that there comes a time where there is a biological separation in the human species. Oliver Curry, an evolutionary theorist from the London School of Economics predicted that “the human race will have reached its physical peak by the year 3000” and that, “The human race will one day split into two separate species, an attractive, intelligent ruling elite and an underclass of dim-witted, ugly goblin-like creatures.” Such was the plot of H.G. Wells’ classic book, “The Time Machine,” who was himself, a prominent eugenicist at the turn of the 20th century. While this would be a long time from now, its potential results from the decisions we make today.

Population Control as Eugenics

Not only was the field of genetics born of eugenics, and heavily financed by the same monied-interests that seek social control; but so too was the field of population control.

222

In environmental literature and rhetoric, one concept that has emerged over the years as playing a significant part is that of population control. Population is seen as an environmental issue because the larger the population, the more resources it consumes and land it occupies. In this concept, the more people there are the worse the environment becomes. Thus, programs aimed at controlling population growth are often framed in an environmentalist lens. There is also a distinctly radical element in this field, which views population growth not simply as an environmental concern, but which frames people, in general, as a virus that must be eradicated if the earth is to survive.

However, in the view of elites, population control is more about controlling the people than saving the environment. Elites have always been drawn to population studies that have, in many areas, helped construct their worldview. Concerns about population growth really took hold with Thomas Malthus at the end of the 18th century. In 1798, Malthus wrote a “theory on the nature of poverty,” and he “called for population control by moral restraint,” citing charity as a promotion of “generation-to-generation poverty and simply made no sense in the natural scheme of human progress.” Thus, the idea of ‘charity’ became immoral. The eugenics movement attached itself to Malthus’ theory regarding the “rejection of the value of helping the poor.”

The ideas of Malthus, and later Herbert Spencer and Charles Darwin were remoulded into branding an elite ideology of “Social Darwinism”, which was “the notion that in the struggle to survive in a harsh world, many humans were not only less worthy, many were actually destined to wither away as a rite of progress. To preserve the weak and the needy was, in essence, an unnatural act.” This theory simply justified the immense wealth, power and domination of a small elite over the rest of humanity, as that elite saw themselves as the only truly intelligent beings worthy of holding such power and privilege.

Francis Galton later coined the term “eugenics” to describe this emerging field. His followers believed that the ‘genetically unfit’ “would have to be wiped away,” using tactics such as, “segregation, deportation, castration, marriage prohibition, compulsory sterilization, passive euthanasia – and ultimately extermination.”

223

The actual science of eugenics was lacking extensive evidence, and ultimately Galton “hoped to recast eugenics as a religious doctrine,” which was “to be taken on faith without proof.”

As the quest to re-brand “eugenics” was under way, a 1943 edition of Eugenical News published an article titled “Eugenics After the War,” which cited Charles Davenport, a major founder and progenitor of eugenics, in his vision of “a new mankind of biological castes with master races in control and slave races serving them.” A 1946 article in Eugenical News stated that, “Population, genetics, [and] psychology, are the three sciences to which the eugenicist must look for the factual material on which to build an acceptable philosophy of eugenics and to develop and defend practical eugenics proposals.”

In the post-war period, emerging in the 1950s and going into the 1960s, the European colonies were retracting as nations of the ‘Third World’ were gaining political independence. This reinforced support for population control in many circles, as “For those who benefited most from the global status quo, population control measures were a far more palatable alternative to ending Third World poverty or promoting genuine economic development.”

In 1952, “John D. Rockefeller 3rd convened a group of scientists to discuss the implications of the dramatic demographic change. They met in Williamsburg, Virginia, under the auspices of the National Academy of Sciences, and after two and a half days agreed on the need for a new institution that could provide solid science to guide governments and individuals in addressing population questions.” That new institution was to become the Population Council. Six of the Council’s ten founding members were eugenicists.

According to the Population Council’s website, it “did not itself espouse any form of population policy. Instead, through grants to individuals and institutions, it invested in strengthening the indigenous capacity of countries and regions to conduct population research and to develop their own policies. The Council also funded seminal work in U.S. universities and further developed its own in-house research expertise in biomedicine, public health, and social science.”

224

In 2008, Matthew Connelly, a professor at Columbia University, wrote a book called, “Fatal Misconception: The Struggle to Control World Population,” in which he critically analyses the history of the population control movement. He documents the rise of the field through the eugenics movement:

In 1927 a Rockefeller-funded study of contraception sought “some simple measure which will be available for the wife of the slum-dweller, the peasant, or the coolie, though dull of mind.” In 1935 one representative told India’s Council of State that population control was a necessity for the masses, adding that “it is not what they want, but what is good for them.” The problem with the natives was that “they are born too much and they don’t die enough,” a public-health official in French Indochina stated in 1936.

Connelly’s general thesis was “how some people have long tried to redesign world population by reducing the fertility of other’s.” Further:

Connelly examines population control as a global transnational movement because its main advocates and practitioners aimed to reduce world population through global governance and often viewed national governments as a means to this end. Fatal Misconceptions is therefore an intricate account of networks of influential individuals, international organizations, NGOs, and national governments.

As one review in the Economist pointed out, “Much of the evil done in the name of slowing population growth had its roots in an uneasy coalition between feminists, humanitarians and environmentalists, who wished to help the unwillingly fecund, and the racists, eugenicists and militarists who wished to see particular patterns of reproduction, regardless of the desires of those involved.” The Economist further wrote:

As the world population soared, the population controllers came to believe they were fighting a war, and there would be collateral damage. Millions of intra-uterine contraceptive devices were exported to poor countries although they were known to cause infections and sterility.

225

“Perhaps the individual patient is expendable in the general scheme of things,” said a participant at a conference on the devices organised in 1962 by the Population Council, a research institute founded by John D. Rockefeller, “particularly if the infection she acquires is sterilising but not lethal.” In 1969 Robert McNamara, then president of the World Bank, said he was reluctant to finance health care “unless it was very strictly related to population control, because usually health facilities contributed to the decline of the death rate, and thereby to the population explosion.”

A review in the New York Review of Books pointed out that this movement coincided a great deal with the feminist movement in advancing women’s reproductive rights. However, “these benefits were seen by many US family planning officials as secondary to the goal of reducing the absolute numbers of people in developing countries. The urgency of what came to be known as the “population control movement” contributed to a climate of coercion and led to a number of serious human rights abuses, especially in Asian countries.” Dominic Lawson, writing a review of Connelly’s book for The Sunday Times, explained that:

The population-control movement was bankrolled by America’s biggest private fortunes – the Ford family foundation, John D Rockefeller III, and Clarence Gamble (of Procter & Gamble).

These gentlemen shared not just extreme wealth but a common anxiety: the well-to-do and clever (people like them, obviously) were now having much smaller families than their ancestors, but the great unwashed – Chinamen! Indians! Negroes! – were reproducing themselves in an irresponsible manner. What they feared was a kind of Darwinism in reverse – the survival of the un-fittest.

As the New Scientist reported, while contraceptives and women’s fertility rights were being expanded, “For much of the past half-century, population control came first and human rights had to be sacrificed.” Further, the New Scientist wrote that Connelly “lays bare the dark secrets of an authoritarian neo-Malthusian ethos that created an international population agenda built around control.”

226

One such horrific notion was “the official policies that made it acceptable to hand out food aid to famine victims only if the women agreed to be sterilized.” In a sad irony, this seemingly progressive movement for women’s rights actually had the effect of resulting in a humanitarian disaster, disproportionately affecting women of the developing world.

In 1968, biologist Paul Ehrlich wrote his widely influential book, ‘The Population Bomb,’ “in which he predicted that global overpopulation would cause massive famines as early as the 1970s.” In his book, he refers to mankind as a “cancer” upon the world:

A cancer is an uncontrolled multiplication of cells; the population explosion is an uncontrolled multiplication of people. Treating only the symptoms of cancer may make the victim more comfortable at first, but eventually he dies – often horribly. A similar fate awaits a world with a population explosion if only the symptoms are treated. We must shift our efforts from treatment of the symptoms to the cutting out of the cancer. The operation will demand many apparent brutal and heartless decisions. The pain may be intense. But the disease is so far advanced that only with radical surgery does the patient have a chance to survive.

The American political elite fully embraced this population paradigm of viewing the world and relations with the rest of the world. President Lyndon Johnson was quoted as saying, “I’m not going to piss away foreign aid in nations where they refuse to deal with their own population problems,” while his successor, Richard Nixon, was quoted as saying, “population control is a must -population control must go hand in hand with aid.” Robert McNamara, President of the “World Bank” and former Secretary of Defence in the Johnson administration, said that he opposed “World Bank” programs financing health care “unless it was very strictly related to population control, because usually health facilities contributed to the decline of the death rate, and thereby to the population explosion.”

227

Ehrlich was also influential in tracking India’s rapid population growth into the 1970s. The rapid population growth in India was attributed at the time to the result of the public health system the British had set up under the colonial government, as well as the fact that, as a means to maintaining a relationship of dependence with Britain, the British had discouraged industrialization in India. As famine was around the corner in India, President “Johnson used food aid to pressure the Indian government to meet its family planning targets,” and “By the early 1970s, Bangladesh was spending one third of its entire health budget on family planning and India was spending 60 percent.” Further:

Between the 1960s and 1980s, millions of people in India and other Asian countries were sterilized or had IUDs [intrauterine devices], as well as other contraceptives, inserted in unhygienic conditions. Numerous cases of uterine perforation, excessive bleeding, infections, and even death were reported.

The Population Council knowingly sent un-sterile IUDs to India, and in the 1970s, nearly half a million women in forty-two developing countries were treated with defective IUDs that “heightened the risk of infection and uterine perforation,” after the “United States Agency for International Development” (USAID) had “quietly bought up thousands of the devices at a discount for distribution overseas.”

Then sterilization was introduced as a means for “keeping the quotas” on population control in India, as “sterilization was made a condition for receiving land allocations and water for irrigation, as well as electricity, rickshaw licenses, and medical care.” A Swedish diplomat touring a Swedish/World Bank population program at the time was quoted as saying, “Obviously the stories… on how young and unmarried men are more or less dragged to the sterilization premises are true in far too many cases.”

In 1967, the UN Fund for Population Activities was created, and in 1971, “the General Assembly acknowledged that UNFPA [United Nations Population Fund] should play a leading role within the UN system in promoting population programmes.” In 1970, Nixon created the Commission on Population Growth and the American Future, known as the Rockefeller Commission, for its chairman, John D. Rockefeller 3rd.

228

In 1972, the final report was delivered to Nixon.

Among the members of the Commission (besides Rockefeller) were David E. Bell, Vice President of the Ford Foundation, and Bernard Berelson, President of the Population Council. Among the conclusions was that, “Population growth is one of the major factors affecting the demand for resources and the deterioration of the environment in the United States.

The further we look into the future, the more important population becomes,” and that, “From an environmental and resource point of view, there are no advantages from further growth.” Further, the report warned:

The American future cannot be isolated from what is happening in the rest of the world. There are serious problems right now in the distribution of resources, income, and wealth, among countries. World population growth is going to make these problems worse before they get better. The United States needs to undertake much greater efforts to understand these problems and develop international policies to deal with them.

In 1974, National Security Study Memorandum (NSSM) 200 was issued under the direction of US National Security Adviser Henry Kissinger, otherwise known as “Implications of Worldwide Population Growth for U.S. Security and Overseas Interests.”

Among the issues laid out in the memorandum was that, “Growing populations will have a serious impact on the need for food especially in the poorest, fastest growing LDCs [Lesser Developed Countries],” and “The most serious consequence for the short and middle term is the possibility of massive famines in certain parts of the world, especially the poorest regions.” Further, “rapid population growth presses on a fragile environment in ways that threaten longer-term food production.” The report plainly stated that, “there is a major risk of severe damage to world economic, political, and ecological systems and, as these systems begin to fail, to our humanitarian values.”

229

The memorandum lays out key policy recommendations for dealing with the “crisis” of overpopulation. They stated that “our aim should be for the world to achieve a replacement level of fertility, (a two-child family on the average), by about the year 2000,” and that this strategy “will require vigorous efforts by interested countries, U.N. agencies and other international bodies to make it effective [and] U.S. leadership is essential.” They suggested a concentration on specific countries: India, Bangladesh, Pakistan, Nigeria, Mexico, Indonesia, Brazil, the Philippines, Thailand, Egypt, Turkey, Ethiopia and Colombia.

They recommended the “Integration of population factors and population programs into country development planning,” as well as “Increased assistance for family planning services, information and technology,” and “Creating conditions conducive to fertility decline.” The memorandum even specifically mentioned that, “We must take care that our activities should not give the appearance to the LDCs [Lesser Developed Countries] of an industrialized country policy directed against the LDCs.” Essentially, NSSM 200 made population control a key strategy in US foreign policy, specifically related to aid and development. In other words, it was eugenics as foreign policy.

In 1975, Indira Gandhi, the Prime Minister of India, declared martial law. Her son Sanjay was appointed as the nation’s chief population controller. Sanjay “proceeded to flatten slums and then tell the residents that they could get a new house if they would agree to be sterilized. Government officials were given sterilization quotas. Within a year, six million Indian men and two million women were sterilized.

At least 2,000 Indians died as a result of botched sterilization operations.” However, the following year there was an election, and Indira Gandhi’s government was thrown out of power, with that issue playing a major factor. Next, however, China became the major focus of the population control movement, which “offered technical assistance to China’s “one child” policy of 1978-83, even helping to pay for computers that allowed Chinese officials to track “birth permits,” the official means by which the government banned families from having more than one child and required the aborting of additional children.” Further:

230

Even China’s draconian population programs received some support in the 1980s from the US-funded International Planned Parenthood Federation and the UN Population Fund. Before China launched its infamous “One Child Policy,” concerns were being raised about its “voluntary” family planning program. In 1981, Chinese and American newspapers reported that “vehicles transporting Cantonese women to hospitals for abortions were ‘filled with wailing noises.’ Some pregnant women were reportedly ‘handcuffed, tied with ropes or placed in pig’s baskets.‘

After 1983, coercion became official Chinese policy. “All women with one child were to be inserted with a stainless-steel, tamper-resistant IUD, all parents with two or more children were to be sterilized, and all unauthorized pregnancies aborted,” according to the One Child Policy. During this time, the International Planned Parenthood Federation and the UN Population Fund continued to support China’s nongovernmental Family Planning Association, even though some of its top officials also worked for the government.

The UN was not a passive participant in population control measures, as it actively supported these harsh programs, and in many cases, rewarded governments for their vicious tactics in reducing population growth:

In 1983, Xinzhong Qian and Indira Gandhi were awarded “the first United Nations Population Award” to recognize and reward their accomplishments in limiting the population growth in China and India in the previous decade.

During the 1970s, officials in these countries had launched extremely ambitious population programs that were supposed to improve the quality of the population and halt its growth. The measures used were harsh. For example, slum clearance resulting in the eradication of whole urban neighbourhoods and the widespread sterilization of their inhabitants was an important part of India’s ‘Emergency’ campaign. In Delhi, hundreds of thousands of people were driven from their homes in events that resulted in numerous clashes, arrests, and deaths, while a total of eight million sterilizations were recorded in India in 1976.

231

Horrifically, “between the 1960s and 1980s, millions of people in India and other Asian countries were sterilized or had IUDs, as well as other contraceptives, inserted in unhygienic conditions. Numerous cases of uterine perforation, excessive bleeding, infections, and even death were reported, but these programs made little effort to treat these conditions, or even determine their frequency, so we don’t know precisely how common they were.”

In the late 1980s, revelations in Brazil uncovered the NSSM 200 in Brazil since its implementation in 1975 under the Ford Presidency. An official government investigation was launched, and it was discovered that, “an estimated 44% of all Brazilian women aged between 14 and 55 had been permanently sterilized.” Further, the programs of sterilization, undertaken by a number of international organizations, were coordinated under the guidance of USAID.

At the UN’s 1994 World Population Conference in Cairo, Third World delegates to the conference emphasized the need for development policies as opposed to demographic policies; that the focus must be on development, not population. This was essentially a setback for the radical population control movement; however, it wasn’t one they couldn’t work around. There was still a great deal of support among Western elites and co-opted developing world elites for the aims of population control. As Connelly articulated:

It appealed to the rich and powerful because, with the spread of emancipatory movements and the integration of markets, it began to appear easier and more profitable to control populations than to control territory. That’s why opponents were correct in viewing it as another chapter in the unfinished history of imperialism.

It was around this point that the population control movement, while continuing on its overall aims of curbing population growth of Third World nations, began to further merge itself with the environmental movement. While always working alongside the environmental movement, this period saw the emergence of a more integrated approach to policy agendas.

232

Environmentalism as Eugenics

Michael Barker extensively covered the connection between the Rockefeller and Ford foundations in funding the environmental movement in the academic journal, Capitalism Nature Socialism. As Barker noted, following World War II, the public became increasingly concerned with the environment as the “chemical-industrial complex” grew at an astounding rate. Since Rockefeller interests were heavily involved in the chemical industry, the rising trend in environmental thought and concern had to quickly be controlled and steered in a direction favourable to elite interests.

Two important organizations in shaping the environmental movement were the Conservation Foundation and Resources for the Future, which largely relied upon Rockefeller and Ford Foundation funding, and both conservation organizations had interestingly helped to “launch an explicitly pro-corporate approach to resource conservation.” Laurance Rockefeller served as a trustee of the Conservation Foundation, and donated $50,000 yearly throughout the 50s and 60s. Further, the Conservation Foundation was founded by Fairfield Osborn, whose cousin, Frederick Osborn, became another prominent voice in conservation. Frederick Osborn was also working with the Rockefeller’s Population Council and was President of the American Eugenics Society.

In 1952, the Ford Foundation created the organization Resources for the Future (RFF), (the same year that the Rockefellers created the Population Council), and the original founders were also “John D. Rockefeller Jr.’s chief advisors on conservation matters.” Laurance Rockefeller joined the board of the RFF in 1958, and the RFF got $500,000 from the Rockefeller Foundation in 1970. The Ford Foundation would also go on to create the Environmental Defence Fund (EDF), the Natural Resources Defence Council (NRDC), and the Sierra Club Legal Defence Fund. McGeorge Bundy, who was President of the Ford Foundation from 1966 until 1979, once stated that, “everything the foundation did could be regarded as ‘making the world safe for capitalism’.”

233

Certainly one of the pre-eminent, if not the most prominent environmental organizations in the world is the World Wildlife Foundation (WWF). The WWF was founded on September 11, 1961, by Sir Julian Huxley, the first Director General of the UN organization, UNESCO. Sir Julian Huxley was also a life trustee of the British Eugenics Society from 1925, and its President from 1959- 62. In the biography of Julian Huxley on the British Eugenics Society’s website (now known as the Galton Institute – a genetics research centre), it stated that, “Huxley believed that eugenics would one day be seen as the way forward for the human race,” and that, “A catastrophic event may be needed for evolution to move at an accelerated pace, as the extinction of the dinosaurs gave the mammals their chance to take over the world. It is much the same with ideas whose time has not yet come; they must survive periods when they are not generally welcome. Like the small mammals in dinosaur times they must await their opportunity.”

In 1962, Rachel Carson, an American marine biologist, published her seminal work, Silent Spring, which has long been credited with helping launch the modern environmental movement. Her book was largely based around the criticism of pesticides as harmful to the environment and human and animal health. Of particular note, she is seen as being the starting force for the campaign against DDT. Carson died in 1964, but her legacy was set in stone by the emerging environmental movement.

The Environmental Defence Fund was founded in 1967 with the specific aim to ban DDT. Some of its initial funding came from the Ford Foundation. This also spurred the formation of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), an official US government agency, in 1970. In 1972, the EPA banned the use of DDT in the United States. Since this time, “DDT prohibitions have been expanded and enforced by NGO pressure, coercive treaties, and threats of economic sanctions by foundations, nations and international aid agencies.”

234

DDT is widely regarded as a carcinogen, and most have never questioned the banning of DDT until understanding the effects of DDT usage beyond the environmental aspect.

In particular, we need to look at Africa to understand the significant role of DDT and why we need to re-evaluate its potential usage, weighing the pros and cons of doing so. We must bring in the “human element” and balance that out with the “environmental element” instead of just simply writing off the human aspect to the issue.

The World Health Organization (WHO) said in 2000, that, “malaria infected over 300 million people. It killed nearly 2,000,000 – most of them in sub-Saharan Africa. Over half the victims are children, who die at the rate of two per minute or 3,000 per day,” and that, “Since 1972, over 50 million people have died from this dreaded disease. Many are weakened by AIDS or dysentery, but actually die of malaria.” In 2002 alone, 80,000 Ugandans died from malaria, half of which were children. The fact is, that:

No other chemical comes close to DDT as an affordable, effective way to repel mosquitoes from homes, exterminate any that land on walls, and disorient any that are not killed or repelled, largely eliminating their urge to bite in homes that are treated once or twice a year with tiny amounts of this miracle insecticide.

Donald Roberts, Professor of Tropical Public Health at the Uniformed Services University of Health Sciences, explained that, “DDT is long-acting; the alternatives are not,” and that, ultimately, when it comes to the issue of poor countries and poor people, “DDT is cheap; the alternatives are not end of Story.

Richard Tren, President of Africa Fighting Malaria, said that, “In the 60 years since DDT was first introduced, not a single scientific paper has been able to replicate even one case of actual human harm from its use.

235

” At the end of World War II, DDT was used on nearly every concentration camp survivor to prevent typhus, and the “widespread use of DDT in Europe and the United States played vital roles in eradicating malaria and typhus on both continents.” Further, in 1979, a World Health Organization (WHO) review of DDT use could not find “any possible adverse effects of DDT,” and said it was the “safest pesticide used for residual spraying and vector control programs.”

However, organizations such as the WHO, United Nations Environmental Program (UNEP), the World Bank, Greenpeace, World Wildlife Fund, and a variety of others still remained adamantly opposed to the use of DDT. While DDT is not outright banned, it is extremely difficult to have it used in places like Africa due to funding. The funding for health care and disease-related programs comes largely from western aid agencies and NGOs, and “The US Agency for International Development [USAID] will not fund any indoor residual spraying and neither will most of the other donors,” explained Richard Tren, which “means that most African countries have to use whatever [these donors] are willing to fund (bed nets), which may not be the most appropriate tool.”

A Ugandan Health Minister said in 2002 that, “Our people’s lives are of primary importance. The West is concerned about the environment because we share it with them. But it is not concerned about malaria because it is not a problem there. In Europe, they used DDT to kill anopheles mosquitoes that cause malaria. Why can’t we use DDT to kill the enemy in our camp?”

Michael Crichton, an author and PhD molecular biologist, plainly stated, “Banning DDT is one of the most disgraceful episodes in the twentieth century history of America. We knew better, and we did it anyway, and we let people around the world die, and we didn’t give a damn.”

As author Paul Driessen eloquently explained, the West “would never tolerate being told they had to protect their children solely by using bed nets, larvae-eating fish and medicinal treatments. But they have been silent about conditions in Africa, and about the intolerable attitudes of environmental groups, aid agencies and their own government[s].”

236

James Lovelock, a scientist, researcher, environmentalist and futurist, became famous for popularizing his idea known as the Gaia hypothesis. He first started writing about this theory in journals in the early 1970s, but it shot to fame with the publication of his 1979 book, “Gaia: A New Look at Life on Earth.” The general theory is that the Earth acts as a single organism, where all facets interact and react in a particular way that promotes an optimal environment on Earth.

Thus, the theory was named after the Greek Earth goddess, Gaia. In the opening paragraph of his book, he stated that, “the quest for Gaia is an attempt to find the largest living creature on Earth.” His theory provoked a fair amount criticism within the scientific community, with some referring to it as merely a metaphorical description of Earth processes.

Lovelock has also been known to make wild predictive statements. In 2006, he wrote an article for the Independent, in which he stated that, “My Gaia theory sees the Earth behaving as if it were alive, and clearly anything alive can enjoy good health, or suffer disease,” and that the Earth is “seriously ill, and soon to pass into a morbid fever that may last as long as 100,000 years.”

In 2008, the Guardian interviewed Lovelock, who contended that it was “too late” to do anything about global warming, that catastrophe was inevitable, and that, “about 80%” of the world’s population [will] be wiped out by 2100.” In August of 2009, Lovelock became a patron of the Optimum Population Trust, a British population control organization. Upon his becoming a patron, he stated that, “Those who fail to see that population growth and climate change are two sides of the same coin are either ignorant or hiding from the truth. These two huge environmental problems are inseparable and to discuss one while ignoring the other is irrational.”

He added, “How can we possibly decrease carbon emissions and land use while the number of emitters and the space they occupy remorselessly increases? When will the environmentalists who claim to be green recognise the truth and speak out?”

237

Taxes and trades in carbon and carbon credits virtually commodify our atmosphere, so that the very air we breathe becomes property that is bought and sold. A tax on carbon is a tax on life. Since the lifeblood of an industrial society is oil, this requires carbon emissions in order to develop. The restraints on carbon, particularly the notion of trading carbon credits – i.e., trading the ‘right’ to pollute a certain amount – will disproportionately affect the developing world, which cannot afford to finance its own development.

Corporations and banks will trade and own the world’s carbon credits, granting them the exclusive right to pollute and control the world’s resources and environment. The carbon trading market could become twice the size of the world oil market within ten years’ time.

In regards to the Copenhagen Climate talks, which essentially broke down in December of 2009, the real source of this failure lies in a document that revealed the true nature of the negotiations, referred to as the ‘Danish Text.’ The ‘Danish Text’ was a leaked Danish government document which outlined a draft agreement “that hands more power to rich countries,” as, “The draft hands effective control of climate change finance to the World Bank” and “would make any money to help poor countries adapt to climate change dependent on them taking a range of actions.” In other words, it becomes the new means of exerting “conditionality” upon the developing, and increasingly the developed world. ‘Conditionality’ implying – of course – a restructuring of society - along lines designated by the World Bank.

While these are but examples of the influence and shaping of science to mould society and control humanity, much more discussion and debate is needed on these issues. While science can be used for the benefit of mankind, so too can it be used for the control and oppression of humanity. The people who run our societies view us as needing to be controlled, so they redirect the social apparatus into systems of control and coercion. Science can allow us to understand an idea or organism; but in doing so, it can also allow us to understand how to dominate and control that idea or organism.

238

We must continually engage in a discussion of our changing society to better understand the nature of its changes and how that could affect us both positively and negatively.

If not for the Technological (or ‘Technetronic’) Revolution, elites would not have access to such powerful means of control; but, simultaneously, people have never had such great access to each other through mass communications and the Internet. So while environmental science can allow us to better understand our environment, something we seem still to be very much an adolescent in accomplishing, it also unleashes an ability, and what’s greater – a temptation – to control and shape the environment.

Science can be used to both free and imprison the human mind. It is imperative that we approach and discuss the sciences (and all issues) from this perspective, not from a narrow-minded and divisive black-and-white world of ‘left’ and ‘right’, of religion or science. We cannot simply view criticism and opposition to social and scientific endeavours as ‘backwards’, or based on ‘religious doctrine’. There are rational reasons and purposes for criticism and debate on all of these issues, and rational positions of dissent.

Issues like climate change are generally divided upon those who ‘believe’ in climate change, and those who are termed ‘deniers’, which is a disingenuous and divisive approach to rational debate. It silences the critical scientists, who do not get funding from governments or corporations. It classifies those who dissent as ‘deniers’, employing rhetoric like that used against Holocaust deniers, whereas the majority of the dissent within the scientific community comes from those who simply see the role of other forces (often natural) in shaping and changing our climate, such as solar radiation. They do not ‘deny’ climate change, but they dissent on the causes and consequences. Is their opinion not worth hearing? If we are reshaping our entire global political and economic spheres as a result of our supposedly ‘collective’ perception of this issue – as we certainly are – then is it not of the utmost importance that we hear from other voices, especially those of dissent, in order to better understand the issue?

239

Merging Man and Machine: The Future of Humanity

Eisenhower warned, “The prospect of domination of the nation’s scholars by Federal employment, project allocations, and the power of money is ever present – and is gravely to be regarded,” and that, “we must also be alert to the equal and opposite danger that public policy could itself become the captive of a scientific-technological elite.”

Bill Joy, a computer scientist and co-founder of Sun Microsystems, who was co-chair of the presidential commission on the future of IT research, wrote an article for Wired Magazine in 2000 entitled, “Why the Future Doesn’t Need Us.”

Joy explained the possibilities in a technological society of the near future, that “new technologies like genetic engineering and nanotechnology were giving us the power to remake the world.” One startling development in the world is that of robot technology and its potential impact upon society. Joy explains:

Accustomed to living with almost routine scientific breakthroughs, we have yet to come to terms with the fact that the most compelling 21st-century technologies – robotics, genetic engineering, and nanotechnology – pose a different threat than the technologies that have come before. Specifically, robots, engineered organisms, and nanobots share a dangerous amplifying factor: They can self-replicate. A bomb is blown up only once – but one bot can become many, and quickly get out of control.

Joy explains that while these technologies can, and consistently are promoted and justified in the name of doing good (such as curing diseases, etc.), “with each of these technologies, a sequence of small, individually sensible advances leads to an accumulation of great power and, concomitantly, great danger.” Joy ominously warns that:

240

The 21st-century technologies – genetics, nanotechnology, and robotics (GNR) – are so powerful that they can spawn whole new classes of accidents and abuses. Most dangerously, for the first time, these accidents and abuses are widely within the reach of individuals or small groups. They will not require large facilities or rare raw materials. Knowledge alone will enable the use of them.

Thus we have the possibility not just of “weapons of mass destruction” but of “knowledge-enabled mass destruction (KMD)”, this destructiveness hugely amplified by the power of self-replication.

I think it is no exaggeration to say we are on the cusp of the further perfection of extreme evil, an evil whose possibility spreads well beyond that which “weapons of mass destruction” bequeathed to the nation-states, on to a surprising and terrible empowerment of extreme individuals.

In other words: we are entering an era faced with the “scientific dictators” of Huxley’s nightmare vision in ‘Brave New World’. Joy explained that by 2030, “we are likely to be able to build machines, in quantity, a million times as powerful as the personal computers of today.” Thus:

As this enormous computing power is combined with the manipulative advances of the physical sciences and the new, deep understandings in genetics, enormous transformative power is being unleashed. These combinations open up the opportunity to completely redesign the world, for better or worse: The replicating and evolving processes that have been confined to the natural world are about to become realms of human endeavour.

Joy examined the transformative nature of robotics, as an intelligent robot may be built by 2030, “And once an intelligent robot exists, it is only a small step to a robot species – to an intelligent robot that can make evolved copies of it.”

241

Further, “A second dream of robotics is that we will gradually replace ourselves with our robotic technology, achieving near immortality by downloading our consciousness’s.” Joy further warns of the potential for an arms race to develop in these technologies, just as took place in the nuclear, radiological and biological weapons of the 20th century.

Joy aptly explained that in the 20th century, those technologies were largely the products of governments, whereas in the 21st century, the new technologies of “genetic engineering, nanotechnology and robotics” (GNR), are the products of corporations and capitalism. Thus, the driving force is that of competition, desire, and the economic system.

Hence, there is far less regulation and discussion of these new technologies than there was of the 20th century technologies, as the new technologies are developed in privately owned labs, not public. Joy often quotes a passage from Kaczynski’s Unabomber Manifesto regarding a future dystopia, which Joy feels has “merit in the reasoning.” In the event that human control over machines is retained (as opposed to the machines taking over):

Control over large systems of machines will be in the hands of tiny elite – just as it is today, but with two differences. Due to improved techniques the elite will have greater control over the masses; and because human work will no longer be necessary the masses will be superfluous, a useless burden on the system. If the elite is ruthless they may simply decide to exterminate the mass of humanity. If they are humane they may use propaganda or other psychological or biological techniques to reduce the birth rate until the mass of humanity becomes extinct, leaving the world to the elite.

Or, if the Elite consist of soft-hearted liberals, they may decide to play the role of good shepherds to the rest of the human race. They will see to it that everyone’s physical needs are satisfied, that all children are raised under psychologically hygienic conditions, that everyone has a wholesome hobby to keep him busy, and that anyone who may become dissatisfied undergoes “treatment” to cure his “problem.”

242

Of course, life will be so purposeless that people will have to be biologically or psychologically engineered either to remove their need for the power process or make them “sublimate” their drive for power into some harmless hobby. These engineered human beings may be happy in such a society, but they will most certainly not be free. They will have been reduced to the status of domestic animals.

A horrifying vision indeed; but one which builds upon the ideas of Huxley, Russell and Brzezinski, who envisioned a people who – through biological and psychological means – are made to love their own servitude. Huxley saw the emergence of a world in which humanity, still a wild animal, is domesticated; where only the elite remain wild and have freedom to make decisions, while the masses are domesticated like pets.

Huxley opined that, “Men and women will grow up to love their servitude and will never dream of revolution. There seems to be no good reason why a thoroughly scientific dictatorship should ever be overthrown.”

We Can Have a Scientific Dictatorship, or…

We can create an alternative. We use, strengthen, mobilize, decentralize, and mobilize the global political awakening into a global movement of people not simply politically aware, but politically active and engaged. A world where people do not simply observe the apparatus of political, economic and social power influencing their lives; but in which the people actively seek to change it to better suit their lives and their freedom. We need to understand each other better; but to do that, we cannot view each other through the harsh and deceptive lens of power.

To understand each other, we must know each other. People must communi- cate with one another around the world; ideas must be exchanged between people and discussed, debated, and decided upon; the people must determine their own futures. Take the elites out of the equation: if you do not want them to dominate your lives, do not give them the power to do so. Talk to each other and determine your own polities, economies and societies. Do not entrust dying ideas and diseased institutions to determine your future for you.

243

The tools and systems of social control are vast and evasive; they penetrate the very psychology and biology of the individual. The elite feel that they are entrusted – due to their supposed ‘innate’ superior intelligence and specialization – to control society and reshape it as they see fit, to actively mould and construct public opinion and ideas. They have a belief that people are essentially irrational emotional beings, and that they must be controlled by an elite or else the world would be in chaos. This is what underpins the ideas of ‘stability’ and ‘order’. The state has been used to fight every progressive form of change that society has ever developed for its betterment: women’s rights, racial rights, civil rights, the anti-war movement, gay rights, etc. Initially, the impulse – the immediate reaction of the state – is to oppress social movements and to suppress human freedoms.

This approach often leads to a situation in which social movements are only accepted by the state when they are co-opted by the state or powerful economic forces, which then exert their influence over the state to alter the policy.

If we gain stability and order at the cost of our very humanity, is it worth it? Do we really need this eternal guidance, which has been constant through almost all of human history, to treat the human species as if it was in a constant state of adolescence, never quite prepared to make its own decisions or go out in the world on its own? Well it is time for humanity to grow up, leave the strange comfort of mental authoritarianism. The strive for human autonomy has only just begun; only now is all of humanity politically awakened; only now – and never before – has all of known humanity had such a great and perfect opportunity to remake the world, retake power, re-imagine individuality and revitalize freedom.

Our world is governed not by a conspiracy, but by ideas: ideas of power, money, the state, military, empire, race, religion, sex, gender, politics and people. The only challenge to those ideas, are new ideas. There are roughly 6,000 members of the ‘global Elite,’ there are over 6.8 billion people in the world.

244

That sounds like a lot of potential for new ideas. The greatest resource for the future of humanity is not in the ‘control’ of humanity, which is doomed to ultimate failure, but for the release and encouragement of the human mind and spirit.

People can understand the science and mechanics of the brain, the functions of psychology, the ability of human strength; but still, today, we do not know how all that biology can create Beethoven’s 9th Symphony. Humanity is still very much a mystery to humans, and it would seem likely that the best answers to the questions of ‘how should we live?’ and ‘how should our societies function?’ are best answered with the bigger question of ‘why are we here’?

If the purpose of people and humanity is to consume and dominate, then our present situation seems only natural. If we were meant for more, then we must become more. If we were meant to be free, we must become free. Ideas are powerful things: they can build empires, and collapse them just as easily.

In 1967, Dr. Martin Luther King delivered one of his most moving and important speeches, “Beyond Vietnam,” in which he spoke out against war and empire. He left humanity with sobering words:

I am convinced that if we are to get on the right side of the world revolution, we as a nation must undergo a radical revolution of values. We must rapidly begin the shift from a “thing-oriented” society to a “person-oriented” society. When machines and computers, profit motives and property rights are considered more important than people, the giant triplets of racism, materialism, and militarism are incapable of being conquered.

245

Agenda 21... United Nations Will Own and Control EVERYTHING... You, Your Children, Your Property, Food, Water... EVERYTHING!

Submitted by SadIn America on Sun, 09/29/2013 - 8:29pm.

The true objectives of Agenda 21, revealed, include an end to national sovereignty; restructure of the family unit which means basically the state will take care of your children, with a keen eye toward indoctrinating them into state control over family allegiance; abolition of private property with citizens crammed into "stack and pack", hi-rise apartment buildings, close to railroad tracks while cars will not be allowed. ~ Lucille Famine - Video

Agenda 21 is a major tool of the “New World order”, conceived in 1992 in Rio DeJaniero at the "Earth Summit."

Its original name, "Sustainable Development", began in 1987 with Gro Harlem Brundtland, VP of the World Socialist Party.

Heavily promoted to the public as the salvation for this planet and every human being, it is anything but that. It needs to be revealed in no uncertain terms so you know what it truly is.

246

By putting this data out here, I might be labelled a prominent member of the lunatic fringe but I believe we have an ethical obligation to present truth, as we see it. If I'm wrong – well, I'll be embarrassed but then I'll be relieved because maybe this insanity won't happen after all.

However, there is growing evidence this rotten egg called Agenda 21 has been hatching for quite some time, under our very noses. And it stinks.

At that momentous meeting, 178 nations signed the document; President Bush signed for the U.S. Later President Clinton signed an executive order, basically demanding compliance from every state and community with the goals and plans of Agenda 21 which is fast coming about as official policy in every town, city and state

Compassionate-sounding terms like "Population Stabilization" and "Sustainable Development" are simply masks for the true purpose of this United Nations plan – a world domination of your life and liberty, basically an insidious plot to control any and all parts of existence.

According to its authors, sustainability focuses on three things: "global land use, global education and global population control and reduction". Doesn't sound too bad, does it? However, in actual practice, these concepts pan out far below their lofty rhetoric.

The true objectives of Agenda 21 document, revealed, include an

* End to national sovereignty;

* restructure of the family unit which means basically

* The state will take care of your children, with a keen eye toward indoctrinating them into state control over family allegiance;

* Abolition of private property with

* Citizens crammed into "stack and pack", hi-rise apartment buildings, close to railroad tracks while * Cars will not be allowed.

247

Santa Cruz has already been granted 300 million federal dollars to build these apartment buildings. In exchange for their willingness to participate in these sustainable acts, they are given immunity to construction-defect liability.

In Washington, one of these hi-risers is a nine story building with no elevators, where tenants share a bath and kitchen with seven other tenants.

Santa Cruz has been the test case for putting Agenda 21 on the whole map. Speaking of maps, there is a very startling one which shows the aim of the Wild lands Project, part of Agenda 21.

Fifty percent of the country, under this new system, will be off-limits to humans, while most of the rest of the land will be highly controlled. There are little black spots on the map which show the locations of all the high-risers which will be built.

Agenda 21's logo centres around three symbols which represent "Es". The first one is Equity which uses law to change justice from social to equal. The idea of the "Precautionary Principle" means one is not allowed to harm anything, even small animals and even on one's own property.

The second one is Economy which will replace free enterprise with public/private partnerships. In other words, as Hitler called it, Fascism.

The third is Environmental which basically puts nature above man.

The main focus of Agenda 21 is to take control of the land because once they do that, they can control any human activity.

Then there's Global Citizenship Education Program, evidenced in the "No Child Left Behind" program. Our children will be educated into collectivism.

The third is control over and great reduction of population; whoever is left will be congregated in those crowded communities of hi-risers.

These globalists present the notion that the world population should not be more than 500 million. That means 93% of the existing population would have to be eliminated!

248

How do you suppose they intend to accomplish that? Or have been accomplishing it???

The Democratic and Republican parties are both in favour of World Government. The strategy is to go from global to local, infusing every state and community with their programs. These are done with help of ICLEI, International Council for Local Environmental Initiatives.

Many in this group have been insinuating themselves into local governments to implement Agenda 21 policies and directives, all to the detriment of that city or community. As of 2011, they have moved into several cities in almost every state in the Union.

Harvey Ruvin, vice-chairman of ICLEI once said, "Individual rights will have to take a back seat to the collective." That is eerily, historically familiar.

The good news is they are being fought hard – on that same local level. In Alabama last year, the governor banned any and all sustainability projects of the UN from being enforced in the state. It's a law, Senate Bill 477, passed unanimously.

"It seems that Agenda 21 does actually bring people together in communities - just not in the way the U.N. had hoped for," said Justice Gilpin-Green about this win in Alabama.

Further, he said, "It was citizen awareness and direct action that finally brought about the needed changes last week and that same awareness and action will be needed for the future of every other state."

In New Hampshire, work is being none on a similar measure.

In Arizona, 2012, the bill prohibiting any UN sustainability passed in the Senate and looks like it's a go in the House.

This is the only way to beat them, as individuals, members of a community, city or state; do everything possible to ban Agenda 21 from an area.

249

This is how Alabama did it because the governor, who was not willing to give up federal funding, was finally won over by a grassroots protest.

That's the carrot they dangle – federal funding. It's no better than welfare and much more deadly to our freedom because it's only meant to control and suppress on a grander scale than has ever existed before.

Agenda 21 must be revealed to everyone! Do what you can. Agenda 21 Designed to Spawn a One-World Government by Nancy Thorner - March 25, 2014

This piece is co-authored by Bonnie O’Neil, vice president of Eagle Forum in CA.

Although the initial impetus for Agenda 21 can be traced back to the Stockholm Conference of 1972, Agenda 21 became an official document at the 1992 Rio Conference through an extensive process of preparation at the professional level and negotiation at the political level.

Project 21 contained twenty-seven principles warning against a mode of growth that was leading to the extinction of life on earth. As such, Project 21 represented a major step forward in establishing the basic principles that must govern the conduct of nations and peoples towards each other and the Earth to ensure a secure and sustainable future. This plan was developed rather covertly, and due to that lack of transparency, we are still discovering some of the more grievous aspects of their Agenda.

250

Introduced as a cooperative task and challenge for world nations, Project 21 is based on two fundamental ideas: development and environment. To the Preparatory Council of the Rio Conference, it was impossible to have an environmentally sound planet in a socially unjust world, as these goals complement each other in each community and each country around the globe. They claimed without a global order with greater justice, tranquil prosperity would exist for no one.

An awareness of belonging to a wider human community brought with it an obligation to reduce inequalities as a permanent cause if a better future were to be provided to mankind.

Notice all the “buzz” words in the above statement. They should sound familiar, as they are words and labels used by our mainstream media and “progressives” of today to promote the concepts outlined in Agenda 21.

Upon learning of Agenda 21, and the vast scope of its reach into our lives, begs the question “How did it all happen and why haven’t I heard of it?”

It began when One hundred nations attended the 1992 Rio Education on Environment and Development (Agenda 21), and according to the UN information Centre, all nations in attendance agreed to the document.

Representing the U.S.A. was President George H. Bush, President, 1989 – 1993. In a News Conference given in Rio de Janeiro on June 13, 1992, Bush’s opening statement included the following remarks prior to questions taken from reporters:

“Let’s me be clear on one fundamental point. The United States fully intends to be the world’s preeminent leader in protecting the global environment. We have been that for many years. We will remain so. We believe that environment and development, the two subjects of this Conference, can and should go hand in hand. A growing economy creates the resources necessary for environmental protection and environmental protection makes growth sustainable over the long term.”

251

President Clinton signed U.N. Agenda 21 later on to continue the program in the United States. Agenda 21 is “soft-law,” so elements of it don’t have to be voted on by the Congress. That is particularly unfortunate, because the impact of this mandate will drastically impact our country in a myriad of ways, and yet basically two men inflicted this agenda on us all. A non-governmental organization, International Council of Local Environmental Initiatives (ICLEI), has the responsibility of carrying out the goals of Agenda 21. Over 600 cities in the U.S. have since become members of ICLEI, and the number is growing. Costs are paid by taxpayers.

Is it possible Bush and Clinton were unaware of the full impact Agenda 21 will have? Has it changed from the time they were first introduced to it? It is hard to imagine they would have inflicted on us what we are now in the process of experiencing.

They were likely persuaded by lofty Agenda 21 talking points, such as these which are taken from their website:

“The concentration of population growth in developing countries and economic growth in the industrialized countries has deepened, creating imbalances which are unsustainable, in either environmental or economic terms. . . Population must be stabilized, and rapidly. If we do not do it, nature will, and much more brutally. The rich must take the lead in bringing their development under control, reducing substantially their impacts on the environment, leaving environmental ‘space’ for developing countries to grow. The wasteful and destructive lifestyles of the rich cannot be maintained at the cost of the lives and livelihoods of the poor, and of nature.

For the rich, the transition to sustainable development need not require regression to a difficult or primitive life. On the contrary, it can lead to a richer life of expanded opportunities for self-realization and fulfilment.

More satisfying and secure, because, it is sustainable and more sustainable, because, its opportunities and benefits are more universally shared.”

252

When our rights and quality of life are being stripped from us, those talking points will not appease us. We will know the U.N. statements are simply “cleverly devised words and talking points” to push an anti-American way of life upon us. The U.N. statements are designed to avoid negative public objections. If we all realized the full impact of Agenda 21 objectives, we would not be at all compliant. Fortunately, some have dug out the bare facts of how Agenda 21 will negatively impact our lives, and discovered a very dismal picture. Imagine Russia just before it fell apart or possibly China today. There will be few freedoms, if any at all for citizens, as the rules and regulations will dictate a whole different life for you and me.

Americans are largely in the dark about Agenda 21 because facts have largely been kept from the public, but also because the recession slowed their plans a bit. However, they are now beginning to be more aggressive in their implementation process. We all must learn of the specifics their plan. Education is essential if we, the public, are to stop Agenda 21. Hopefully, we can do so before experiencing the huge adverse effects on our lives. Once implemented, it will be much harder to stop and restore what has been lost to us.

Are the American people going to sit passively by while the United Nations seeks to co-opt, via individual governments, and eventually spawn a one- world government where individuals are stripped of all personal rights and freedoms? The whole idea seems futuristic and impossible to comprehend, like something out of George Orwell’s 1984, but this is the goal of U.N. Agenda 21 for now, and it will happen unless an army of us rise up and demand it stop.

As Agenda 21 covers so many areas of our lives (sometimes called a whole life plan), each aspect of their agenda must be explained individually and carefully. That is why we will be writing articles in several instalments on issues relating to Agenda 21, among them being Property Rights and the Environment.

253

http://www.un.org/sustainabledevelopment/

Ensuring a life with DIGNITY

Are the intentions genuine? – read the entire report Their ultimate agenda are different? Why is UN directing the World?

Is it tool of UN for the “New World order”

Is it conceived with its new name? “2015 Time for Global Action” – “The Road to Dignity 2030” "Sustainable Development Goal SDG 2030"

For Hidden plan of “United Nations” to take control and become “Government of the World” – It is a Trap for India – Same as East India Company during British Raj

254

Protecting – our – PLANET

Who has scripted the Sustainable Goal 2030? It cannot be United Nations or UNSG on its own? Is it the brain child of? “Council of Foreign Relations” CFR – “Carnegie Endowment” “The Rockefeller’s Foundations” – “J. P. Morgan” & Others

255

UN Sustainable Development Summit 2015 Media Accreditation for the Sustainable Development Summit Opens until 9 September

2015 is the Time for Global Action? - “An Illusion”

2015 presents a historic and unprecedented opportunity to bring the countries and citizens of the world together to decide and embark on new paths to improve the lives of people everywhere. These decisions will determine the global course of action to end poverty, promote prosperity and well-being for all, protect the environment and address climate change.

In 2015, countries will adopt a “new sustainable development” agenda and a new global agreement on climate change. The actions taken in 2015 are expected to result in new sustainable development goals that build on the eight Millennium Development Goals. Explore this site to find out more about the efforts of the UN and its partners to build a better world. 2015 is the year of global action. Visit the UN Action 2015 site to find out how you can do your part. Action 2015. (Who are the Partners UN is talking about?)

256

On UN Charter Day, H. E. Mr Ban Ki Moon calls for ‘deeper cooperation’ Amid growing global challenges

On June 26th, 1945, the United Nations was born from the ashes and rubble of the Second World War as delegates from fifty nations came together to sign the UN Charter – the Organization’s founding document and the bedrock of global peace and development.

Seventy years later, Secretary-General Ban Ki-moon is returning to San Francisco where the Charter was first signed to celebrate the UN’s founding and call on the international community to renew their commitment towards the shaping of a better planetary future for all.

In an op-ed published today in The Huffington Post, Mr. Ban reiterated his hope that the human family would “come together with greater determination to work for a safer and more sustainable future for ‘we, the peoples,’ in whose name the Charter was drafted.” This appeal, he said, comes amid a growing list of global challenges plaguing Member States the world over.

“The 70th anniversary falls in a year of potentially momentous decisions on our common future. Countries are shaping what we hope will be an inspiring new sustainable development agenda and moving towards a meaningful agreement on climate change,” wrote Mr. Ban.

257

“Our goal is transformation”: we are the first generation that can erase poverty from the earth – and the last that can act to avoid the worst impacts of a warming world.” (What is the transformation Goal Mr Ban Ki – Moon is taking about???. The Goals proposed are already being practised by India , why we need to duplicate?)

The Secretary-General has frequently recalled his first encounter with the UN, dating back to his childhood during the Korean War when, as a displaced person fleeing his burning village, he and his family relied on the Organization to rescue them from the ravages of war.

His family, he has said, was saved from hunger by UN food relief operations and, when doubts surfaced over whether the world was concerned about their suffering, “the troops of many nations sacrificed their lives to restore security and peace.” (SG is trying to give “Fine words and trying to create a Sentimental Illusion”)

Beyond the indelible trauma that conflict has on a child, Mr. Ban’s first experience with the Organization also left him with the core conviction of the immense difference the UN can make in the lives of people around the world. (UN is trying duplicate what each country has already implemented. UNSG is only targeting Underdeveloped and Developing countries forgetting the fact that these problems exist even in developed countries. As it is a planned “Hidden Plan” of UN & USA to make UN the “Government of the World”)

Today, with a fresh set of challenges marking a pivotal moment for the planet – from the fight against climate change to the aspirations of a sustainable future – the Secretary-General confirmed that the UN is standing once again as a nexus of collaboration for all Member States.

“As the distinctions between the national and the international continue to fall away, challenges faced by one become challenges faced by all, sometimes gradually but often suddenly,” the Secretary-General concluded. “With our fates ever more entwined, our future must be one of ever deeper cooperation – nations united by a spirit of global citizenship that lives up to the promise of the Organization’s name.”

258

Secretary-General

In December, Secretary-General Ban Ki-moon issued his Synthesis Report, which presents the vision for the post-2015 sustainable development agenda. (Who were involved in preparing this Script – Plan – Report?- Will this plan not breed more corruption and accountability issue?)

Drawing from the experience of two decades of development practice and from the inputs gathered through an open and inclusive process, the report, “The Road to Dignity by 2030”, charts a road map to achieve dignity in the next 15 years. The Secretary-General formally presented the synthesis report to Member States on 8 January. (Is this plan not identical to the Millennium Goal Plan 2000/2015 just concluded?)

‘We can be the first generation that ends poverty’ Ban Ki-moon

This piece was first published by The Guardian. An African proverb teaches that “fine words do not produce food”. That wise counsel is foremost in my mind as leaders gather in Addis Ababa, Ethiopia, for a pivotal global financing conference to put the world on course to end poverty and protect the planet.

259

Read : Sl 3 on Pages 42-45 CFR (Council on Foreign Relations) – Sl No 19 Pages 98-97 & 112-115 “New World Order”.- As mentioned the Index above.

Above reports - (Global Financing is by whom? – is it already planned? Why IMF? Why goal of single currency of IMF in the world order? Mr Ban is referring to “Private funds” has he already planned in USA – GA is in dark???)

This must be a year for global action. In September, the international community will adopt a new set of sustainable development goals for the next 15 years. In December, governments have committed to reach a first-of-its-kind universal and meaningful climate change agreement in Paris. But without resources, commitments will amount to little more than promises on paper.

Building a sustainable world requires more than fine words, it needs finance. That is why it is encouraging that this year of action begins with the third international conference on financing for development in Addis Ababa. In a world in which both the global population and resource constraints are growing, development finance needs a reboot. The Addis Ababa conference can be the starting point for a new era of cooperation and global partnership?

Many obstacles stand in the way of a better life for people and the planet – but even in trying economic times, a lack of resources need not be one of them. The knowledge, technology and money exist. Billions of dollars are exchanged through trade and financial markets every day. Globally, public and private savings stand at around $22tn a year. The stock of global financial assets is estimated to be about $218tn. Just a small portion invested towards sustainable development would make a big difference. Everyone must play a part.

Of course, the most important source of funding for development starts with a country itself – and this is true even for the poorest country. Those resources could come from increased government revenues in the form of more effective taxation and additional investment by responsible business. (As mentioned by Prime Minster Mr Narendra Modi in his speech at UN, India is already way ahead in the identical plan why it allows UN to duplicate in our country India. Let India take help only in the area it needs help. )

260

At the same time, illicit financial flows rob developing countries of enormous sums of money – an estimated $50bn a year in Africa alone. Ills such as corruption, smuggling, and inadequate management of valuable natural resources deprive countries of much needed legitimate revenues.

Stronger and more inclusive international tax cooperation is fundamental to combat tax avoidance, tax havens and enhance a country’s ability to manage its own economy.

For least developed countries and Small Island developing states, foreign aid and climate finance represent an indispensable resource. Yet only a handful of donor countries have met their longstanding promise to invest 0.7% of gross national income in international aid. “Donors must do more to meet their financial commitments in a timely fashion”. (This is how as I mentioned UN & USA make permanent bas in this least Developed Countries and small Islands and never leave. They have Hidden Goals & intentions.)

It is also essential for the world to get on the pathway to securing $100bn a year by 2020 for “climate finance”. ?

As the engine for decent jobs and income, the private sector is the driving force of the global economy. Responsible private investment is central to the financial equation. The voices of people and communities are essential to these partnerships that ensure inclusive ownership for lasting results.

(Are Private sector already been lined up to fund, to gain total control of the world? But not being revealed at the moment? Is this a universal Trap on all countries, Under the UN hidden programme?)

I often hear people say that business and sustainable development are not compatible. The facts prove otherwise. At the climate summit in New York last September, “hundreds of business leaders committed nearly $200bn” in sustainable development investments.?? ( Naturally as most of them will be USA based business leaders who are part of the Hidden Goal to introduce new World Order and make UN the Government of the World” for their personal gains)

261

Around the world, companies that are building sustainability-centred business models are reaping rewards in better performance and higher profit. (“Who are the Hundreds of business leaders are most of them USA based Companies? “Mr Ban Ki – Moon is talking about? Are these political clouts are these already planned but not known?”- SG is used only as a scape goat)

It is time to ensure the right incentives and mutual accountability to unlock greater progress towards sustainable development. Innovation and the transfer of appropriate technologies are also essential.

With the right investments and policies, we can be the first generation that ends poverty and the last that avoids the worst effects of climate change. (Who has written this script of “sustainable Development Goal 2030”? Who are the people behind this script? Will it not make only rich richer).

The Addis Ababa conference on financing for development can mobilise the means for funding what people want most – better health, quality education, decent jobs, good roads and a cleaner, greener world. It can secure concrete commitments on issues such as finance, trade, debt, technology and innovation for the next generation. Global leaders must now back up fine words with food – and set the table for sustainable development and a life of dignity for all. (This is the back door platform for them to enter every country?)

At Stanford University, Ban says UN ready to build A better future for all

1. Why Mr Ban Ki – Moon spoke in Stanford is also pre - planned? Read “Council of Foreign Relations” – “Builderberg” – “Skull and Bones” Read my entire report

2. Is it a back door entry of UN in all countries before they become and act as the “Government of the World” which is also planned?

3. Who are the people behind writing this script and plan? 4. Does UN Secretary General on his own have the capacity to propose 5. such “proposed sustainable development goals” (SDGs)? 6. Who wrote what the Secretary General must speak at Stanford? 7. Read of Secret organisations and Goals of UN?

262

Mr Ban Ki – Moon Addressing at Stanford

The United Nations and the international community are experiencing an age of great difficulties and opportunities which will help define the future of the planet, Secretary-General Ban Ki-moon declared in a wide-ranging address that touched upon the myriad common challenges – from climate change to sustainable development currently facing humanity.

Delivering remarks at “Stanford University in Palo Alto, California”, yesterday afternoon, the Secretary-General told faculty members and others gathered that the marking of the UN’s 70th anniversary offered “a good moment to reflect on the past” but also an important opportunity to have “a conversation about what we can do to build a better future.”

“The new agenda will build on the gains of the past two decades, when hundreds of millions of people have been lifted out of extreme poverty,” he affirmed. “We want to finish the job while going further to build effective institutions, stable societies and lives of dignity for all. (”??????”) (“What is the Job” and what is the dignity Mr Ban Ki – Moon is talking about? The UN Hidden plan could be the job & “UN plans to control the world” is the Goal SG could be talking about to finish the Job“?

To that point, Mr. Ban indicated the upcoming climate conference, to be held in Paris in December, as well as the meeting on the “proposed sustainable development goals” (SDGs) and financing for development conference that will precede it, in New York and Addis Ababa, respectively, as milestones along the UN’s journey towards combating climate change and ending poverty once and for all. (In my opinion ending poverty once for all is only a illusion and a good pretext for UN & USA to permanently make their base is several countries which USA is not having a base. At present USA has presence in over 130 countries out of about 193 countries. Is this not truly dangerous?) (There are many hidden cleverly worded goals / scripted)

263

At the same time, listing the numerous peace and security challenges facing the UN – from Syria to Yemen to South Sudan – the Secretary-General observed that he had not only launched an urgent review of the Organization’s peace operations but was also strengthening the UN’s efforts to preventing human rights violations. (UNSC - USA created unrest, is largely responsible for such security challenges. UN for 70 years they never prevent- ed why this agenda now? Why this sudden transformation? Why UNSG or UNGA not questioned the UNSC lead by USA for creating such situation? )

Mr. Ban also offered a few reflections on the situation in Asia and the Pacific, where the engines of growth and economic power are continuing to shift as “China and India grow in global prominence and engagement”. (Why is UN concerned of nation’s growth? UN Is not a political body to interfere? Are only P5 UNSC only authorized to grow? Is Mr Ban Ki Moon talking on behalf of few powerful leaders in USA who are behind the scene responsible?????)

Nevertheless, “he warned”, the region presented challenges that could place at risk the “UN’s goals of prosperity, stability and dignity for all”, including competing territorial or maritime claims, political and communal tensions, and non-traditional security threats such as transnational organized crime. (What is UN Goals of “Prosperity, stability and dignity for all ” UNSG Mr Ban Ki - Moon is talking about?) (Why is UN interfering and trying to pose themselves as “Government of the World”?) (Who has empowered UNSG to Warn? Whom does he warn? Why SG is trying to be authoritative? What is UNSG & UNSC particularly USA role in the “New World Order”?)

“I have consistently called on all parties to resolve their disputes in the “South China Sea” in a peaceful and amicable manner, through dialogue and inconformity with international law, “including the UN Charter” he continued. “It is now more important than ever to avoid actions that would provoke or exacerbate tensions.” (Why this authoritative question by UNSG now? Who has empowered SG to pose such a question and concern and warn? China is part of P5 of UNSC is this only fake concern to create records of concern to ensure UNGA does not question UNSG or UNSC)

264

The Secretary-General’s emphasis on the SDGs (“proposed sustainable development goals”) reverberated throughout the day as Mr. Ban also met with the Chief Executive Officers of San Francisco’s most notable tech companies and urged them to expand the reach of new technologies “to achieve the world we want.” (What is the meaning of “to achieve the world we want”? What does UN want? Is it what UN wants or USA of P5 or some other secret body wants? Is UN talking on behalf of Hidden organization about the “New World Order?” / and UN to be the “Government of the World”?)

“I know the leaders in this room (addressing at Stanford) have achieved “tremendous success by embracing great challenges and turning them into new market opportunities,” he stated at a roundtable featuring the tech heads. “When it comes to achieving the sustainable development goals, I count on you to show the same visionary leadership.” Read (What tremendous success Mr Ban Ki- Moon is talking about? and asking whom? Who were the invitees at Stanford when Mr Ban Ki – Moon addressed? Why UNSG he chose Stanford to address? Sl.No 19 Pages 97 to 115 “New World Order”. - As mentioned the Index above. Sl.No 31-45 explaining the hidden role “CFR Council of Foreign Relations” & “Committee of 300” where 3000 people were sent to Stanford, to Government offices, Banks, financial institutions, educational institutions etc for future plan of Implementing “New World Order” & UN representing as “Government of the World” )

265

2015 - Time for Global Action for People and Planet Ban highlights vital role of South-South cooperation In attaining Sustainable Development Goals

Marking the United Nations Day for South-South Cooperation, Secretary-General Ban Ki-moon today urged the acceleration of the development momentum across the global South, while the UN labour chief highlighted the great potential for developing countries working together to help improve the working lives of millions.

“South-South cooperation can therefore play a key role in implementing the 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development, which is to be adopted by world leaders at a summit later this month at UN Headquarters,” Mr. Ban said in his message for the Day.

He went on to say “as we embark on efforts to achieve the Sustainable Development Goals, we need to accelerate development momentum across the South, including by building resilience and mitigating risk.”

He also noted that developing countries have become critical actors, saying a majority have joined the middle-income club, and some have attained impressive economic growth, high savings and investment rates, and a larger share of trade in goods and services.

266

“The New Development Bank recently established by Brazil, Russia, India, China and South Africa, as well as the proposed Asian Infrastructure Investment Bank, hold considerable promise to complement existing sources of finance for development,” Mr. Ban said.

In his message, International Labour Organization (ILO) Director-General Guy Ryder said there is a lot of room for scaling up South-South cooperation and for strengthening interregional cooperation in the global South.

“Today the International Labour Organisation highlights the role of South-South cooperation in helping to raise the living standards of millions of women and men through decent jobs as we confront the challenges of delivering the 2030 Development Agenda,” he added.

(Why ILO and UN are interfering in the internal issue of countries and their respective role to promote their own citizens? Why it assumes all is well in Developed countries?)

To mark the importance of South-South cooperation, the General Assembly decided to observe this Day on 12 September every year, commemorating the adoption in 1978 of the Buenos Aires Plan of Action for Promoting and Implementing Technical Cooperation among Developing Countries.

The Assembly also urged all relevant UN organizations and multilateral institutions to intensify their efforts to effectively mainstream the use of South-South cooperation in the design, formulation and implementation of their regular programmes and to consider increasing allocations of human, technical and financial resources for supporting South-South cooperation initiatives.

“The 2030 Development Agenda is a once-in-a-generation chance to improve the lives of billions and to respond to the universal demand for decent jobs,” the ILO chief said. “We must embrace the opportunity and encourage the solidarity – including the solidarity of South-South cooperation– that will help to make this goal a reality.” (Who are the people who drafted the 2030 Development Agenda? What has this programme to do with South-South co-operation)

267

UN agencies helping empower young girls to stand up Against female genital mutilation in Ethiopia

In a country where female genital mutilation is commonplace, the United Nations Population Fund and the UN Children’s Fund in Ethiopia are helping young girls to stand up against the procedure.

This work falls in line with the new sustainable development agenda where goal five sets out to empower females and ensure gender equality over the next fifteen years.

In Afar Region of Ethiopia, infibulation is a traditional practice. This is where elderly women from the community remove the clitoris, as well as the labia minora and labia majora, from young girls.

Afar has the second highest rate of FGM in Ethiopia which is why projects and awareness programmes are being rolled out across schools and communities to educate people on the harm caused by the traumatic tradition.

After one such talk by CARE Ethiopia, twenty four year old Hawa Buha became one of the first in her conservative pastoralist community to defy the tradition.

She convinced her parents to let her forego the mutilation but faced much ridicule as a result. “People were saying that I would die as a witch as no one would marry an uncircumcised girl,” said Ms. Hawa.

268

Despite the criticism and fears of being alone, more girls from Ms. Hawa’s area joined her in her decision and refused the procedure.

Supporting this movement, religious leaders in Afar have been campaigning for over fifteen years asking communities to abandon FGM and reaching out to leaders to explain that the dangerous surgery has no basis in Islam.

In 2006, the Ethiopian government finally criminalised the procedure and to help enforce this, the UNFPA-UNICEF Joint Programme of Female Genital Mutilation began facilitating conversations about the tradition in the hope of challenging entrenched ideas.

Committees were set up at the kebele (sub-district) and village levels to monitor progress. These committees comprised local leaders, ex-circumcisers, local judges, village elders and religious leaders.

By 2013, all of the six Afar districts covered by the Programme had publicly declared abandonment of FGM. Some 7,000 girls, including Ms. Hawa, were spared circumcision during this period – an unprecedented trend.

Despite avoiding the procedure and being deemed unfit and unclean for marriage, Ms Hawa still had an offer of marriage. As part of another local tradition named”absuma”, Ms. Hawa was required to marry her first-born male cousin, taking away her own choice when it came to a potential husband.

Once again standing up women’s rights, Ms. Hawa refused the marriage. After intense uproar, threats and lengthy negotiations, she was finally allowed to marry a man of her own choosing allowing others in the community to follow suit and feel empowered too.

Enehaba Seid, the man Ms. Hawa chose to marry said: “We are the pioneers in our locality, and many young people have followed us. In the past, no one wanted to touch an uncircumcised girl now, young men are fighting over these girls.”

269

Now parents to two children, it seems this young couple are inspiring females to make their own choices and changing the views people have towards women who haven’t undergone FGM. They are encouraging women to feel empowered and helping Ethiopia take the first steps towards a more sustainable future.

Africa’s biggest acts release the continent’s first crowd sourced song in support of The Global Goals Campaign Written, recorded, produced and released by Africans for Africans, the song attempts to ignite the political passions of young people to hold their leaders to account in meeting the “United Nations Sustainable Development Goals”: to end extreme poverty, fight inequality and tackle climate change by 2030.

Tell everybody is Africa’s contribution to the ambitious global initiative to get the UN’s Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) to everyone on the planet within 7 days of being adopted by all the world’s leaders on 25 September. African artists release a song to support the @UN #globalgoals http://bit.ly/1OiC9W3 #Action2015

The song will be released by Universal Music for download on iTunes and Apple Music. Both Universal Music and iTunes, alongside the artists and producers have waived their royalties and all proceeds will be donated to charity.

Nobel peace prize nominee and Africa’s ambassador for the Global Goals campaign, Victor Ochen said: “The song is a triumph! Not only to your ears but your mind too. I hope this song activates young people to start challenging their governments to deliver these goals, starting today!”

To capture the voice of Africa’s youth, award-winning producers Cobhams Asuquo (Nigeria), David King David Muthami, from Kenya, and Ellputo, from Mozambique, decided to crowd source two verses (one in French and one in English) using a competition, “Add Your Voice/Add Your Verse”.

270

During the two-week competition, 5,712 people from 24 African countries submitted lyrics via their mobile phones. The winners received a $500 prize each and a song writing credit on the track. Cobhams Asuquo said, “We decided to let the young voices of Africa be heard in this song. Not only did we love the winning verses but all the entries informed the vision, lyrics and sound of the song. The African youth are powerhouses in their own right and collectively they can make change happen.”

“As artists we have the opportunity to reach so many people, and an obligation to give them more than music, more than entertainment but to educate and empower them as well. This is our gift and our privilege,” said Mafikizolo’s Theo Kgosinkwe and Nhlanhla Nciza

National Geographic Society wins UN environmental prize For science and innovation

The National Geographic Society, one of the largest non-profit scientific and educational institutions in the world that reaches more than 700 million people each month, is this year’s winner of the United Nations Champions of the Earth award in the area of science and innovation.

“In a year when the “world aims to finalize the Sustainable Development Goals” and sign a new agreement on climate change, the influence and leadership demonstrated by National Geographic is more important than ever,” said Achim Steiner, Executive Director of the “UN Environment Programme (UNEP)”, in announcing the award.

271

The National Geographic Society joins South Africa’s Black Mamba Anti-Poaching Unit as the winners announced so far.

The remaining laureates will be revealed throughout September, UNEP said, and the awards will be handed out at a ceremony at the close of the Sustainable Development Summit, to be held from 25 to 27 September at UN Headquarters.

“The National Geographic Society is a unique organization driven by a passionate belief in the power of science, exploration and storytelling to enlighten, excite and change the world,” Mr. Steiner said. “By engaging citizens and stakeholders in solutions-based thinking and dialogue, they directly address environmental issues that impact us all – from air quality and biodiversity to sustainable cities and ecosystem management.”

National Geographic has supported some of the most historic expeditions in the world, including the first explorers to reach the North Pole and the discovery of Machu Picchu – a lost mountaintop city of the Inca, in the Peruvian Andes, as well as critical species studies such as Jane Goodall’s chimpanzee research in Tanzania’s Gombe Stream Park and Dian Fossey’s mountain gorilla research in Rwanda.

Since its creation in 1888, UNEP said, the Society has funded thousands of research, conservation and education programmes around the globe to support the next generation of explorers and scientists as they push the boundaries of discovery and encourage citizen science.

And every month, National Geographic reaches more than 700 million people through its media platforms, products and events.

“The research, ground-breaking articles and stunning photography published in their magazines and publicized on television inspire people to care about the planet, giving them the transformational power to form opinion and influence the development trajectory of our planet,” according to UNEP.

The annual Champions of the Earth award is the highest environmental accolade that the UN can confer upon outstanding individuals and organisations.

272

UN envoy for education unveils plan to get 1 million Syrian children In school in 21 days

With more than 4 million children having left Syria – half of them for Lebanon, Jordan and Turkey – in a “crisis of biblical proportions,” the United Nations Special Envoy for Global Education today said $250 million could get 1 million refugee children in school by the time the UN General Assembly meets later this month.

“While the recent focus has rightly been on refugees entering Europe, there are 4 million refugees – 2 million of them children – who are holed up in Jordan, Turkey and Lebanon, many living on the streets in a crisis which is now of biblical proportions,” Gordon Brown told reporters at UN Headquarters via telephone.?

The former British Prime Minister drew attention to the fact that “traditionally education has fallen through the net because humanitarian aid goes to food and shelter, and development aid does not plan for emergencies.” But given the “severity” of the crisis and “urgency” to act to address the problem, Mr. Brown appealed for a swift response to a $250 million proposal that would get 1 million Syrian refugee children in school in 21 days in Lebanon, Jordan and Turkey using a “double shift system.”

He explained that under the proposed plan in Lebanon, for example, the local children would go to the school in the morning and the same classrooms would be used for Syrian children to get an education in the afternoon. At a cost of $10 a week, he said, the children can get an education that would help prepare them for the future and give them hope under this “practical, operable and deliverable plan.”

273

And in a separate warning about the Syrian child refugee crisis, the UN Children’s Fund (UNICEF) said the conflict in Syria has left some 16 million people – almost half of them children – in need of life-saving assistance and protection, including basic health care, safe water and sanitation and education.

“The refugee and migrant crisis in Europe will only worsen if greater efforts are not made to end the protracted conflict in Syria and address the humanitarian needs of the millions affected by the violence,” UNICEF said.

UNICEF reported that some 2 million children are now out of school inside Syria, while up to 5 million people living in cities and communities across the country have suffered the consequences of long and sometimes deliberate interruptions to their water supplies in recent months.

Despite the enormous challenges facing those affected by the conflict, funding for humanitarian assistance is not keeping pace with needs – UNICEF’s appeal for 2015 for programmes in Syria and surrounding countries, totalling $903 million, is less than half funded.

274

Forests of the future fundamental to achieving “Sustainable Development Goals” – UN agency

The 14th World Forestry Congress concluded today with a declaration setting out a vision for 2050 that sees forests playing “a decisive role” in ending hunger, improving livelihoods and combating climate change, said the United Nations Food and Agriculture Organisation (FAO).

The Congress “underlined that forests are critical to achieving the 17 Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) in a message to the United Nations Sustainable Development Summit, which will meet later this month in New York to adopt the 2030 development agenda,” FAO said in a news release.

The message says that SDG 15, which addresses the need to sustainably manage forests, trees and forests, is the key to achieving several of the other goals, including those related to ending poverty, achieving food security, promoting sustainable agriculture and ensuring sustainable energy for all. World Forestry Congresses have been held under the auspices of FAO since the establishment of the Organization in 1945.

After a weeklong meeting in Durban, South Africa, the Congress also issued a message to the Conference of Parties to the UN Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC), set to meet in Paris in December 2015 to hash out a new global climate change agreement.

275

“Climate change poses a serious threat to the planet, forests and forest- dependent people. However, at the same time, countries’ responses to climate change can present new opportunities for forests, such as additional sources of financing and greater political support for forest governance,” the message says.

In addition, Congress participants recommended a set of actions that include increasing understanding among governments and other stakeholders of both the challenges and opportunities that climate change presents.

While saying that world’s forests must be recognized as “more than trees,” the so-called Durban Declaration adopted today drew attention to the fact that forests hold vast potential to play a decisive role in ending hunger, improving livelihoods and combating climate change.

“The largest gathering on forests this decade set out its vision of how forests and forestry should look in 2050,” FAO said. “The vision calls for the forests of the future to be ‘fundamental’ for food security and improved livelihoods.”

“The declaration reflects the extremely rich and diverse set of viewpoints and experiences of all participants in the Congress, who recommended ways to make the vision a reality,” said Tiina Vähänen, Deputy Director of FAO’s Forest Assessment, Management and Conservation Division.

The Congress also saw the launch of an international five-year forests and water action plan to recognize the role of trees and forests in maintaining the water cycle, and to ensure appropriate management of one of the world’s largest sources of freshwater.

Almost 4,000 delegates from 142 countries attended the Congress, including representatives from civil society, intergovernmental organizations, non-governmental organizations, universities and the private sector as well as around 30 ministers and deputy ministers.

The Congress is held every six years, and this year’s event was hosted by South Africa with technical support from FAO and marked the first time the gathering was held on African soil since its inception in 1926.

276

GOALS

. POVERTY . HUNGER AND FOOD SECURITY . HEALTH . EDUCATION . GENDER EQUALITY AND WOMEN’S EMPOWERMENT . WATER AND SANITATION

. ENERGY . ECONOMIC GROWTH . INFRASTRUCTURE, INDUSTRIALIZATION . INEQUALITY . CITIES . SUSTAINABLE CONSUMPTION AND PRODUCTION .

. CLIMATE CHANGE . OCEANS . BIODIVERSITY, FORESTS, DESERTIFICATION . PEACE AND JUSTICE . PARTNERSHIPS

277

Obama’s Perfect Plan for The Economic Decline of America By Peter Ferrara - June 27, 2012 Ferrara at Forbes.com:

Editor’s note: This piece was first published at Forbes.com.

Last week on June 14, President Obama announced his economic plan to finally bring economic recovery and growth to the U.S. in a much ballyhooed address in Cleveland. He threw down the gauntlet to Mitt Romney on the issue, saying “more than anything else, this election presents a choice between two fundamentally different visions of how to create strong sustained growth; how to pay down our long term debt; and most of all, how to generate good, middle-class jobs….”

Truer words have never been spoken by the President. So let’s examine the two fundamentally different visions and see which can produce strong sustained growth, pay down our long term debt, and generate good, middle class jobs.

Under President Obama’s plan, on January 1 of next year the top tax rates of virtually every major federal tax will increase, as already enacted under current law. That is because the tax increases of Obama care would go into effect, and the Bush tax cuts would expire, which Obama refuses to renew for singles making over $200,000 a year, and couples making over $250,000. The English translation of that target for the tax increases is the nation’s small businesses, job creators and investors.

278

As a result, with the Bush tax cuts just expiring for these targeted taxpayers, the top 2 income tax rates would jump by nearly 20%, the capital gains tax would soar by nearly 60%, the tax on dividends would nearly triple, the Medicare payroll tax would skyrocket by 62% for the above dis favoured taxpayers, and the top death tax rate would rise from the grave to 55%.

That is all on top of the highest corporate tax rate in the industrialized world at nearly 40%; counting the federal corporate rate of 35% and state corporate rates on average. But under Obama, there is no relief in sight. Instead, Obama is pushing still more tax increases. Under his proposed Buffett rule, the capital gains tax rate would increase by 100%, and would be the fourth highest in the industrialized world. Many OECD countries, in fact, impose no capital gains tax because it is just another layer of taxation on capital income on top of the corporate and individual income taxes. All of this would leave American businesses uncompetitive in the global economy.

How is this going to produce strong sustained growth and generate good middle class jobs? It is going to do just the opposite, as the multiple tax rate increases would only sharply reduce the incentive for productive activities, such as savings, investment, business expansion, business start-ups, and job creation. That will simply encourage even more capital flight from the U.S., and a continued capital strike by the capital that remains. All this translates into yet another recession next year, with fewer jobs, rising unemployment, and soaring deficits and debt. This does not signal Obama fighting for the middle class; instead it points to him trashing the economic chances of the very voters whose favour he seeks.

The alternative GOP vision is spelled out in the budget produced by House Budget Committee Chairman Paul Ryan, which was passed by the Republican controlled House, and is supported by Romney.

279

That includes individual tax reform closing loopholes and reducing tax rates to 25% for couples earning over $100,000 per year, and 10% for those making less, and corporate tax reform slashing crony capitalist loopholes and reducing the 35% federal rate to an internationally competitive 25%. And then the aforementioned Obama tax increases would be repealed. CBO has scored these tax reforms as restoring federal revenues to their long term, post war, historical average from 1948 to 2008 of 18.5% of GDP.

The reduced tax rates under such reform would produce exactly the opposite results of Obama’s tax rate increases, increasing incentives for all of the above productive activities. That would restore traditional American prosperity and job creation as a result.

But in his speech in Cleveland, Obama opposed tax reform that would lower rates and close loopholes. He said it would be a tax increase on the middle class. The problem for Obama is that Ryan’s tax reform plan does not involve any tax increase for the middle class. His plan cuts tax rates for every taxpayer, including those in the middle class. And that has always been the Republican position.

President Reagan cut tax rates across the board for everyone, including the middle class, and expanded the personal exemption, which benefits middle and lower income taxpayers the most. President Bush cut tax rates for everyone and for lower income workers by a greater proportion than for higher income workers. As a result, by 2007, before President Obama had even entered office, official IRS data showed that the middle 20% of all income earners, the true middle class, paid only 4.7% of all federal income taxes.

What Obama has done throughout his Presidency is the opposite of tax reform. He has expanded the loopholes and increased rates. Those loopholes have included new and expanded welfare tax credits and corporate welfare like his green energy hand outs. When his own Simpson-Bowles Commission recommended real tax reform closing loopholes in return for reducing rates, Obama only paid lip service to it, but didn’t lift a finger to advance the proposal.

280

Problematic for Obama is that higher tax rates with more loopholes reduce economic growth, jobs and prosperity. The higher rates discourage critical job creating, pro-growth investment, and the loopholes distort markets and promote inefficiency and waste, which is a further drag on growth. Tax reform with lower rates and fewer loopholes, by sharp contrast, promotes powerful pro-growth incentives while reducing the inefficient drag of market distorting loopholes. That is why the bipartisan tax reform of 1986 under President Reagan, when America was under adult supervision, was so powerful in fuelling the generation long, 25 year, Reagan boom from 1982 to 2007.

A second component of Obama’s plan is a blizzard of increased regulatory costs and barriers. The chief rainmaker here is the EPA, which is imposing through regulation the cap and trade legislation that even an overwhelmingly Democrat Congress refused to pass. That is just brewing up, but will effectively be another tax increase of trillions on the economy through higher electricity, gasoline, and other energy costs. Further EPA regulatory storms are forcing the shutdown of coal fired power plants all across the country, and preventing the construction of new ones, exactly the opposite of China. Interior and other regulatory authorities have set over 90% of available federal onshore and offshore jurisdictions off limits for oil and gas exploration and production. Obama’s regulatory minions have also refused to allow construction of the Keystone XL pipeline to bring Canadian oil to Gulf refineries.

Another storm front is building through hundreds of new regulations in the pipeline thanks to the Dodd-Frank legislation. Those added costs and barriers threaten the availability of business and consumer credit essential for economic recovery and new jobs. Further storm clouds arise from the Obama care takeover of the entire health care sector, just starting to increase the costs of health insurance and care. The Obama care employer mandate is already killing jobs before it even becomes effective, as potential employers know they will be required to buy the most expensive health coverage for each of their employees.

281

These added regulatory costs are all effective additional tax increases on the economy, adding still further to the prospects for renewed recession by next year. But in his Cleveland speech, Obama just derided the idea of regulatory relief as a Romney GOP policy to “eliminate most regulations.”

He characterized such relief as the “promise to roll back regulations on banks and polluters, on insurance companies and oil companies” and decried that, “They’ll roll back regulations designed to protect consumers and workers.”

But the Romney GOP plan is precisely to repeal all of the above costly and unnecessary regulatory burdens through the repeal of Obama care and Dodd-Frank. These would all amount to further tax cuts, further boosting economic recovery, jobs and growth.

In his Cleveland speech, President Obama continued to propound his fundamental economic theory that what drives economic recovery, jobs and growth is increased government spending. That is why his 2013 budget proposes the highest government spending in world history, following an $800 billion, 27% increase in federal spending from 2008 to 2012, with a proposed 53% increase in annual federal spending from $3.8 trillion today to a record shattering $5.8 trillion by 2022. This President Obama budget proposes a very grand total of $47 trillion in spending over the entire 10 years, another all-time world record.

Is draining all of that money out of the private sector really going to create strong sustained growth, pay down our long term debt, and generate good, middle-class jobs? Or is it going to bring the chaos of Greece and Western Europe to America?

Just as Obama avoids any real tax reform, his budget also fails to propose any significant entitlement reform. As a result, CBO projects that under current policies authored by the Obama budget, federal spending soars to 30% of GDP by 2027, 40% by 2040, 50% by 2060, and 80% by 2080.

282

That compares to the long term, post war, stable, historical average of 20% of GDP that prevailed for 60 years from 1948 to 2008, under which America prospered as the strongest economy in world history. Obama’s Huge Government spending breakout from that stable, long term level is just the perfect Grecian formula for America, as it would undoubtedly create the same spending, deficit and debt crisis here that we see in Greece and Western Europe more generally.

Maybe that is why Obama’s budget won exactly zero votes on the floor of the House, including from any Democrat, and won the same Big Sombrero on the floor of the Senate. In sharp contrast, Ryan’s budget supported by Romney passed the House with bipartisan support. For all of the yelling and screaming over the Ryan budget, it simply returns federal spending to the long term, post war historical average of 20% of GDP, within 3 years. It averts entirely the developing deficit and debt crisis by consistently reducing the national debt, until ultimately that debt is paid off entirely. That results from the operation over the years of Ryan’s spending and entitlement reforms to be adopted today, rather than future spending cuts.

But in Cleveland, Obama once again derided such highly desirable federal spending restraint back to the long-term post war historical average as “strip[ping] down government to national security and a few other basic functions.” Obama claims that under the Ryan budget, “here’s some of what would happen if that cut that they’ve proposed was spread evenly across the budget: 10 million college students would lose an average of $1,000 each in financial aid, 200,000 children would lose the chance to get an early education in the Head Start program. There would be 1,600 fewer medical research grants for things like Alzheimer’s and cancer and AIDS; 4,000 fewer scientific research grants, eliminating support for 48,000 researchers, students and teachers.”

283

Of course Obama’s lead in, “if that cut they’ve proposed was spread evenly across the budget,” is the tip-off that all of this is fabricated. For the Ryan budget proposes no across the board spending cuts spread evenly across the budget. It focuses on wasteful and unnecessary spending that needs to be cut, and fundamental entitlement reform that solves the long term problem, leadership that Obama fails to provide. Instead Obama demagogues Ryan’s proposals, saying they would “turn Medicare into a voucher program, which will shift more costs to seniors and eventually end the program as we know it.” But Ryan’s Medicare would serve seniors far better than Medicare under Obama care, which would actually end Medicare as we know it, as I have explained before.

Obama further proclaims that Ryan’s proposals “would take away coverage from another 19 million Americans who rely on Medicaid – including millions of nursing home patients, and families with autism and other disabilities.” In truth, Ryan’s Medicaid would be better for the poor and needy than Obama’s Medicaid, as I have also explained in detail elsewhere.

Obama has been President for almost 4 years now, and does not have a good record of producing strong sustained growth, paying down our long term debt, and generating good, middle class jobs. So it should be no surprise that he is proposing for the future the opposite of everything that would produce those results. What Obamanomics has already given us is the worst recovery from any recession since the Great Depression, with the slowest growth and the highest long term unemployment, as I have also discussed elsewhere

That is why the Census Bureau reports real middle class wages and income are declining, with more Americans in poverty today than at any time in the more than 50 years that Census has been tracking poverty. And no, Obama can’t say that is because the recession was so bad, because America’s historical record is the worse the recession the stronger the recovery. Based on that historical record, we should be in the third year of a booming economic recovery by now.

284

So Obama doesn’t have any credibility on how to produce strong sustained growth, pay down our long term debt, and generate good, middle class jobs. Based on Obama’s economic address in Cleveland, the real question in this election is whether this is still America, or whether it is now Argentina.

— Peter Ferrara

Peter Ferrara is a Heartland senior fellow for entitlement and budget policy, a senior fellow at the Social Security Institute, and the general counsel of the American Civil Rights Union.

He served in the White House Office of Policy Development under President Reagan, and as Associate Deputy Attorney General of the United States under the first President Bush. He is a graduate of Harvard College and Harvard Law School. He is author of The Obama care Disaster, from the Heartland Institute, and President Obama's Tax Piracy, and his latest book: America's Ticking Bankruptcy Bomb: How the Looming Debt Crisis Threatens the American Dream-and How We Can Turn the Tide Before It's Too Late.

285

United Nations The Un-Hidden Agenda for “World Government” (This page contains video intensive documentation of Project Humanbeings- first.org - Please be patient while the page loads) What's next after Osama Bin Laden? | 9/11 Revisited 10th Year | 9/11 and Imperial Mobilization | What is War on Terror |Osama bin Laden | Un- Hidden Agenda for World Government Project Human beings first's deconstruction of 9/11 What's next after Osama Bin Laden?

You are already done reading if you still accept, ten years into 9/11, that an Ali Baba from his perch in the Hindu kush mountains can so trivially reduce the sole superpower into international Barbarianism and domestic police-state, all with his magic carpet. Please spend the rest of your life chasing your 'American Dreams'.

You might perhaps also prefer to be here instead of studying with Project www.Humanbeingsfirst.org – until it's time to welcome the next Super Ali Baba++ when you shall once again have the great pleasure to 'United We Stand' with your president, or, run frantically like the “9/11 Truth Movement” crowd trying to outdo each other in what is “truth” after the fact, ex post facto, once matters are already fait accompli and world government is fully in place! The 9/11 “Truth Seekers” are still at it ten years into 9/11 (The Toronto Hearings) for what was already obvious on day one, instead of focussing on what is not yet a fait accompli to prevent it from ever becoming one!

However, if your mind is unable to accept that an Ali Baba on a flying carpet possessed of no matter what magical powers, can so easily reduce the sole superpower to the status of a vanilla third world dictatorship steeped in Orwellian New Speak, and you want to do something to prevent the next Super Ali Baba++ from cementing your existence in a total prison-state, please read on.

286

The first thing you must understand, before you can understand anything, is the role of absurdities and fait accompli in political science:

Zahir Ebrahim: Convince People of Absurdities and get them Acquiescing to Atrocities - the first rule of hegemony when 'democracy is inimical to imperial mobilization.'

Well, finally I can say welcome, bien venue, and welcome, to the Reality Speak of 'Imperial Mobilization'! -- Now read on

Zahir Ebrahim: First we had Ali Baba attacking America from its magnificent flying machine

President Obama Warns Not To Challenge Official 9/11 Story: [youtube=http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=kvg65o7z028]

'I am aware that there is still some who would question, or even justify the offense of 9/11. But let us be clear. Al Qaeeda killed nearly 3000 people on that day. The victims were innocent men, women, and children from America and many other nations who had done nothing to harm anybody. And yet Al Qaeeda chose to ruthlessly murder these people, claimed credit for the attack, and even now states their determination to kill on a massive scale. They have affiliates in many countries, to try to expand their reach. These are not opinions to be debated. These are facts to be dealt with.'

President Bush Addresses the U.N. warning the world not to tolerate malicious lies concerning the attacks of 9/11: [youtube=http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6K5M0xtxQVQ]

287

'Let us never tolerate outrageous conspiracy theories concerning the attacks of September the 11th. Malicious lies that attempt to shift the blame away from the terrorists themselves, away from the guilty.'

Zahir Ebrahim: What president George W. Bush meant by 'Let us never tolerate outrageous conspiracy theories'

Zahir Ebrahim: Why Wikileaks 'leaked' that Osama Bin Laden is still alive and what President Barack Obama meant by 'These are not opinions to be debated. These are facts to be dealt with.'

Zahir Ebrahim: Next we shall have the Super Ali Baba++ attacking America from its magnificent flying machines now that Ali Baba has officially been laid to rest, and both Wikileaks and the declassified FBI memo have also foretold of the coming UFOs

288

9/11 Revisited 10th Year | 9/11 and Imperial Mobilization | What is War on Terror | Un-Hidden Agenda for World Government

9/11 Revisited: 10th Year! Some American Voices

289

Zahir Ebrahim: WTC Towers Were The Victim of Someone's Terrorism – Obviously – BUT HOW?

 We Already Know WHY – To Launch Imperial Mobilization thinly disguised as War on Terror!

 Post 9/11 events automatically verify WHO Benefitted – Namely: the globalists WHO Wanted a New Pearl Harbour to create the pretexts for One-World Government!

 But, was this super terrorism on 9/11 also a New Hiroshima?

 Or, just a conventional Controlled Demolition with new-age explosives as it prima facie appears to be?

 Is the pursuit of that technical question of HOW exactly the WTC towers were brought down in this Operation Canned Goods look-alike, really pertinent to derailing imperial mobilization to one-world government which was enabled by that super terrorism? Even the Financial Times now argues for world government!

Zahir Ebrahim: Ten years later, the world still awaits an effective political- judicial-legislative-accountability-enforcement path from activists demonstrating 9/11 Truth being an 'Operation Canned Goods' to launch one-world government, to the public derailing Imperial Mobilization! And the world will keep on waiting....

(Warning: See Project Human beings first's No-Affiliation-Notice first)

290

Zahir Ebrahim's Open Letter to 9/11 Truth Chiefs April 30, 2011

Zahir Ebrahim's Comment on Judy Wood's 'The New Hiroshima'

Why is Judy Wood poisoning her own well? The New Hiroshima Part-3 By Zahir Ebrahim

Letter on why I no longer trust Steven Jones et. al.'s 9/11 narra- tives: revisiting 9/11 as a techie

And here is the smoking gun which unarguably shows Steven Jones as the establishment's own favoured scientist!

Caption Professor Steven Jones of BYU (standing second from left) officially appointed in 1989 by the President of the United States, George H.W. Bush Sr., as an establishmentarian scientist to lead the DOE investigation into the potentially revolutionizing discovery of Cold Fusion. Can a George Bush Sr.'s trusted establishmentarian scientist suddenly become a genuine dissenting scientist against the same establishment in George Bush Jr.'s administration as anything other than controlled opposition?

291

Zahir Ebrahim’s October 2009 Letter to Editor – Journal of 9/11 Studies: The pursuit of 9/11 truth

Zahir Ebrahim’s April 2008 Letter to Editor – Journal of 9/11 Studies On how does their focus on 9/11 deter a nuclear attack on Iran?

Zahir Ebrahim: 911 A Fait Accompli – Pay Attention to Political Science! April 13, 2009

Zahir Ebrahim: Reflections on Science in the Service of Empire November 30, 2009

Zahir Ebrahim: Convince People of Absurdities and get them Acquiescing to Atrocities: The Enduring Power of Machiavellian Political Science April 07, 2010

History's Actors vs. Learned Spectators: “We're an empire now, and when we act, we create our own reality. And while you're studying that reality -- judiciously, as you will -- we'll act again, creating other new realities, which you can study too, and that's how things will sort out. We're history's actors . . . and you, all of you, will be left to just study what we do.” --- Senior Advisor to George W. Bush White House, explaining to the learned pundits of America, the Enduring Power of Machiavellian Political Science and Fait Accompli, The New York Times, October 17, 2004. The irreversible power of fait accompli -- its only antidote is in prevention, by shrewdly pre-empting history's actors; not in belated reaction, in assiduously studying the debris left behind!

292

Zahir Ebrahim: How to derail 'imperial mobilization' and pre-empt the crossing of the Nuclear Rubicon April 09, 2008

Message to the United States Congress from Project Human beings first: It's now or never! October 02, 2008

So, why did they not act when the iron was hot? If one wishes to comprehend why, despite all the blatant obviousness, the entire gamut of Western dom, from its leaders who wage endless wars on terrorism to those who make much fanfare of their standing up to status-quo as leaders of dissent, and its apathetic public caught in between willingly accepting every mind-fck from their respective pied pipers, do nothing to effectively interdict the rule by oligarchy, the following candid observation suffices to coldly illuminate matters:

'The real value of Tragedy and Hope ... [is the] bold and boastful admission by Dr. Quigley that there actually exists a relatively small but powerful group which has succeeded in acquiring a choke-hold on the affairs of practically the entire human race. Of course we should be quick to recognize that no small group could wield such gigantic power unless millions of people in all walks of life were “in on the take” and were willing to knuckle down to the iron-clad regimentation of the ruthless bosses behind the scenes. As we shall see, the network has succeeded in building its power structure by using tremendous quantities of money (together with the vast influence it buys) to manipulate, intimidate, or corrupt millions of men and women and their institutions on a world-wide basis.' (W. Cleon Skousen, The Naked Capitalist, 1970

Is this “hate” also causing the “Radicalization of American Muslims” – as congressman Peter King would still like the American public to believe in 2011?

293

Is this “hate” filled “militant Islam” the problem and “moderate Islam” the solution – as Muslim house niggers preach from the massa's lesson plan? Or, did the US Military carry out a Nuclear Coup d'état against the United States to launch its “Clash of Civilizations”? Why else would the White House immediately promote General Richard B. Myers to Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff – when the catastrophic failure to interdict 9/11 happened on his watch? youtube=http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=75Ja-W5LWVk] https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=sRlYwyqDA3Y – 9/11

294

Or, did the Israeli Military invade from abroad with help from its Zionist fifth columnists who permeate America's vast Military-Industrial-Media Complex?

[youtube=http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=DLTeQQsd_Bo]

And the US Military, either deliberately or due to sheer incompetence, just allowed the Israelis to get away with 9/11 despite having Prior Knowledge of the smokescreen of Using Planes as Weapons? Core Of Corruption Volume 1: In The Shadows Click to listen: Guns and Butter - 'Demolition Access To the World Trade Centre Towers' with Kevin Ryan January 12, 2011

Or, were they all in it together, each according to their compartmentalized agenda, seeking both windfall profits for the military-industrial complex, and imperial mobilization for one-world government of the Zionist oligarchy?

War by Deception 2011 The shadow government and shadow economy

Muslims didn’t do 9-11 – Why won’t the world say it?

Is there some essential difference between the US, UK, EU and their Eastern Mediterranean outpost where Faking Terror for World Government by their common Invisible Government is concerned?

Why else would they be rapidly transforming the entire Western Hemisphere into grotesque police states? unless, “World government could only be kept in being by force”!

295

Zahir Ebrahim: What have I learnt? 1) “the pitiable conclusion that almost all of the dissent in the West, especially that led by the white man, is bogus!”; 2) that, The 9/11 Truth Movement is Controlled Opposition craftily combining Modified Limited Hangout (belatedly arguing a fact that was already obvious on the very day of September 11, 2001 that the US government is lying) with heavy dosage of Beneficial Cognitive Diversity (creating many HOW arguments instead of focussed political capital to derail imperial mobilization); 3) whether it is dissent of useful idiots or vile mercenaries is IRRELEVANT -- because, like The Anti-war Movement, it was a priori socially engineered to be ineffective; for, in the Art of War, “the victorious strategist only seeks battle after the victory has been won”!!!

“9/11 is a point of departure for me ... I see the deliberate hands of the American-Israeli intelligence agencies and/or “Second Foundations” from deep within the American ruling elite in orchestrating this New Pearl Harbor. For a country that can sense what is deep within the bowels of the Earth and in the farthest reaches of the heavens, that seeks“ full spectrum dominance” of air, land, sea, space, cyberspace, et. al. in its own military doctrines, and that publicly warns in its strategy documents that the only way for it to embark on this “imperial mobilization” is an increased military budget that can only come about in a “new pearl harbour”, 9-11 has only one reality – self-inflicted. ---

296

Chapter 2: Don't Ever Ask “Why is it possible to hate America” Prisoners of the Cave

“I am betting that when knowledge of the crime of the emperor comes to them, and their complicity in it is realized by them, that like Lady Macbeth, the American public will be torn by their good conscience, that they will be as unable to remain “innocent of knowledge” as Lady Macbeth, and will endeavour to right the wrongs done in their name by their successive governments. As Arundhati Roy, put it in a speech: “Yours is by no means a great nation – but you could be a great people – history is giving you the chance – seize the time.” I am betting that the conscience of its own people will prove to be the real fifth column in the United States of America.

Perhaps somewhat idealistic, but it is precisely ideals that seem to be lacking in the collective wisdom of this nation, where mostly everything is viewed from the distorted prism of the pragmatic, the expeditious, the instantly gratifying, and the “might makes right” imperial sight. Its injection into the American polity cannot be a bad thing. I don't expect everyone to necessarily agree with my work, the point of it being not to make you agree with me, but to motivate you into examining your invisible chains in the hope that if you earnestly look for them, you will likely find them. --- Postscript Prisoners of the Cave

The world pleads: “God save us from American peace and liberty”

.“This irrational behaviour is only possible because we, the citizens of the nation, permit it. It is no longer a question of controlling a military-industrial complex, but rather, of keeping the United States from becoming a totally military culture. ---

297

And just as his predecessors did,

President OBAMA too reiterates who the enemy is, even threatening the public to not question America's official sacred story of who the enemy is, and cleverly lumping “questioning 9/11” with “justifying 9/11”

.“I am aware that there is still some who would question, or even justify the offense of 911.

But let us be clear. Al Qaeeda killed nearly 3000 people on that day. The victims were innocent men, women, and children from America and many other nations who had done nothing to harm anybody.

And yet Al Qaeeda chose to ruthlessly murder these people, claimed credit for the attack, and even now states their determination to kill on a massive scale.

They have affiliates in many countries, to try to expand their reach.

These are not opinions to be debated. These are facts to be dealt with.

Okay, Mr. President! But can you also inform us how did “Al-Qaeeda” cause this third WTC-7 building demolition on 9/11?

Footage of WTC 7 destruction showing its Penthouse Collapse before the building's symmetric and catastrophic demolition into its own footprint

And how did “Al-Qaeeda” cause this WTC explosion?

Does the pulverized WTC tower into such a fine dust debris look like a Gravity Collapse of millions of tons of steel and concrete due to fire to you?

298

And can you explain what super-technology Al Qaeeda possessed that they can pulverize steel and concrete into dust but leave the sacred mounds of paper alone? According to ABC News: “But most interesting, in the mix, they are looking they think, at specs of steel that used to be beams and elevators, marble and the lobby floor and facings, so what were once the strongest architectural elements in the two towers, were pulverized. Large portions turned into clouds, like this one. Still there is this mystery. If some of the hardest materials were vaporized, how to account for the presence everywhere of paper. Fully intact letters, business forms, stationary, paper is so fragile, and combustible, and yet, somehow, maybe because we have so much of it, it was everywhere.” --- ABC News.

And, by the verdict of your own logic of 3000 innocent victims killed by “Al-Qaeeda” on 9/11, what of the several million INNOCENT CIVILIAN VICTIMS barbarically murdered by the United States in Afghanistan and Iraq in retaliation for 9/11?

.“We have shot an amazing number of people, but to my knowledge, none has ever proven to be a threat, --- Gen. Stanley A. McChrystal, New York Times, March 26, 2010

.“all murderers are punished unless they kill in large numbers and to the sound of trumpets. --- Voltaire, Welcome Letter

Until of course, Victor's Justice catches up to the “apostles of death and hate”

299

.“ – we are not prepared to lay down a rule of criminal conduct against others which we would not be willing to have invoked against us. ---

U.S. Justice Robert H. Jackson, formulating the finer points of law as moral absolutes for administering victor's justice at Nuremberg, Minutes of Conference Session of July 23, 1945, International Conference on Military Trials : London, 1945

.“ – the only conceivable end for these merchants of aggression, and as they plunged the world into a blood bath, it is fitting that they take their final plunge in ignominy! ---

Of course, also only the sighted will ever see that from President George W. Bush to President Barrack Obama --- More faces changed, more they remained the same!

“The system is not only broken, it was crippled at birth – for it is so easily hijackable – from Wounded Knee to Iran, with new “Pearl Harbours” cleverly used for “imperial mobilization” from the USS Maine to 9/11 to the new nookular '9/11' that President Bush keeps warning the Americans and the world about in these ominous words as late as February 13, 2008:

300

“Good morning [America]. At this moment, somewhere in the world, terrorists are planning new attacks on our country. Their goal is to bring destruction to our shores that will make September the 11th pale by comparison.”

It is one continuous predatory imperative, from the Truman Doctrine, to the Carter Doctrine, to the Reagan Doctrine, and now to the Bush Doctrine. What did impeachment of Richard Nixon ever accomplish or deter, never mind restore to America's millions of untold and unaccounted victims in Asia and South America? ---

How to derail “imperial mobilization” and pre-empt the crossing of the Nuclear Rubicon

“What is the point of this analysis and all this verbage? The point is a matter of life and death for nations. That is the point of this. Let me be very precise.

Either the United States, or Israel, are poised to attack Iran, as noted by many commentators in the World press, this is March 2007.

I have two imperatives before me: A) I do not wish to hear in 2010 that there was an “intelligence failure”, that it was another Gulf of Tonkin, or some other new contrivance from the imaginative and fertile mind of the hectoring hegemons. ---

Dialog Among Civilizations – Why talks fail When the Hectoring Hegemons Are Running It and What to Do about It

Since the doctrines of aggression variously couched in Newspeak have remained the same despite the changing presidential faces in the White House, the AMERICAN PUBLIC'S REALPOLITIK to bravely extract their nation from the jaws of Big Brother's Fourth Reich also remains the same:

301

1) Firstly, anything, including all 'nuclear terrorist acts' on American soil, or anywhere in the world, all shocking revelations by whistle blowers, all leaks in newspapers, and all phantasmal mantras that distract from the afore-stated goal, regardless of how compelling the reasons, must be treated by the unwary and gullible American public and its intellectual dissenting-chiefs, as red herrings, pretexts, and deceptions for premeditated “imperial mobilization” by their nation's rulers.

2) Secondly, if there is reason for the United States to nuclear decimate any country or any peoples in purported 'self-defence', the American peoples must demand a ratification of the decision to go to war through a public referendum – let its great “populist democracy” speak directly in the modernity of the 21st century before it is called upon to make its sacrifices, before it is called upon to pay its taxes to fund the war, and before it is called upon to acquire innocent blood on its hands!

3) Thirdly, draw the soldiers, officers and war-technicians from the pool who vote for war! If they can vote yes to invade other nations and want only shatter the tabula rasa of a 'lesser humanity', then they must also first be willing to sign up for doing it themselves – instead of having a draft of economic conscription. Every 'yes' voting home in America must have at least one 'patriot' from the immediate family show up on the front-lines without exception – or their 'yes' vote is void!

What is War on Terror?

But first, some latest empiricism from the BBC: Nato contractors 'attacking own vehicles' in Pakistan

(as in Operation Gladio in Western Europe during the Cold War to keep the fear of Communism alive)

302

Top Secret: There may be times when host country governments show passivity or indecision in the face of Communist subversion ... US Army Intelligence must have the means of launching special operations which will convince host country governments and public opinion of the reality of the insurgent danger ... US Army Intelligence should seek to penetrate the insurgency by means of agents of special assignments, with the task of forming special action groups among the most radical elements of the insurgency. ---

“I never heard such a thing” William Colby, Director of CIA 1973-1976

Here are some straightforward definitions War on Terror:

'Might defines right' leads to “Hegemony is as old as mankind”, which in turn leads to If we don't have real enemies then we have to create or imagine some, and in either case yell 'we are being attacked' in order to

a) justify “imperial mobilization” and all its barbarianism upon the “terrorists”; and b) motivate an unwilling peoples into sacrificing for the agendas of achieving world government in the pretext of fighting terrorists in a perpetual Global War on Terror.

To understand this visually, watch how Oceania is in perpetual war with the murdering barbarian armies of Eurasia, and compare with George W. Bush ushering in the perpetual war with “either you are with us, or you are with the terrorists”.

So, how to do this in perpetuity in order to maintain police-state in perpetuity? Because, “World government could only be kept in being by force.”!

Insurgency and counter Insurgency: The American agenda for Pakistan is not a state-secret. Rather, it is only thinly disguised as perpetually fighting the “insurgents” in a lifetime of war, the World War IV.

303

Whereas, in reality, both the “insurgency”, and the “counter-insurgency”, are entirely designed and fabricated in the USA as part of the evolving tactics of Hegelian Dialectics. They are enacted on the ground by various two-bit errand boys and expert trigger pullers.

The already well-known existence of “black-ops assassination squads” in Pakistan/Afghanistan, known to the local peoples for years as the real prime-movers behind the heinous local terrorist acts, belatedly confirmed by NYT, WP, and NYT, in August 2009.

See these two December 2008 reports on the Mumbai terrorist Act as reportedly orchestrated by ALI BABA from his perch in the Hindu Kush.

The arrival of the black-ops in the region is not recent, albeit the public disclosures might be.

Out of uniform and In-uniform forces: To put this ominous presence of soldiers of freedom and fortune on Pakistani soil in full black-ops context of NATO and the Western Alliance, of diabolically manufacturing and sustaining the very pretexts out of uniform tickling insurgency to enable the in-uniform forces to pursue counter-insurgency in the perpetual mission of fighting World War IV, it is sufficient to look at what is transpiring in IRAQ for lessons to wisely apply to one's own predicament in order to avoid a far worse one.

Excerpted from The De-capitation of Pakistan by its own Military.

But when you ask about this today of any among the “Massa” and their plentiful “House Negroes” around the world, like William Colby quoted above in the context of Operation Gladio of yesteryear, all only incestuously reinforce the white man's theme song of 9/11, that “Islam of ascism” of Osama Bin Laden and the Talibans /Al-Qaeeda is the enemy.

The House Negroes further rush to clarify the distinction between “good Muslim” and “bad Muslim” ostensibly to distance themselves from the “enemy', but in actuality only lending further credence to the existence of the enemy and its threat in full service to the “Massa”.

304

The Hegelian Dialectic Militant Islam vs. Moderate Islam will surely go down in history as among the greatest enablers of war and manufactured consent, rivalling and perhaps surpassing both Communism vs. Fascism and Communism vs. Capitalism of the twentieth century. It is their legatee for the twenty-first century. It is already called “World War IV”

(see Ex-CIA director: U.S. faces 'World War IV').

This is all what you hear on all media sources as consent is continually engineered for sustaining “imperial mobilization”. That's principally all there is to it. The rest is merely the narrations of the 1001 puppet-shows built on this core-lie. Its narrators are all murderers – their hands are as soaked in blood as those who press the triggers – but only the victor's justice can ever prove that in court.

As Hitler had observed at the peak of his own hubris: “The victor will not be asked afterward whether he told the truth or not. In starting and waging a war it is not the right that matters, but victory.”

For ordinary people to see all this truism only requires that they overthrow their own self-interests as the House Negroes of Empire. The ubiquitous indoctrinating mantras are only as potent as people's own self-interests in believing what they are told. If not for self-interest, Reality speak trivially nullifies Newspeak. All human beings are capable of thought. Try it. But not all are capable of giving up their self-interests.

When self-interest trumps morality, in Dante's colourful rendition: “the hottest places in hell are reserved for those who in a period of moral crisis, maintain their neutrality.”

'In the summer of 2005, the commission of the European parliament for security and defence, of which I am a member, was invited to a special screening created by the Washington Centre for Strategic [and International] Studies

305

(Slide: CSIS Debating 21st Century Nuclear Issues, Edited by Owen C. W. Price and Jenifer Mackby, subtitled Black-Dawn: Scenario-Based Exercise, dated: May 3 2004)

We were asked to watch a film which depicted what would happen in Europe, if Brussels was hit by a nuclear bomb.

Fifty thousand deaths, hundred thousand injured. The reactions of various European governments.

Suddenly, footage of Osama Bin Laden claiming responsibility for a nuclear attack on NATO headquarters comes on screen.

All members of the parliament, me included, were rendered speechless.

American experts from the Centre for Strategic Studies were on hand to explain the action on the screen.

Then a parliamentarian finally said: “Today we were shown a convincing demonstration of how Osama Bin Laden’s image can be completely manipulated. All the Osama’s we have seen over the years may never have existed. Just as a nuclear attack on NATO Headquarters in Brussels has never taken place.”'

FBI's Most Wanted Terrorist Osama Bin Laden - BUT NOT WANTED for the supreme international crime of 9/11! FBI Poster Snapshot April 22, 2008

306

Important Websites

Search instead for The Revolutionary Roots of the UN & UNESCO: Its purpose and Its Philos- ophy Rockefeller and Global Mind Control Home

Search Results

Quotes and Excerpts - Crossroad.to www.crossroad.to/Quotes/1index.html

Home Skip down to Genuine Faith (book excerpts). Global Control. The Revolutionary Roots of the UN*. The Hidden ... UNESCO: Its purpose and Its Philosophy* ... UNESCO's Declara- tion on Tolerance* ... Rockefeller & Global Mind Control.

The Hidden Control of the Council on Foreign Relations (CFR) www.crossroad.to/Quotes/globalism/cfr.htm

Quotes and Excerpts | Home ... More details here: The Revolutionary Roots of the UN... the CFR toward global control include familiar names such as David Rockefeller, ... and even own portions of the press for the press rules the mind of the people. .... It seizes in its long and powerful tentacles our executive officers, our ...

Rockefeller and the Global Media Censors www.crossroad.to/Quotes/globalism/rockefeller.htm

See also Rockefeller & Global Mind Control | The Mainstream Media.... Control &The Revo- lutionary Roots of the UN & UNESCO: Its purpose and Its Philosophy.

The Elite Engineering People to Love Their Servitude: The ... www.sagaciousnewsnetwork.com/the-elite-engineering-people-to-love-th...

Mar 10, 2015 - Their aim is global mind control over a reduced humanity consisting of ... slogan of their first big revolution, The French Revolution, they are in ... statement) has its roots in the “master race” concept of the Pharisaic.... wrote a paper titled, “UNESCO: It's Purpose and its Philosophy. .... The House of Rothschild

307

New World Order kjos1.securesites.net/Quotes/globalism/nwo.htm

See also The Revolutionary Roots of the UN ... new world order came about through the advent of a new tyrant or the outbreak of a bloody global war, or its end.

Skeletons in the Closet: Rockefeller History - Seek God www.seekgod.ca/rockefeller.htm

Since its inception the Rockefeller Foundation has given more than $2 billion to ... UN official lecture at meetings of the Arcane School, the international 'group of New World ... and who wrote the 1948, "UNESCO: Its Purpose and Its Philosophy. .... The CIA's mind control experiments under the Human Ecology Fund were...

New Eugenics and the Rise of the Global Scientific... www.globalresearch.ca/new-eugenics-and-the-rise-of...global.../20028

Jul 5, 2010 - When the government controls the distribution of food, its power is ... the 'Fi- nal Revolution' – where man can act directly on the mind-body of his fellows. ... The Rocke- feller foundations, Ford, Carnegie, Mellon, Harriman, and ... In 1946, Huxley wrote a paper titled, “UNESCO: It's Purpose and its Philosophy.

Real Conspiracies -- Past and Present - The Cutting Edge www.cuttingedge.org/articles/db075.htm

Sep 4, 2006 - See also The Revolutionary Roots of the UN ... funded revolutionaries and fuelled the global vision of totalitarian control.[4] .... "The chief evidence... can be found in the files of the HUAC (House of Un-American Activities Committee) which ... In his 1946 book, UNESCO: Its purpose and Its Philosophy, Huxley ...

Real Conspiracies – Past and Present | Moriel Archive moriel.org/MorielArchive/index.php/.../real-conspiracies-past-and-presen...

Aug 1, 2006 - Edward Mandell House, President Woodrow Wilson's mentor and adviser, No- vember 21, 1933.)”: ... have spawned fear, murder, lies, and revolution throughout history. ... Revolutionaries and fuelled the global vision of totalitarian control. .... In his 1946 book, UNESCO: Its purpose and Its Philosophy, Huxley...

308

A Chronology of the UN - The Revolutionary Steps to Global ... riddick2.blogspot.com/.../a-chronology-of-un-revolutionary-steps.html

Feb 28, 2015 - The roots of the United Nations -- the most visible part of the new ... Of course, many of the leaders who utilize these strategies has more totalitarian goals in mind. ... Control of the mainstream media and other propaganda channels...... Huxley, wrote in his book, UNESCO: Its Purpose and Its Philosophy:.

309

Quotes and Excerpts - Crossroad.to www.crossroad.to/Quotes/1index.html

The Hidden Control of the Council on Foreign Relations (CFR) www.crossroad.to/Quotes/globalism/cfr.htm

Quotes and Excerpts | Home ... More details here: The Revolutionary Roots of the UN... for two years, in the early 1960s, to examine its papers and secret records. ... CFR toward global control include familiar names such as David Rockefeller ... and even own portions of the press for the press rules the mind of the people.

Rockefeller and the Global Media Censors - Crossroad.to www.crossroad.to/Quotes/globalism/rockefeller.htm

See also Rockefeller & Global Mind Control | The Mainstream Media.... Control &The Revo- lutionary Roots of the UN & UNESCO: Its purpose and Its Philosophy.

A Chronology of the UN: The Revolutionary Steps to Global... www.crossroad.to/Excerpts/chronologies/un.htm

'E Pluribus Unum' ('One out of many') - the masonic vision of one controlled world ... The roots of the United Nations -- the most visible part of the new global ... many of the leaders who utilize these strategies have more totalitarian goals in mind...... Julian Huxley, wrote in his book, UNESCO: Its Purpose and Its Philosophy:

Skeletons in the Closet: Rockefeller History - Seek God www.seekgod.ca/rockefeller.htm

310

The Elite Engineering People to Love Their Servitude: The... www.sagaciousnewsnetwork.com/the-elite-engineering-people-to-love-th...

Mar 10, 2015 - Home · About ... Their aim is global mind control over a reduced humanity consisting of ... the slogan of their first big revolution, The French Revolution, they are in fact ... statement) has its roots in the “master race” concept of the Pharisaic .... Wrote a paper titled, “UNESCO: It's Purpose and its Philosophy.

Real Conspiracies -- Past and Present - The Cutting Edge www.cuttingedge.org/articles/db075.htm

Sep 4, 2006 - See also The Revolutionary Roots of the UN ... funded revolutionaries and fuelled the global vision of totalitarian control.... "The chief evidence... can be found in the files of the HUAC (House of Un-American Activities Committee) which ... In his 1946 book, UNESCO: Its purpose and Its Philosophy, Huxley ...

New World Order kjos1.securesites.net/Quotes/globalism/nwo.htm

See also The Revolutionary Roots of the UN ... new world order came about through the advent of a new tyrant or the outbreak of a bloody global war, or its end.

The Century-Old Roots of Common Core Standards kjos1.securesites.net/News/archive/common-core.htm

From Christian Values to Global Mind Control ... In 1947, Julian Huxley, the first head of the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO) ...its own philosophy and background of ideas and with its own broad purpose. ...House term; John Dewey was laying the foundations for a revolutionary...

New Eugenics and the Rise of the Global Scientific... www.globalresearch.ca/new-eugenics-and-the-rise-of...global.../20028

Jul 5, 2010 - The Technological Revolution and the Future of Freedom, Part 3.... Psycho- social revolution of the mind, creating a new global political economy ... When the government controls the distribution of food, its power is absolute.... In 1946, Huxley wrote a paper titled, “UNESCO: It's Purpose and its Philosophy.

311